Overview 1

Name and Function of Each Unit 2

Common Basic Operations 3
Range and Bearing Measurement Methods 4
Target Tracking and AIS 5
Functions of the ECDIS 6
JAN-5203 Route Planning 7
Route Monitoring 8
Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9
Automatic Sailing (Unsupported) 10
Operating a Chart 11
Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart
Manually 12
Route Logbook 13
Planning System Setting Up Screen View 14
Setting Up Alerts 15
Setting Up the Operation Mode 16
Adjusting and Setting Up Equipment (for
Services) 17
Instruction Manual Playing Back Data Recorded During
Navigation [Playback] 18
Maintenance & Inspection 19
Failures and After-Sale Services 20
About Disposal 21
Specifications 22
Alert List APP A
Menu List and Materials APP B
 PREFACE

Thank you for purchasing JAN-5203

This equipment meets the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime
Organization) and the IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to improve
safety, reduce fuel combustion, concentrate voyage information as the main device of the INS
(Integrated Navigation System).

 For the best operation, read this manual thoroughly before use.
 Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
 The LCD of this equipment uses thin film transistors (TFT). If some pixels on the screen
are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is brighter than usual, it is not because of
defect, instead it is because of inherent characteristic of the TFT display technology.
 The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.

i
  Safety Cautions 

Cautions for High Voltage

High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally harmless
in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very dangerous. (Any
person other than authorized service engineers should not maintain, inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant deaths from
electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts could lead to
electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand into the inside of
apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is strongly suggested to turn
off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge with a wire having its one end
positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you put your hand into the inside of
apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer charged. Extra protection is ensured by
wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another important precaution to observe is to keep one
hand in your pocket at a time, instead of using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of electrical
shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the burnt site
completely and obtain medical care immediately.

Precautions for Rescue of Victim

of Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible without
touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating material
such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric shock. If
the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A victim of
electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop, resulting in
unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid immediately.

ii
  Emergency Measures 

Method of First-Aid Treatment

Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

Apply artificial respiration to the person who collapsed, minimizing moving as much as
possible avoiding risks. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.

(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.

(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.

(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.

(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.

(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.

(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)

(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.

iii
Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a
Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
∗ Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (To spread the airway)
(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
(4) Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
(5) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
(6) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.

Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

[1] (1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand.→ [1].
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth
artificial respiration.
[2]
(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your
mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose→ [2].
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
→ [3].

[3] (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.

Fig. 1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

iv
Flow of Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
A person is collapsing.
- Secure the safety of the surrounding area.
- Prevent secondary disasters.

Listen to the appeal of the

Check for response. Responding injured or ill person and give
- Call while tapping the shoulder. the necessary first-aid
Not responding
Ask for help.
- Make an emergency call.
- Ask to bring an AED. Recovery position
- Lay the injured or
ill person on
Open the airway. Breathing
his/her side and
- Check for breathing. wait for the arrival
Not breathing of the emergency
services.
Give 2 rescue breaths; omittable Note(1)

Give CPR. Note(1) Omission of rescue breathing:

- 30 chest compressions If there is a fear of infection because the
- Give 2 rescue breaths; omittable Note(1) injured or ill person has an intraoral injury,
you are hesitant about giving mouth-to-mouth
resuscitation, or preparing the mouthpiece for
Arrival of an AED rescue breathing takes too long, omit rescue
- Turn on the power. breathing and proceed to the next step.
- Use the AED by following its voice prompts.
Fitting of the electrode pads, etc.

Automatic electrocardiogram Electric shock is not needed.

analysis
- Do not touch the injured or ill
person.

Electric shock is needed.

The AED
Delivery of electric shock
automatically
analyzes the When the injured or ill
heart rhythm person has been
every 2 min. handed over to the
Resume CPR from chest
emergency services or
compressions by following the
When to has started moaning or
voice prompts of the AED.
stop CPR breathing normally, lay
him/her on his/her side
in a recovery position
and wait for the arrival
of emergency services.

v
 Specific Procedures for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)

1. Check the scene for safety to prevent secondary disasters

a) Do not touch the injured or ill person in panic when an accident Are you OK?
has occurred. (Doing so may cause electric shock to the
first-aiders.)
b) Do not panic and be sure to turn off the power. Then, gently move
the injured or ill person to a safe place away from the electrical
circuit.

2. Check for responsiveness

a) Tap the shoulder of the injured or ill and shout in the ear saying, "Are you OK?"
b) If the person opens his/her eyes or there is some response or gesture, determine it as
"responding." But, if there is no response or gesture, determine it as "not responding."

3. If responding
Please call an
a) Give first-aid treatment. ambulance.
Please bring an AED.

4. If not responding
a) Ask for help loudly. Ask somebody to make an emergency call
and bring an AED.
• Somebody has collapsed. Please help.
• Please call an ambulance.
• Please bring an AED.
• If there is nobody to help, call an ambulance yourself.

5. Open the airway

a) Touch the forehead with one hand. Lift the chin with the two fingers
of the middle finger and forefinger of the other hand and push down
on the forehead as you lift the jaw to bring the chin forward to open
the airway. If neck injury is suspected, open the airway by lifting the
lower jaw.

6. Check for breathing

a) After opening the airway, check quickly for breathing for no more than
10 seconds. Put your cheek down by the mouth and nose area of the
injured or ill person, look at his/her chest and abdomen, and check the following three points.
• Look to see if the chest and abdomen are rising and falling.
• Listen for breathing.
• Feel for breath against your cheek.

vi
 b) If the injured or ill person is breathing, place him/her in the recovery
position and wait for the arrival of the emergency services.
• Position the injured or ill person on his/her side, maintain a clear
and open airway by pushing the head backward while positioning
Roll gently in the opposite
their mouth downward. To maintain proper blood circulation, roll direction every 30 minutes.

him/her gently to position them in the recovery position in the

opposite direction every 30 minutes.

7. Give 2 rescue breaths (omittable)

a) If opening the airway does not cause the injured or ill person to begin
CPR mask
to breathe normally, give rescue breaths.
b) If there is a fear of infection because the injured or ill person has an
intraoral injury, you are hesitant about giving mouth-to-mouth
resuscitation, or getting and preparing the mouthpiece for rescue Mouthpiece for rescue breathing

breathing takes too long, omit rescue breathing and perform chest
compressions.
c) When performing rescue breathing, it is recommended to use a
mouthpiece for rescue breathing and other protective devices to
prevent infections.
d) While maintaining an open airway, pinch the person's nose shut with
your thumb and forefinger of the hand used to push down the
forehead.
e) Open your mouth widely to completely cover the mouth of the injured or ill person so that no air
will escape. Give rescue breathing twice in about 1 second and check if the chest rises.

8. Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) (combination of chest compressions and

rescue breaths)
a) Chest compressions
1) Position of chest compressions
• Position the heel of one hand in the center of the chest, approximately between the
nipples, and place your other hand on top of the one that is in position.

vii
 2) Perform chest compressions
• Perform uninterrupted chest compressions of Compress
with these
parts (the
30 at the rate of about 100 times per minute. heels of
both
hands).
While locking your elbows positioning yourself
vertically above your hands.
• With each compression, depress the chest wall to a depth of approximately 4 to 5 cm.

b) Combination of 30 chest compressions and 2 rescue breaths

1) After performing 30 chest compressions, give 2 rescue 30 times

breaths. If rescue breathing is omitted, perform only chest

compressions.
2 times
2) Continuously perform the combination of 30 chest
compressions and 2 rescue breaths without interruption.
3) If there are two or more first-aiders, alternate with each other
approximately every two minutes (five cycles of compressions
and ventilations at a ratio of 30:2) without interruption.

9. When to stop cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)

a) When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the
emergency services
b) When the injured or ill person has started moaning or breathing
normally, lay him/her on his/her side in a recovery position and wait
for the arrival of emergency services.

10. Arrival and preparation of an AED

a) Place the AED at an easy-to-use position. If
there are multiple first-aiders, continue CPR
until the AED becomes ready.
b) Turn on the power to the AED unit.
Turn on the power.
Depending on the model of the AED, you
may have to push the power on button, or the AED automatically turns on when you open the
cover.
c) Follow the voice prompts of the AED.

11. Attach the electrode pads to the injured or ill person's bare chest
a) Remove all clothing from the chest, abdomen, and arms.
b) Open the package of electrode pads, peel the pads off and securely
place them on the chest of the injured or ill person, with the adhesive
side facing the chest. If the pads are not securely attached to the chest,
the AED may not function. Paste the pads exactly at the positions
viii
 indicated on the pads, If the chest is wet with water, wipe dry with a dry
towel and the like, and then paste the pads. If there is a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator (ICD), paste the pads at least 3cm
away from them. If a medical patch or plaster is present, peel it off and
then paste the pads. If the injured or ill person's chest hair is thick,
paste the pads on the chest hair once, peel them off to remove the
chest hair, and then paste new pads.
c) Some AED models require to connect a connector by following voice prompts.
d) The electrode pads for small children should not be used for children over the age of 8 and for
adults.

12. Electrocardiogram analysis

a) The AED automatically analyzes electrocardiograms. Follow the
voice prompts of the AED and ensure that nobody is touching the
injured or ill person while you are operating the AED.
b) On some AED models, you may need to push a button to analyze
the heart rhythm.

13. Electric shock (defibrillation)

a) If the AED determines that electric shock is needed, the voice
prompt saying, "Shock is needed" is issued and charging starts
automatically.
b) When charging is completed, the voice prompt saying, "Press the
shock button" is issued and the shock button flashes.
Press the shock button.
c) The first-aider must get away from the injured or ill person, make
sure that no one is touching him/her, and then press the shock button.
d) When electric shock is delivered, the body of the injured or ill person may jerk.

14. Resume cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).

Resume CPR consisting of 30 chest compressions
and 2 rescue breaths by following the voice
prompts of the AED.

15. Automatic electrocardiogram analysis

a) When 2 minutes have elapsed since you resumed cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), the
AED automatically analyzes the electrocardiogram.
b) If you suspended CPR by following voice prompts and AED voice prompt informs you that
shock is needed, give electric shock again by following the voice prompts.
If AED voice prompt informs you that no shock is needed, immediately resume CPR.

ix
16. When to stop CPR (Keep the electrode pads on.)
a) When the injured or ill person has been handed over to the emergency services
b) When the injured or ill person has started moaning or breathing normally, lay him/her on
his/her side in a recovery position and wait for the arrival of emergency services.

x
  Pictorial Indication 

Meanings of Pictorial Indication

Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and
are shown on this equipment so that you can operate them
safely and correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or
to other persons and any damage to your property during
operation. Such indications and their meanings are as
follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:

This indication is shown where incorrect equipment

! DANGER operation due to negligence may cause death or serious
injuries.

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to

! WARNING be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this

indication is neglected and these equipment are not
operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to

! CAUTION be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if

this indication is neglected and these equipment are not
operated correctly.

Examples of Pictorial Indication

The  mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and

WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric Shock" in the example
Electric Shock on the left) is shown in the mark.

The  mark represents prohibition.

Detailed contents of the prohibited action ("Disassembling
Prohibited" in the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Disassembling
Prohibited

! The  mark represents instruction.

Detailed contents of the instruction ("Disconnect the power plug"
in the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Disconnect
the power plug

Warning Label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.

xi
 Precautions upon Equipment Operation 

DANGER
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request
servicing.

Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.

When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off.
Failure may result in electric shock.

Turn off all the main powers before cleaning the equipment. Especially when
an UPS is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from
the UPS even after the indicator and the ECDIS are turned off. Failure may
result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock.

xii
When turning off the power supply, do not hold down the power button of the
operation unit.
Otherwise, a trouble may occur due to termination failure.

When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power so that
the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the
power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work may result in
electric shock, equipment failure, or accidents.

When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry
cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Failure will
result in damage to the screen surface.

Do not change Initial Level/Area Offset unless absolutely necessary.

Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and thus
collisions may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Confirm computer virus does not exist in USB flash memory beforehand
when reading and writing of the file by using USB flash memory.
Influences other equipment when the display unit is infected with the virus,
and it may cause a breakdown.

Do not remove USB flash memory while the access lamp (in USB flash drive)
is flashing.
Data may be damaged when the USB flash memory is inserted or removed
while accessing it, and it may cause a breakdown.

Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction
may occur.

In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and
contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire,
an electric shock or a malfunction.

In case you find smoke, unusual odor or extreme high heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable
from an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.

xiii
Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position
(deviated from the actual position), accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the [Offset] badge is displayed at the
position display on the Own Ship Information. Check the indication, and
cancel the offset function if necessary. Also, the message "Position Shift" is
displayed in the message display area.

Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
the safety when crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WPT during automatic sailing,
be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually by the operator
him/herself.
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.

Input the ship’s parameter accurately according to the specification of the

ship.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Change of the color of the Day/Night button, particularly the use of the [Night]
color, may interfere with the recognition of display information.

When moving the dialog box, move to the position that does not cover the
operation area. If the dialog box covers the operation area, it may interfere
the recognition of the display information.

xiv
Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation aid. The final
navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself.
Making the final navigation decision based only on tracking target information
may cause accidents.
Tracking target information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms
may contain some errors. Also, targets that are not detected by the radar
cannot be acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may
cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.
Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking
conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for
ship operations such as collision avoidance.

Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause

accidents such as collisions.

Make sure that two or more staff member work together when replacing the
LCD. If only one person attempts to replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and
become injured.

Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel.

Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation, and this may lead to
accidents or equipment failure.

Do not make any adjustments during navigation.

Failure may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to
accidents or equipment failure.

Do not change the quantization level settings unless absolutely necessary.

If set at an inappropriate value, the acquisition of target tracking function and
the tracking function deteriorate, and this may lead to accidents.

Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight for a long time or in
the temperatures above 55°C.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.

Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.

xv
This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.
• If no backup measures, such as using another ECDIS unit for
confirmation, are taken, be sure to use official marine charts together with
this equipment to make any navigational decision.
• This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically.
The positional information should always be checked by the operator.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.

Do not leave the disc in the DVD drive.

Malfunctions of the drives may result.

• Do not place any object on the operation panel.

In particular, if a hot object is placed on the operation panel, it can cause
deformation of the surface of the operation panel.
• Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.

Make sure that the main power is turned off before inspection or replacement
of parts.
Otherwise, an electric shock, a fire, or a malfunction may occur.

• If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately

turn off the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire
or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.

Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).

Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.

During sailing, be sure to check the own ship’s position and bearing as often
as necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

xvi
Do not turn off the power during Backup/Restore.
Otherwise, a function may fail, and an accident may occur.

Do not do the backup operation of data while sailing.

The ECDIS application should be ended to begin the data backup. It
becomes impossible to observe using the ECDIS and this may lead to
accidents.

Before performing recovery of images in C drive, make sure that the backup
power supply (such as DC power supply) of the equipment is connected. If
the power supply is disconnected during recovery operation, equipment
activation failure may occur, causing an accident.

Do not turn off the power supply during recovery operation of the images in C
drive.
Otherwise, a function fault may occur, causing an accident.

In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature, do
pre-heat more than 30 minutes.
Otherwise, an operation failure may occur and an accident may occur.

xvii
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label

xviii
 Glossary

Activated target : A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping

AIS target for the display of additional information

AIO : Admiralty Information Overlay published by United Kingdom

Hydrographic Office (UKHO).

AIS : Automatic Identification System

Anti-clutter rain : Rain/snow clutter suppression

Anti-clutter sea : Sea clutter suppression

ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO

Associated target : A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a AIS target
which are decided as the same

AUTO SAIL : The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route.
Same as automatic sailing.

AZ : Acquisition/Activation zone

AZI : AZImuth stabilization mode

Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data

BCR/BCT : Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time

CCRP : Consistent Common Reference Point. The own ship position, to which
all horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative
course, relative speed, CPA or TCPA are referenced, typically the
conning position of the bridge.

Cell Permit : A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,
PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic
Department of Japan Coast Guard.

Chart Maintenance : Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.

Chirp : A type of transmission waveform with intra-pulse frequency

modulation used by solid-state radars. Its radio wave type is classified
as Q0N.

Clutter : Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or

snow.

C-MAP : Digital chart data by Jeppesen (formerly, C-MAP, Norway)

xix
C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by Jeppesen (formerly, C-MAP,
Norway) CTS : Course To Steer. Heading command.

COG : Course Over the Ground

CORREL : CORRELation

CPA/TCPA : Distance to the Closest Point of Approach/Time to the Closest Point of

Approach.

CTS : Course To Steer. Heading command.

CTW : Course Through Water. The direction of the ship's movement through
the water

C UP : Course up. Own ship’s course is pointed to the top center of the radar
display.

Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart

Display : Screen displayed on the LCD

DIST : Distance

DNV : Det Norske Veritas

DR : Dead Reckoning

DRIFT : The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on the
horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.

Dynamic License : Dynamic licensing of C-Map chart license by Jeppesen

EBL : Electronic Bearing Line

ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

ENH : Enhance

ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD : Estimated Time of Departure

F.ETA : Final Estimated Time of Arrival. Estimated time of arrival to the last
WPT

Frequency deviation range : The range of variation of the Q0N frequency used for transmission
waves of a solid-state radar. Generally, the greater the frequency
deviation range, the higher the resolution in the range direction.

GC : Great Circle

xx
GPS : Global Positioning System

HDG : Heading. Ship’s heading

HL : Heading Line

HSC : High Speed Craft. Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS
for high speed craft

H UP : Head up. Own ship’s heading line is always pointed to the top center
of the radar display.

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department :

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.

Publisher of ENC

IHO : International Hydrographic Office

IMO : International Maritime Organization

Import (Chart Maintenance) : A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be

displayed on ECDIS

Interswitch Unit : A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or
more radar antennas

IR : Radar Interference Rejecter

ISW : InterSWitch unit

LAT : Latitude

Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT : Local Mean Time

LON : Longitude

Lost tracked target : One for which target information is no longer available due to poor, lost
or obscured signals.

LP : Long Pulse

MED : Marine Equipment Directive. Request standard for standardization of

marine equipment within the EU region

MFD : Abbreviation of this equipment name. The formal name is Multi

Function Display. The navigation support functions such as radar,
ECDIS, CID, and AMS with this equipment can be executed by
switching.

MMSI : Maritime Mobile Service Identity

xxi
MOB : Man Over Board

MON : Performance Monitor

MP : Medium Pulse

NM : Nautical Mile 1 nm=1852 m

N UP : The north is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.
(North up)

P0N : Unmodulated pulse, which is a type of transmission radio wave. While

it is a type of radio wave usually used by radars equipped with
magnetrons, radio waves with a short pulse length are used also by
solid-state radars for short-range detection.

Past positions : Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target and
the own ship.

PI : Parallel Index line

POSN : POSitioN

Power amplifier : A radio frequency amplifier circuit consisting of semiconductor

elements used for solid-state radars. It employs a high frequency, high
power FET.

PRF : Pulse Repetition Frequency. The number of radar pulses transmitted

each second.

PRIMAR STAVENGER : A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted

charts, S-63

Primary : Main positioning sensor

PROC : PROCess. Radar signal processing function

Pulse compression : Correlation processing performed when a transmitted chirp signal is

received by a solid-state radar after reflecting off the target. This
processing gain enables the radar to have necessary detection
capability even when a transmission power is low.

Q0N : A type of radio wave with intra-pulse frequency modulation. It is used

for solid-state pulse compression radars.

Radar beacon : A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmission and
generates radio wave

Range : An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half
of the length of the chart display screen.

Reference target : A fixed target specified to calculate the speed over the ground

Relative vector : A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship’s motion

xxii
Report : User report to be issued periodically for using the Dynamic License
method of Jeppesen continuously

RL : Rhumb Line

RM : Relative Motion. A display on which the position of own ship remains

fixed, and all targets move relative to own ship.

RM(R) : Relative Motion. Relative Trails

RM(T) : Relative Motion. True Trails

ROT : Rate Of Turn. Change of heading per time unit

Route : A set of waypoints

RR : Range Rings

Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.

S-57 : IHO Transfer Standard for Digital Hydrographic Data

S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme

SA Certificate file : An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for
import/ update of S-63 chart.

SART : Search And Rescue Transponder

Scale : The display scale

Sea state : The average height of the wave expressed by dividing into several
classes.

SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart

SET : The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on the
horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.

Ship-avoiding operation : To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic
navigation, regardless of the scheduled route

Sleeping AIS target : A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped
with AIS

SOG : Speed Over the Ground

SP : Short Pulse

Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth

SSR: Solid State Radar : Radar that uses semiconductor elements instead of magnetron, which
requires periodic replacement. It is built with a system that ensures
necessary detection capability even when a transmission output is low,

xxiii
 by using chirp signals with a long pulse length upon transmission and
performing pulse compression upon reception

STAB : STABilization

STW : Speed Through Water

TCS : Track Control Systems

TCPA : Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship

TM : True Motion. A display across which the own ship and targets move
with their own true motions.

To WPT : To Waypoint (To WPT)

Trails : Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an

afterglow

Trial maneuver : A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to perform a
proposed maneuver for navigation and collision avoidance purposes

True vector : A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, as a result
of input of the course and speed of the own ship

TT : Target Tracking

TTG : Time To Go. Time to next waypoint.

TXRX : Transmitter-Receiver Unit

UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

Update (Chart Maintenance) : A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on
the imported chart.

Update CD : Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. This can
be used when Base CD data has been imported.

USER CODE : A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and
S-63 charts.

UTC : Universal Time, Coordinated

VDR : Voyage Data Recorder

VRM : Variable Range Marker

WOL : Wheel Over Line

WOP : Wheel Over Point

WPT : Waypoint

xxiv
WPT-WPT : The division of the leg specified by two points. Displays data between
two consecutive waypoints.

XTD : Cross Track Distance

XTL : Cross Track Limit

xxv
 How to Use This Manual
Structure of this manual
This manual is structured as shown below. Read the necessary section according to the purpose.

Item Contents
Preface Describes the purposes of using this equipment.
Safety Cautions Describes the cautions for a high voltage, precautions
Emergency Measures for rescue of victims of an electric shock, and the
method of First-Aid treatment.
Pictorial Indication Describes the safety precautions and warning on this
Precautions upon Equipment Operation equipment.
The Mounting Point of the Warning Describes the warning label attachment position on
Label this equipment.
Equipment Appearance Describes the appearance of this equipment.
Glossary Describes the special terminologies and
equipment-specific terminologies that are used in this
manual.
How to use this manual This page

<Basic Operation>
Section 1 Overview Describes the overview of this equipment.
Section 2 Describes the name and function of each unit of this
Name and Function of Each Unit equipment.
Section 3 Describes the common basic operations of ECDIS.
Common Basic Operations
Section 4 Describes the measuring methods of distance and
Range and Bearing Measurement bearing using the measuring tools.
Methods

<Function>
Section 5 Describes the methods of using target tracking and
Target Tracking and AIS AIS.
Section 6 Describes the basic ECDIS operations.
Functions of the ECDIS
Section 7 Describes route planning.
Route Planning
Section 8 Describes route monitoring.
Route Monitoring
Section 9 Describes anchor monitoring.
Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
Section 10 Describes automatic sailing.
Automatic Sailing (Option) *1
*1 In case of JAN-5203, automatic sailing function is not available by function restriction.

xxvi
<Function>
Section 11 Describes chart operations.
Operating a Chart
Section 12 Describes creation of user charts and automatic chart
Creating a User Chart/ Updating a Chart updating.
Section 13 Describes the logbook.
Logbook
Section 14 Describes the detail setting of screen display.
Setting Up Screen View
Section 15 Describes the alert detail setting for avoiding dangers.
Setting Up Alerts
Section 16 Describes the detail setting of the operation modes of
Setting Up the Operation Mode this equipment.

<Reference>
Section 17 Describes the equipment adjustments and setting that
Adjusting and Setting Up Equipment (for are performed by the maintenance engineers.
Services)
Section 18 Describes playback of the data recorded during
Playing Back Data Recorded During sailing.
Navigation [Playback]
Section 19 Describes the maintenance and inspection of this
Maintenance & Inspection equipment.
Section 10 Describes the failure handling measures and
Failures and After-Sale Services aftercare services of this equipment.
Section 21 Describes the cautions on disposing of this
About Disposal equipment.
Section 22 Describes the specification of this equipment.
Specifications
Appendix A Describes the alert list.
Alert List
Appendix B Describes the materials such as the menu list.
Menu List

xxvii
Notations
Operation notations
Trackball operations on the operation panel are expressed as follows.

Operation
Click the left button.
Double-click the left button.
Click the right button
Notation
Click
Example: Click on the object.
Double-click
Example: Determine the drawing by double-click.
Click the right mouse button
Example: Display the context menu by clicking the right mouse
button.

The buttons and dialog boxes on the screen are expressed as follows.

Button type Notation

Button with button name indicated Example: → [AUTO] (automatic) button

Button with an indication other than the Shown as follows.
button name such as an icon
Example: → Day/Night button

A series menu selection operations is expressed as follows.

Click on [User Chart] - [Information Mark Property] - [Position] on the menu.

xxviii
 Contents

PREFACE.................................................................................................................... i
 Safety Cautions 
............................................................................................ ii
 Emergency Measures 
................................................................................. iii
Specific Procedures for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) ...................... vi

 Pictorial Indication  ...................................................................................... xi

 Precautions upon Equipment Operation  ................................................. xii
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label ......................................................... xviii
Glossary ................................................................................................................. xix
How to Use This Manual ..................................................................................... xxvi
Section 1 Overview ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Functions ...................................................................................................... 1-3

1.2 Features ........................................................................................................ 1-4

1.3 Components ................................................................................................. 1-5

1.4 Structure ....................................................................................................... 1-6

1.5 General System Diagrams ......................................................................... 1-12

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit......................................................... 2-1

2.1 Name and Main Function of the Each Unit ................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 POWER button of the processing unit .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Display unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Names and Main Functions of the Top Screen .......................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Task Switching Button ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Right Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 Left Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.4 Alert notification area ......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.5 Key assignment indication area ........................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.6 Own Ship Information ........................................................................................................ 2-9
2.2.7 Chart Information Area (ENC/C-MAP) .............................................................................. 2-12
2.2.8 Chart Information Area (RNC) ........................................................................................... 2-14
2.2.9 Sub Information Area ......................................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.10 Bottom Bar (Sub Information Area) ................................................................................. 2-18
2.2.11 ARCS PIN input dialog box .............................................................................................. 2-20
2.3 Common Information Window................................................................... 2-21
2.3.1 Information monitor windows............................................................................................. 2-22
2.3.2 Information reference windows ......................................................................................... 2-36

(1) 目次
Section 3 Basic Operations .................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Powering On and Starting ........................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Starting Each Mode ...................................................................................... 3-2

3.3 Basic Operations when using a Trackball .................................................. 3-4

3.3.1 Basic trackball operations ................................................................................................. 3-4
3.3.2 Basic click operations ........................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.3 Basic operations of double-clicking ................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.4 Basic operations of clicking the right button ...................................................................... 3-6
3.3.5 Displaying simplified information and operational guide of objects .................................. 3-6
3.3.6 Cursor types ...................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4 Basic Menu Operations................................................................................ 3-9
3.4.1 Opening the menu ............................................................................................................. 3-9
3.4.2 Menu list ............................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.3 Closing the menu .............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.5 Basic Dialog Box Operations .................................................................... 3-13
3.5.1 Changing dialog box settings ............................................................................................ 3-13
3.5.2 Closing a dialog box .......................................................................................................... 3-14
3.5.3 Title Bar ............................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.6 Operation of the Information Monitor Window ........................................ 3-16
3.6.1 Opening the information monitor window .......................................................................... 3-16
3.6.2 Displaying an information monitor window from other than the "Page Selection" dialog
box ................................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.7 Confirming and Acknowledging an Alert.................................................. 3-20
3.7.1 Stopping a buzzer ............................................................................................................. 3-21
3.7.2 Confirming alert contents .................................................................................................. 3-21
3.7.3 Acknowledging the alert .................................................................................................... 3-23
3.7.4 Displaying alert list and alert history .................................................................................. 3-24
3.8 Switching the Day/Night Mode .................................................................. 3-32

3.9 Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen and Operation Unit .................. 3-34
3.9.1 Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen ............................................................................. 3-34
3.9.2 Adjusting the Brightness of the Operation Unit ................................................................. 3-35
3.9.3 [Display Brightness] dialog box ......................................................................................... 3-36
3.10 Mouseover Display ................................................................................... 3-37
3.10.1 Condition and timing of mouseover display .................................................................... 3-38
3.10.2 How to read mouseover display ...................................................................................... 3-40
3.11 MOB (Man Over Board) ............................................................................ 3-43

3.12 Setting up the Timer ................................................................................. 3-46

3.12.1 Setting up the timer ......................................................................................................... 3-46

目次 (2)
3.12.2 Setting up the time .......................................................................................................... 3-46
3.13 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and Variable Range Marker (VRM) ....... 3-47
3.13.1 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and Variable range marker (VRM) .................................. 3-47
3.13.2 Displaying the EBL and VRM buttons ............................................................................. 3-48
3.13.3 Basic manipulation of EBL/VRM ..................................................................................... 3-50
3.14 Cursor AUTO Mode .................................................................................. 3-53
3.14.1 No object ......................................................................................................................... 3-54
3.14.2 AIS ................................................................................................................................... 3-54
3.14.3 TT .................................................................................................................................... 3-55
3.14.4 (AZ) Acquisition/Activation Zone ..................................................................................... 3-55
3.14.5 AIS filter ........................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.14.6 User chart ........................................................................................................................ 3-57
3.14.7 Mariner's Mark/Line ......................................................................................................... 3-62
3.14.8 Manual updating .............................................................................................................. 3-64
3.14.9 Buoy object ...................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.14.10 Light object .................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.14.11 EBL ................................................................................................................................ 3-64
3.14.12 VRM............................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.13 EBL/VRM intersecting point .......................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.14 Node Fixed EBL/VRM ................................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.15 PI ................................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.16 WPT of Monitored Route ............................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.17 Monitoring dragging anchor........................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.18 Planned route ................................................................................................................ 3-66
3.15 Saving the screen that is currently displayed........................................ 3-68

3.16 [MULTI] Dial ............................................................................................... 3-69

3.16.1 Functions of [MULTI] dial ................................................................................................. 3-69
3.16.2 Functions assigned to [MULTI] dial ................................................................................. 3-69
3.17 Basic Operations of the Software Keyboard .......................................... 3-71
3.17.1 Starting a software keyboard .......................................................................................... 3-71
3.17.2 Name and function of each section of the keyboard ....................................................... 3-72
3.17.3 Numeric value input example .......................................................................................... 3-75
3.17.4 Character input example ................................................................................................. 3-77
3.18 Setting a Date and a Time (Calendar Operation) ................................... 3-79
3.18.1 Details and usage of a calendar picker and a time picker .............................................. 3-80
3.19 Help 3-82

3.20 Password Input ......................................................................................... 3-85

3.21 Managing Files with File Manager........................................................... 3-87
3.21.1 Displaying the [File Manager] dialog box ........................................................................ 3-87
3.21.2 File management ............................................................................................................. 3-88

(3) 目次
 3.21.3 Loading and saving files .................................................................................................. 3-91
3.22 Returning to a Task Menu by Ending the Operation ............................. 3-95

3.23 Terminating this equipment ..................................................................... 3-97

3.24 Using a DVD Drive .................................................................................... 3-98

Section 4 Range and Bearing Measurement Methods ....................................... 4-1

Section 5 Target Tracking and TT/AIS.................................................................. 5-1
Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System ........................................... 6-1
6.1 General Flowchart ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Work Flowchart While Sailing ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Starting and Preparing the Route Planning System.................................. 6-3
6.2.1 Powering on and starting ................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Starting the Route Planning System .................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.3 Entering an ARCS PIN Number (ARCS Only) ................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Moving the Chart .......................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1 Moving the chart with the [HOME] button .......................................................................... 6-7
6.3.2 Moving the chart with the cross-hair cursor ....................................................................... 6-8
6.3.3 Moving the chart with the hand cursor ............................................................................... 6-9
6.3.4 Switching a chart to be displayed by "My Port List" ........................................................... 6-10
6.3.5 Displaying the chart by entering the position ..................................................................... 6-11
6.4 Zooming In/Out the Chart .......................................................................... 6-12
6.4.1 Enlarging a Selected Area (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................................................. 6-12
6.4.2 Enlarging/reducing a chart with the Zoom function............................................................ 6-14
6.4.3 Switching between scale and range (S-57/C-MAP only) ................................................... 6-17
6.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................. 6-18
6.5.1 Switching object display ..................................................................................................... 6-19
6.5.2 Customizing object display ................................................................................................ 6-20
6.6 Selecting Motion/Bearing Mode ................................................................ 6-22
6.6.1 Setting motion mode .......................................................................................................... 6-23
6.6.2 Setting Bearing mode (S-57/C-MAP only) ......................................................................... 6-25
6.7 Registering and Displaying My Port List .................................................. 6-27
6.7.1 Registering to My Port List ................................................................................................. 6-27
6.7.2 Deleting a port .................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.8 Selecting a S-57 chart ................................................................................ 6-29

6.9 Selecting an ARCS chart............................................................................ 6-30

6.9.1 Selecting charts from all ..................................................................................................... 6-30
6.9.2 Changing active panels (ARCS only) ................................................................................ 6-31
6.9.3 Changing a low resolution chart (ARCS only) ................................................................... 6-32
6.9.4 Changing a high resolution chart (ARCS only) ...................................................................... 6-33

目次 (4)
 6.9.5 Displaying the note and diagram (ARCS only) ................................................................... 6-34
6.10 Multi View Display and Wide Range View Window Display of Charts . 6-35
6.10.1 Display of multi view......................................................................................................... 6-36
6.11 Verifying Object Information (Pick Report Function) ............................ 6-43
6.11.1 Pick Report of the S-57 chart ........................................................................................... 6-43
6.11.2 Pick report of the C-MAP chart ........................................................................................ 6-52
6.11.3 Pick report of the ARCS chart .......................................................................................... 6-53
6.12 Marking the Position of Own Ship with an Event Mark ......................... 6-54

6.13 Displaying Radar Images on a Chart by Overlaying (Option) ............... 6-55

6.13.1 Turning On/Off overlay display ......................................................................................... 6-56
6.13.2 Turning On/Off range ring display .................................................................................... 6-58
6.13.3 Turning On/Off bearing scale ........................................................................................... 6-59
6.13.4 Radar image adjustment .................................................................................................. 6-60
6.14 Setting a true bearing............................................................................... 6-61

6.15 Setting an own ship’s speed ................................................................... 6-62

6.15.1 Switching an own ship’s speed sensor ............................................................................ 6-62
6.15.2 Entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed manually ................................................. 6-63
Section 7 Route Planning ..................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview of the Route Planning Function ................................................. 7-2

7.2 Setting Route Display .................................................................................. 7-3

7.2.1 Setting [Route] after selecting [View] - [Options] on the menu ......................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Setting [Settings] - [Route] on the menu ........................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Starting and Ending the [Route Planning] Dialog Box .............................. 7-9
7.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box ........................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box ............................................................................ 7-9
7.4 Name and Function of Each Section of the [Route Planning] dialog Box7-10
7.4.1 Route Planning bar ............................................................................................................ 7-10
7.4.2 Route planning tab ............................................................................................................ 7-15
7.5 Saving a Route............................................................................................ 7-17

7.6 Planning a Route by Using Table Editing ................................................. 7-21

7.6.1 Table editing operation flow ............................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.2 Creating a new route file by table editing .......................................................................... 7-23
7.6.3 Deleting WPT data ............................................................................................................ 7-25
7.6.4 Editing a route by table editing .......................................................................................... 7-25
7.7 Planning a New Route by Graphic Editing ............................................... 7-32
7.7.1 Graphic editing operation flow ........................................................................................... 7-32
7.7.2 Creating a new route file by graphic editing ...................................................................... 7-34
7.7.3 Editing a route by graphic editing ...................................................................................... 7-40

(5) 目次
 7.8 Creating an Alternate Route ...................................................................... 7-57
7.8.1 Creating an alternate route................................................................................................ 7-59
7.8.2 Saving an alternate route .................................................................................................. 7-60
7.9 Checking Route Data ................................................................................. 7-62
7.9.1 Checking a route based on the safety standards .............................................................. 7-62
7.9.2 Checking a route based on the limits ................................................................................ 7-66
7.10 Navigation Calculation Function ............................................................. 7-68
7.10.1 ROT (Rate of Turn) .......................................................................................................... 7-68
7.10.2 ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)....................................................................................... 7-68
7.10.3 TWOL (Time to Go).......................................................................................................... 7-69
7.11 Importing/Exporting a Route File ............................................................ 7-70
7.11.1 Importing a route file ........................................................................................................ 7-70
7.11.2 Exporting a route file ........................................................................................................ 7-71
7.12 Error Messages that are Displayed when a Route is Created .............. 7-72

Section 8 Route Monitoring .................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Route Monitoring .......................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Starting route monitoring ................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Ending route monitoring .................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Selecting and Deleting Route Files ............................................................. 8-3
8.2.1 Selecting a route to be displayed ...................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Deleting a route file ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.3 [Voyage Information] (Voyage Monitoring Information) Dialog Box ........ 8-5

8.4 [Voyage Calculation] Dialog Box............................................................... 8-10

8.4.1 Calculating a schedule ...................................................................................................... 8-12
8.4.2 Calculating a distance ....................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.3 Example of distance calculation ........................................................................................ 8-15
8.5 Comparing the Data between the Planned Route and the Actual Route 8-17

8.6 Verifying Detail Information of WPT.......................................................... 8-19

Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor ............................................................ 9-1

9.1 Setting a Dragging Anchor Monitoring Area .............................................. 9-2
9.1.1 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring circle ...................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring polygon.................................................................. 9-4
9.2 Starting and Ending Dragging Anchor Monitoring .................................... 9-5
9.2.1 Starting dragging anchor monitoring ................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.2 Ending dragging anchor monitoring .................................................................................. 9-6
9.3 Editing/Deleting a Dragging Anchor Monitoring Area on the Chart ......... 9-7
9.3.1 Changing a size of a dragging anchor monitoring circle on the chart ............................... 9-7

目次 (6)
 9.3.2 Changing a size of a dragging anchor monitoring circle on the context menu ................. 9-8
9.3.3 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon on the chart ....................... 9-8
9.3.4 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon on the context menu.......... 9-9
Section 10 Automatic Sailing (Option) ............................................................... 10-1
Section 11 Operating a Chart.............................................................................. 11-1
Section 12 Creating a User Chart/ Updating a Chart Manually .................................. 12-1
Section 13 Logbook ............................................................................................ 13-1
Section 14 Setting up Screen View .................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Setting Chart Display Mode (Multi View Mode) ...................................... 14-2
14.1.1 Setting Multi-Screen ........................................................................................................ 14-2
14.2 Setting Screen Display Options .............................................................. 14-3
14.2.1 Setting up the display of Own Ship symbol ..................................................................... 14-5
14.2.2 Setting up the display own ship’s track ........................................................................... 14-8
14.2.3 Setting up the display of Route Monitoring ..................................................................... 14-10
14.2.4 Changing the color of the alternative route ..................................................................... 14-12
14.2.5 Setting up the display of User Chart ............................................................................... 14-13
14.2.6 Setting up the display of Mariner's Mark Line ................................................................. 14-15
14.2.7 Setting up Radar Overlay and Transparency of Echo/Trails ........................................... 14-16
14.2.8 Setting up the display of TT/AIS Target ........................................................................... 14-17
14.2.9 Setting up the display of other ship’s track ...................................................................... 14-20
14.2.10 Setting up the display of Chart Common ...................................................................... 14-25
14.2.11 Setting up the display of Chart ...................................................................................... 14-34
14.2.12 Setting up AIO/T&P display ........................................................................................... 14-45
14.2.13 Set display of danger detection highlight ...................................................................... 14-46
14.2.14 Setting up the display of Range/Bearing Measurement Function ................................. 14-48
14.2.15 Setting up the display of unit of setting value ................................................................ 14-50
14.2.16 Setting up display of Own Ship Track Control, display format of Own Ship/Cursor
Position and display of Sub-Information dialog ............................................................. 14-52
14.2.17 Setting up the Water Depth display ............................................................................... 14-53
14.2.18 Setting up the Rudder graph ......................................................................................... 14-54
14.2.19 Setting up the Gyro/Rudder graph ................................................................................ 14-55
14.2.20 Setting up the Engine Graph ......................................................................................... 14-56
14.2.21 Setting up the graph range of the ROT slide bar .......................................................... 14-57
Section 15 Setting up Alerts ............................................................................... 15-1
15.1 Selecting Setting Items ............................................................................ 15-1
15.1.1 Displaying the [Alert] dialog box ...................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.2 Selecting a setting item ................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2 Target Alarm Activation Conditions ........................................................ 15-3
15.2.1 Switching AZ1/AZ2 to enable/disable .............................................................................. 15-4

(7) 目次
 15.3 Depth/Safety Contour Alert Generation Conditions .............................. 15-5

15.4 Setting up Look-ahead ............................................................................. 15-7

15.4.1 Switching to enable/disable a danger detection vector/sector ........................................ 15-8
15.4.2 Setting up the size of a danger detection vector ............................................................. 15-8
15.4.3 Setting up the size of a danger detection sector ............................................................. 15-8
15.5 Special Condition Area Generation Conditions ..................................... 15-9

15.6 Track Control Alert Generation Conditions ........................................... 15-11

15.7 Position Integrity Alert Generation Conditions .................................... 15-12

15.7.1 Setting up the generation condition of the POSN(Deviation) warning ............................ 15-12
15.7.2 Setting up the generation condition of the POSN(Jump) caution ................................... 15-13
15.7.3 Setting up the generation condition the HDOP exceeded Maintenance Information ...... 15-13
15.8 Setting up Alert Processing................................................................... 15-14

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode........................................................ 16-1

16.1 Basic Operation of the [Settings] Dialog Box ........................................ 16-1

16.2 Basic Settings for Radar Signal Processing .......................................... 16-4

16.3 Settings of radar signal processing........................................................ 16-6

16.4 Setting up Association ............................................................................. 16-8

16.5 Setting up Own Ship's Dynamic Trait ..................................................... 16-9

16.6 Setting up an AIS/TT Filter .................................................................... 16-10

16.7 Setting up Other Ship's Track Function to ON/OFF............................. 16-12

16.8 Setting up Parameter Values at Route Planning Creation .................. 16-13

16.9 Setting up Parameter Values for Automatic Sailing ............................ 16-15

16.10 Setting up Parameter Values for Predicted Route ............................. 16-18

16.11 Setting Chart Operation ....................................................................... 16-20

16.12 Setting up Logbook .............................................................................. 16-23

16.13 Setting NAVTEX .................................................................................... 16-26

16.14 Setting up Navigation Equipment ....................................................... 16-31

16.15 Setting up Color and Brightness......................................................... 16-32

16.16 Setting Sounds ..................................................................................... 16-36

16.17 Setting up Key Assignment ................................................................. 16-38

目次 (8)
 16.18 Setting Preferences Information ......................................................... 16-41

16.19 Setting up Screen Capture .................................................................. 16-50

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) ...................... 17-1

17.1 Service Menu ............................................................................................ 17-1
17.1.1 To display the Service menu: .......................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Radar Adjustment ..................................................................................... 17-3
17.2.1 Displaying the [Adjustment] dialog box ........................................................................... 17-3
17.2.2 Performing basic adjustments on the radar .................................................................... 17-4
17.2.3 Adjusting Antenna Height ................................................................................................ 17-5
17.2.4 Adjusting MBS ................................................................................................................. 17-6
17.3 Verifying Installation and Initial Setting .................................................. 17-8
17.3.1 Displaying the [Installation] dialog box ............................................................................ 17-8
17.3.2 Verifying/Setting CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) .................................... 17-9
17.3.3 Setting a Serial Port ........................................................................................................ 17-11
17.3.4 Setting a System Function .............................................................................................. 17-18
17.3.5 Setting Ship's Parameters ............................................................................................... 17-25
17.3.6 Setting the automatic sailing system ............................................................................... 17-27
17.3.7 Setting the AIS password ................................................................................................ 17-28
17.3.8 Setting Sensor ................................................................................................................. 17-29
17.3.9 Setting Route Sharing ..................................................................................................... 17-31
17.3.10 Setting the GPS Shared Route ..................................................................................... 17-32
17.3.11 Setting the Route Plan Exchange ................................................................................. 17-34
17.4 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 17-35
17.4.1 Displaying the [Maintenance] dialog box ......................................................................... 17-35
17.4.2 Managing storage ............................................................................................................ 17-36
Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation ........................... 18-1
18.1 Playback Controller .................................................................................. 18-3

18.2 Selecting Playback Data .......................................................................... 18-6

18.2.1 Sorting the Playback List ................................................................................................. 18-6
18.3 Playing Back Logbook Data .................................................................... 18-7
18.3.1 Changing the playback speed ......................................................................................... 18-8
18.4 Exiting the Playback Mode ...................................................................... 18-9

18.5 Outputting Navigation Record Data ...................................................... 18-10

18.6 Functional Restrictions When in the Playback Mode.......................... 18-12

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection ............................................................... 19-1
19.1 Maintenance Functions Executed from Menu........................................ 19-1
19.1.1 Starting maintenance functions ....................................................................................... 19-1

(9) 目次
 19.1.2 Setting Date/Time/Time Zone.......................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.3 Confirming System Information ....................................................................................... 19-3
19.1.4 Confirming Operating Time ............................................................................................. 19-8
19.1.5 Displaying and Resetting the Current Voyage Distance ................................................. 19-9
19.1.6 Setting and confirming the Sensor Source...................................................................... 19-11
MAN, Gyro x, MAG, G/C ............................................................................................................ 19-12
19.1.7 Checking the Route Plan Exchange Log ........................................................................ 19-14
19.2 General Maintenance ............................................................................. 19-15

19.3 Maintenance on Unit .............................................................................. 19-16

19.3.1 Display unit ...................................................................................................................... 19-16
19.4 Performance Check ................................................................................ 19-18
19.4.1 Starting Selftest functions................................................................................................ 19-18
19.4.2 Confirming the screen status [Monitor Test] .................................................................... 19-19
19.4.3 Confirming the operation of the operation unit [Key Test] ............................................... 19-23
19.4.4 Confirming the alert sound [Sound Test] ......................................................................... 19-24
19.4.5 Testing the brightness of LED [Light Test] ....................................................................... 19-25
19.4.6 Checking the memory [Memory Check] .......................................................................... 19-26
19.4.7 Cleaning the lens of the DVD drive ................................................................................. 19-27
19.5 Replacement of Major Parts .................................................................. 19-29
19.5.1 Parts required for periodic replacement .......................................................................... 19-29
19.6 Software Update ..................................................................................... 19-30
19.6.1 Local Update ................................................................................................................... 19-30
19.6.2 Remote Update ............................................................................................................... 19-33
19.7 Firmware Update .................................................................................... 19-37

19.8 Updating Help Data ................................................................................ 19-40

19.9 Confirming Maintenance INFO .............................................................. 19-43

19.9.1 Screen items/fields and their function ............................................................................. 19-43
19.9.2 Switching to the standard window or the expanded window........................................... 19-46
19.9.3 Exporting maintenance information ................................................................................. 19-48
19.10 Data Backup/Restore ........................................................................... 19-49
19.10.1 Backing up data ............................................................................................................. 19-49
19.10.2 Restoring backed up data ............................................................................................. 19-51
19.11 Recovery of the Images in the C Drive ............................................... 19-53

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services ..................................................... 20-1

20.1 Failure Detection ...................................................................................... 20-1
20.1.1 About alerts ..................................................................................................................... 20-1
20.1.2 Alert description ............................................................................................................... 20-1
20.1.3 S-57/63 chart related error message list ......................................................................... 20-1
20.1.4 ARCS chart related error message list ............................................................................ 20-1

目次 (10)
 20.1.5 Fuse inspection ............................................................................................................... 20-2
20.2 Countermeasures for Failures................................................................. 20-3
20.2.1 Repair circuit block .......................................................................................................... 20-3
20.3 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 20-4

20.4 After-Sale Services ................................................................................. 20-14

20.4.1 About the retaining period of service parts ...................................................................... 20-14
20.4.2 When requesting a repair ................................................................................................ 20-14
20.4.3 Recommendation of inspection and maintenance .......................................................... 20-14
20.4.4 Extending the functions ................................................................................................... 20-16
Section 21 About Disposal ................................................................................. 21-1
21.1 About Disposal of This Equipment ......................................................... 21-1

21.2 Chinese Version RoHS ............................................................................. 21-2

Section 22 Specifications ................................................................................... 22-1

22.1 JAN-5203 ................................................................................................... 22-1

22.2 Display Unit ............................................................................................... 22-2

22.3 Processing Unit ........................................................................................ 22-5

22.4 19inch Display .......................................................................................... 22-6

22.5 26inch Display .......................................................................................... 22-9

Appendix A Alert List ............................................................................................ A-1

Appendix B Menu List and Materials ................................................................... B-1

(11) 目次
目次 (12)
 1
Section 1 Overview 2
3
4
5
Do not put any container with water or small metallic object on this equipment.
Water may spill or metal may enter the equipment, causing fire, electric shock or 6
other troubles.
7
Should water or metal have entered the equipment, turn off the circuit breaker and
contact our sales division, branch office, service center or representative located
8
nearest to you. 9
If you continue to use the equipment without taking required action, fire, electric
shock or other troubles may occur. 10
Should you find out smoke, offensive smell or extreme heat on the equipment, turn off
the switch and circuit breaker immediately. Then contact our sales division, branch
11
office, service center or representative located nearest to you. 12
If you continue to use the equipment without taking required action, fire or electric
shock may occur. 13
14
15
16
Do not use or leave the equipment where there is a direct sunshine and high humidity
17
or the temperature exceeds 55°.
Otherwise, fire or other troubles may occur. 18
19
Do not block the ventilation port of the equipment.
Otherwise, fire or other troubles may be caused by heat accumulation. 20
Use this equipment as your navigation aid.
21
• If you install two ECDIS's without backup system, be sure to use the specified 22
marine chart for your navigational decision.
• This equipment does not provide automatic decision on the positional information. 23
Decision on the positional information must be made by the ship operator himself.
A trouble will occur if checkup is neglected.
24
Do not touch the equipment when your hands or gloves are wet with fresh water or 25
seawater.
26
Otherwise, electric shock or other troubles may occur.
27
付録
1-1 Section 1 Overview
 • Do not place any object on the operation panel.
In particular, if a hot object is placed on the operation panel, it can cause
deformation of the surface of the operation panel.
• Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.

• When there is an alarm of fan failure or CPU temperature rise, turn off the power
immediately.
If you continue to use the equipment without taking required action, fire or other
troubles may occur.
Contact our sales division, branch office, service center or representative located
nearest to you.

Section 1 Overview 1-2

 1
1.1 Functions 2
In this equipment, the following task functions are not available to use by function restriction. Therefore
3
it can not be used only as Route Planning System equipment. 4
• RADAR
• Conning Display 5
• The following databases can be displayed
6
- S-57 Ed3.0/3.1 7
- S-63
- C-Map Ed3.0 Professional/Professional+ 8
- C-Map ENC
- C-Map CAES
9
- Jeppesen PRIMAR ECDIS Service
10
- ARCS
• Own ship’s track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart 11
• Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS) 12
• Tracked target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
13
• True/Relative motion display
• North-up/Course-up/Head-up/Waypoint-up display 14
• Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/ranges up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time 15
•
•
Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
16
• Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ship’s speed 17
• Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn and
evening 18
• Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of WPTs on the electronic chart or the list
19
Calculation of the distance between WPTs, bearings, and planned arrival time 20
Up to 512 WPTs per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes 21
• Route tracking (option)
• Course change
22
• Safety contours crossing alarm 23
• Dangerous areas approaching warning
• Waypoint arrival warning 24
• Off-track warning
• Logging of navigation information onto the HDD
25
• Own ship’s playback using logged data 26
27
付録
1-3 Section 1 Overview
1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:

• Minimizes the information that is displayed constantly and expands the chart display area.
• Can display vector charts (ENC and C-MAP) and raster chart (ARCS).
• Realizes safer sailing through the safety contour line, crossing danger areas, and guard ring
function. (Excluding ARCS)
• Realizes high operability through high-speed drawing and high-speed processing.
• Facilitates creation of user charts.
• Applies a multi-display screen that can display two charts concurrently. (ARCS and C-MAP) Ed.3
cannot be displayed concurrently with a chart of a different type)
• Enables a course plan with multi-view.
• Can display a wide view screen while a single chart or multi-view is displayed.
• Enables creation of a route plan with the table editing function and the graphic editing function.
• Can create an alternative route while sailing.
• The playback function enables checking of the sailed routes.
• The S-57 chart can be updated. (Chat Maintenance)
• Utilization of an icon menu
• Intuitive operation system based on the workflow
• High-resolution large screen
• Message reception notification function
Notifies arrival of a new AIS message and so on with a badge.
• Utilization of a common information window
Enables display of target information and simple conning information (wind direction/wind speed
information etc.) with a simple switching operation.
• Display of chart information read results by grouping. Enables immediate access to the required
information.
• Display of the cause of alert as well as the action guideline
• Equipped with the Help function
The built-in HTML Help enables the search of operation methods in this equipment instead of the
hardcopy manual whenever required.
• Visual highlight of target symbols
Enables identification of the target that matches the condition such as the sailing direction, ship’s
length, and ship’s type by highlighted display.
• Equipped with the white list type virus protection function of Trend Micro Incorporated

Section 1 Overview 1-4

 1
1.3 Components 2
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.
3
Components of the Display Unit 4
Name Model Q'ty Remarks
5
Display unit Main unit
Display 26inch NWZ-208 1 Included in the main unit. 6
19inch HP E190i
NWZ-207
7
/NWZ-214 8
Processing unit NDC-2000-M2 1 Included in the main unit.
Keyboard operation unit G84-4400LPBGB-2 1 Included in the main unit. 9
26inch desktop frame CWB-1595 1 Option 10
Instruction Manual (Japanese) 7ZPNA4688 1
Instruction Manual (English) 7ZPNA4689 1 11
Canvas cover
26inch CWB-1621 1 Option 12
19inch CWB-1619
26inch CWB-1620 1 Option
13
Hood
19inch CWB-1618
14
Accessory CD cleaner 1 Packing in 1 box
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
1-5 Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.4 Structure

1-6
Processing unit (NDC-2000-M2)
warning label Mass: Approx. 12 kg
Unit: mm

NDC-2000-M2 Processing unit

 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Outline drawing of 26inch Display (NWZ-208) 25
26
27
付録
1-7 Section 1 Overview
 Outline drawing of 19inch Display (NWZ-207)

Section 1 Overview 1-8

 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Outline drawing of 19inch Display (NWZ-214) 26
27
付録
1-9 Section 1 Overview
 Outline drawing of 19inch Display (HP E19i)

Section 1 Overview 1-10

 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
G84-4400LPBGB-2 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
1-11 Section 1 Overview
1.5 General System Diagrams
Connection examples of this equipment are shown below.

NWZ-207
19inch Monitor Unit

*2) AC Cable(5m)
G84-4400LPBGB-2
Keyboard
With
Trackball
NBD-904
AC/DC

MOUSE *2) PS/2 Cable(1.75m)

Converter

Monitor *2) DVI Cable(5m)

*2) AC Cable(5m)
KEYBOARD

DVI

TB1001-2
NDC-2000-M2
Processor Unit
*1)LAN 1000BASE LAN
GRD-921 (To JRC LAN Main HUB) MAIN
Bridge Interface *1)LAN 1000BASE LAN
(To JRC LAN Sub HUB) SUB

Ship's Main *1)D2

AC220V 1PH/MAX185VA TB1001-1
Processor Unit(100VA)+Monitor(85VA)

D2 : 0.6/1 kV DPYC-2.5 *1): Shipyard Supply

LAN :CAT-5e LAN Cable *2): JRC Supply

5.General System Diagram of JAN-5203 Route Planning System

Section 1 Overview 1-12

 1
Section 2 Name and Function of 2
Each Unit 3
4
2.1 Name and Main Function of the Each
5
Unit
6
2.1.1 POWER button of the processing unit
7
The POWER button of the NDC-2000-M2 body is used to turn the power on and off.
8
Press the POWER button (green button) once. 9
[POWER] button/lamp
The lamp is lit during power ON.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Note：
18
• When the [POWER] button is pressed during Navigation & Planning, the [Startup Menu] is
instantaneously displayed, then the power is turned off immediately. 19
• Please note that if the power is forcibly turned off, internal data or the recording device may be
damaged. 20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-1 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.1.2 Display unit

[Brightness Adjustment] [Power] button

buttons

[Power] button
When the Power button is pressed while the power of the display unit is turned off, the power is
turned on.
To turn off the power of the display unit, press the Power button for 5 seconds or longer.

[Brightness Adjustment] buttons

These buttons are used to adjust the brightness of the screen.
The screen increases brightness by pressing the button.
The screen decreases brightness by pressing the button.

Memo
Adjust the brightness of the screen to the extent it is not dazzling, taking into account the
brightness of the surroundings and to the brightness which you can be easily observed the ECDIS
screens.
Be careful in the nighttime brightness adjustment because nighttime brightness adjustment may
hinder the visibility of information.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-2

 1
2.2 Names and Main Functions of the Top 2
Screen 3
This section describes the names and main functions of the top screen.
4
Refer to "2.2.5 Key Assignment
Indication Area” Refer to "2.2.1 Task Switching Button" 5
Refer to "2.2.4 Alert
Notification Area"
6
Refer to "2.2.2 Right
Tool Bar" 7
Refer to "2.2.6 Own 8
Ship Information"
9
10
11
12
13
Refer to "2.2.3 Left Tool Bar"
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-3 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
The content of the "Chart Information Area" differs when the chart is ENC/C-MAP and is RNC.
The "Sub-Information Area" is common related to the type of chart.

Refer to "2.2.7 Chart Information Area (ENC/C-MAP) ". Refer to "2.2.9 Sub Information Area".

Refer to “2.2.10 Bottom Bar (Sub Information Area)”.

Display Example on the ENC/C-MAP Screen

Refer to "2.2.8 Chart Information Area (RNC)". Refer to "2.2.9 Sub Information Area".

Display Example on the RNC Screen

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-4

 1
2.2.1 Task Switching Button
2
Task switching button 3
To switch to a required task, click on the task switching button. 4
Click on the task to be executed from [RADAR]/[ECDIS]/[CON](Conning Display)/[AMS].
5
Memo
The [Primary] badge is displayed on the task that is set to the Primary function (basic task).
6
7
Example: ECDIS is the Primary function
8
9
Note 10
In case of JAN-5203, there is not task switching buttons of [RADAR], [ECDIS], [CON] and [AMS]
by function restriction. 11
12
2.2.2 Right Toolbar
13
The functions of the buttons of the right toolbar are as follows.

Message notification button

14
Day/Night button
The display color on the screen can be
When this button is clicked on, the dialog box relating to the latest
message among the information received in AIS MSG Tray and
15
switched to 5 levels according to the
NAVTEX is displayed.
brightness on the bridge.
For the message dialog box of each of the information received, 16
For the details, refer to "3.8 Switching the refer to "2.3.2 Information reference windows".
Day/Night Mode ". The total number of unread messages is displayed on the badge. 17
Display Brightness button MOB (Man Over Board) button 18
The brightness of the screen and When a person falls overboard, use this
operation button to mark the own ship’s position 19
unit can be switched within the range from when the button is clicked on, so as not to
0 to100. lose the sight of the position. 20
For the details, refer to "3.9.1 Adjusting For the details, refer to "3.11 MOB (Man
the Brightness of the Screen ". Over Board)". 21
22
23
24
Panel Brightness button
Switch the brightness of the operation unit to any of the 5 levels, 0 to 4.
25
For the details, refer to "3.9.2 Adjusting the Brightness of the Operation Unit".
APP A
APP B
1
2-5 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.2.3 Left Toolbar
The functions of the buttons of the Left Toolbar are as follows.
Some buttons on the Left Toolbar are normally displayed and others are not.
Click on the Disclosure button to switch the display.

Normal display Normal non-display

Disclosure
button
When the disclosure
button is clicked on,
the normal
non-display buttons
are displayed.

Refer to the next page for the name and function of each button.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-6

 1
2.2.3.1 Buttons that are normally displayed
2
[AUTO] (Cursor mode selection)
button
3
PEN (Write tool) button
Clicking on this button during user map
When this button is clicked on, the cursor
mode is switched to the AUTO mode. 4
5
creation, manual chart update or route
For the details of the cursor mode, refer
planning brings up the corresponding
to "3.13 Cursor AUTO Mode".
operation mode.
The mode name will be indicated on the
[Undo] button
Clicking on this button cancels the
6
button.
previous operation performed.
• In user map creation mode 7
• In manual update creation mode
[Data OFF] button
8
Example: [U.Map] (User Map) mode
When this button is clicked on, only the
main information is displayed from the 9
screen display and other information is
[U. Map] (User Map) mode hidden. 10
Clicking on the button when it indicates The following information items are
[U. Map] displays the drawing toolbar for displayed: 11
user maps. • Own ship’s symbol
*When this mode is used, the azimuth
mode will be fixed to N UP (North UP).
• Route
• Temporary Route
12
• Chart
[Update] (Manual Update) mode
Clicking on the button when it indicates • Base category object 13
• Non-ENC object
[Update] displays the [Select Chart]
dialog box if a chart to be manually • Cursor 14
*The chart is displayed when the display
15
updated has not been selected. If a chart
to be manually updated is selected, the category is [Base].
drawing toolbar for manual update will be
displayed. 16
*When this mode is used, the azimuth
mode will be fixed to N UP (North UP). 17
[Route] (Route Planning) mode
Clicking on the button when it indicates 18
[Route] brings up a new route planning
mode if no route planning tab is open. If 19
one or more route planning tabs are [Menu] button
open, the system switches from the end
of the routes currently being created to
When this button is clicked, the top menu is displayed. 20
For the details of the menu, refer to "3.4 Basic Menu
the WPT addition mode.
Operations". 21
Memo 22
This equipment is operating normally when the
[Menu] button is moving in animation mode. 23
When this equipment is set to a freeze state, the
Menu button stops and does not move. In this
case, turn off the power once and turn it on again.
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-7 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.2.3.2 Buttons that are normally hidden

[Map On/Off] button.

This button displays or hides the user
map.

[HL Off] button

When this button is clicked on, the
Heading Line becomes hidden.
For the details of the Heading Line, refer
to "14.2.1 Setting up the Display of Own
Ship Symbol".
[Screen Capture] button
When this button is clicked on, the screen
that is currently displayed is captured.

For the details, refer to "3.14 Saving the

[Eraser tool] button Screen that is Currently Displayed".
When this button is clicked on, the User
Map Erase mode is set, enabling
continuous erasing.

2.2.4 Alert notification area

When an alert occurs, the alert status, the contents of the alert and the occurrence count are displayed
in the alert notification area.

For the details, refer to "3.7 Confirming and Acknowledging an Alert ".

2.2.5 Key assignment indication area

When the [MULTI] dial is turned, the assigned functions are operated.

For the function assignment, refer to "3.15 [Multi] dial".

In the case of JAN-5203, the [Multi] dial function is not available.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-8

 1
2.2.6 Own Ship Information
2
Do not use the offset function during navigation.
If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position
3
(deviated from the actual position), accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the [Offset] badge is displayed at the position
4
display on the Own Ship Information. Check the indication, and cancel the offset
function if necessary.
5
6
7
8
9
This window displays the own ship’s information.
10
• When using 1-axis log, heading speed component can be detected, but transverse
speed component cannot be detected. Then leeway effect (component drifted by 11
wind) cannot be detected.
• When using 2-axes log, its accuracy in shallow waters may be deteriorated, and its
12
speed in deep sea areas may be unable to be detected.
13
• When using a GPS, COG accuracy is less than ±3° at speed: from 1kn to 17kn, and
is less than ±1° at speed: more than 17kn. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-9 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 UTC/Local date and time
This button displays the current date and time.
• When the button is clicked on, the time can be switched
to the UTC time display or Local time display.
• Set the time format by selecting [Maintenance] -
[Date/Time/Time Zone]-[Display Style] on the
menu.
For the details, refer to "19.1.2 Setting Date/Time/Time
Zone".

See the next page.

Sensor information
Various sensor information items are displayed.

[Sensor types]
Sensor name Contents
HDG Displays the value indicated by the ship’s heading sensor.
STW Displays the value indicated by the speed through water sensor.
COG/SOG Displays the value indicated by the speed over the ground sensor.

[Sensor value background colors]

Each background color represents the following meaning.
Normal color: Normal sensor value
Yellow: The reliability of the sensor value is deteriorating.
Yellowish orange: The sensor value is abnormal.

Note
When position offset is applied, the background color of “GPS” and “DR” part
changes to yellow.

[Switching the sensor source]

Select the sensor source in the [Source] combo box. The following sensor sources can be selected.
When [Menu] is selected, the [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog is displayed.
Sensor name Sensor source
HDG MAN (Manual), Gyro, Gyro 1 , Gyro 2*1*4, MAG (MAG Compass) *4, G/C (GPS Compass)
*1*4

STW MAN (Manual), Log*5, Log 1*2*5, Log 2*2*5

COG Log*5, Log1*2*5, Log 2*2*5, GPSx*3
SOG
*1: Only when there are two Gyros.
*2: Only when there are two Logs.
*3: When two or more GPS units are present, “x” indicates the unit number.
*4: When the Gyro Compass system that is used has the automatic switching function, the display of the sensor
source changes automatically according to the switching condition.
*5: When 1AX is installed in Log, Log cannot be selected from the sensor source.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-10

 1
2
3
See the previous page.
4
5
6
7
Position
8
Displays Position information.
9
[1] [4]
10
[2]
[3]
[5]
11
[1] The data name of the Position is displayed. 12
[2] The sensor source of the Position is displayed. 13
Select a sensor source in the [Source] combo box. Any of the following sensor sources can be selected.
When [Menu] is selected, the [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog is displayed. 14
Data name Sensor source
POSN(Main)
*
GPSx* , DR 15
*: When two or more GPS units are present, “x” indicates the unit number.
16
[3] A geodetic positioning system is displayed. It is fixed to "WGS-84".

[4] Positioning precision display

17
When the positioning precision is differential positioning, "DGPS" is displayed. No information is displayed
in the case of GPS single positioning.
18
[5] Position (CCRP) 19
The CCRP position indicated by the primary positioning sensor is displayed.
20
Own ship’s position offset display
21
When offset is set for the own ship’s position, the icon that indicates the offset status is
displayed for the Position. 22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-11 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.2.7 Chart Information Area (ENC/C-MAP)
Scale/Range combo box
This button displays the current scale or range.

Scale display Range display

Select a scale or a range from the combo box.

For the details, refer to "6.4.3 Switching between scale and range (S-57/C-MAP only)".

Motion mode combo box Bearing mode combo box

This button sets the motion mode. This button sets the bearing mode.
For the details, refer to "6.6.1 For the details, refer to "6.6.2 Setting Bearing
Setting motion mode". mode (S-57/C-MAP only)".

See the next page.

Zoom slider
[Def. Set] (Settings at shipment) button
The zoom slider expands/reduces the display in
When this button is clicked on, the screen
scale/range.
display return from the personal setting
information to the settings at shipment.
The function is the same as that of the
[Default display configurations] button in
[Preference] on the [Settings] dialog box.
For the details, refer to "16.18 Setting
For the details, refer to 6.4.2.2
Personal Information".
"Enlarging/reducing with the zoom
slider (S-57/C-MAP only)".

For the details, refer to "6.4.2

Enlarging/reducing a chart
with the Zoom function".

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-12

 1
Display category 2
Set the display category of the chart.
For the details, refer to "6.5 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)".
3
4
Original scale display button (S-57 only)
When this button is clicked on, the screen scale 5
is changed according to the original scale of the
chart that is displayed at the center of the 6
screen.

[Home] button 7
When this button is clicked on, the
chart screen moves to the position at 8
which the own ship’s position is to be
displayed. 9
For the details, refer to "6.3.1 Moving
the chart with the [HOME] button". 10
[Event] button 11
When this button is clicked on, an
event mark is assigned at the own
ship’s position.
12
For the details, refer to "6.12 Marking
the Position of Own Ship with an Event 13
Mark".
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-13 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.2.8 Chart Information Area (RNC)

Scale/Range button Motion mode combo box RNC information display

This button displays the This button sets the motion This area shows the geodetic datum and
current scale. mode. the original scale of the chart that is
The scale cannot be For the details, refer to "6.6.1 displayed.
changed. Setting motion mode".

Geodetic datum Original scale

See the next page.

[Def. Set] (Settings at shipment) button

[Large]/[Small] button
This button switches the chart scale
between Large and Small.
For the details, refer to "6.4.2.3
Enlarging/reducing with the
[Large]/[Small] buttons (RNC only)".
When this button is clicked on, the screen
display return from the personal setting
information to the settings at shipment.
The function is the same as that of the
[Default display configurations] button in
[Preference] on the [Settings] dialog box.
For the details, refer to "16.18 Setting
Personal Information".

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-14

 Chart offset amount display
1
When this button is clicked on, the chart offset amount is displayed on the
dialog box. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Chart selection button
Select a chart from the [Select chart]
dialog box that is displayed by clicking
9
on this button.
For the details, refer to "6.9.1 Selecting 10
charts from all".
11
[Event] button
When this button is clicked on, an event 12
mark is assigned at the own ship’s
position.
For the details, refer to "6.3.1 Marking the
13
Position of Own Ship with an Event
Mark".
14
[Home] button
When this button is clicked on, the chart 15
screen is moved to the position at which
the own ship’s position is displayed. 16
For the details, refer to "6.12 Moving the
chart with the [HOME] button". 17
18
2.2.9 Sub Information Area
19
Memo
• The display position of Sub Information Area varies according to the display size.
20
21
22
Display
position Display position 23
24
25
26inch screen (WUXGA) 19inch screen (SXGA)
APP A
APP B
1
2-15 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 Switching tab
When this tab is clicked on, the contents of the
dialog are switched.
[1] [POSN DIFF] (Position/distance
difference) dialog
[2] [Depth] (Depth) dialog
[3] [Current] (Current) dialog

Memo
The tab that is displayed varies depending on the setting.
To set up, select [View] - [Options] - [Control] on the menu.
For the details, refer to "14.2.16 Setting up Display of Own Ship Track Control, Display Format of
Own Ship/Cursor Position and Display of Sub-Information Dialog".

[1] [POSN DIFF] dialog

Displays the difference of bearing and distance between POSN(Main) and POSN(Sub).

[POSN(Sub) Source] combo box

Displays the source of the sub position.
When there are multiple sub position sources, select a
source from the combo box.

[POSN Discrepancy]
Displays the difference of bearing and distance between
POSN(Main) and POSN(Sub).

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-16

 1
[2] [Depth] dialog
Displays the water depth. 2
3
[Source]
Displays the depth sounder that is used.
FWD: Depth sounder installed at the front of the ship
4
MID:
AFT:
Depth sounder installed at the center of the ship
Depth sounder installed at the rear of the ship
5
6
None: Hides the [Depth] tab.
When a depth sounder is not installed, the
[Depth] tab is not displayed.
7
[Depth]
[Measured from]
Displays the water depth measurement Displays the water depth. 8
reference position.
Transducer: Transducer 9
Surface: Water surface
Keel: Keel 10
11
[3] [Current] dialog 12
Displays the bearing and speed of the current.
13
[Set]
Displays the bearing of the current. 14
15
[Drift]
Displays the speed of the current. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-17 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.2.10 Bottom Bar (Sub Information Area)

The functions of the Bottom Bar are shown in the table below.
function Operation / condition Input range
Vector (T) length Enter and set the vector length. 1～120min

input box
AIS / TT Filter It indicates ON / OFF of AIS / TT filter function. ―
display 【conditions】
When AIS unused setting and TT unused setting are
set, it will be hidden. When the display of Virtual AtoN
is set to Off in the Menu-View-Target display setting,
the "V AtoN Off" badge is displayed.

AIS function Switch ON / OFF of the AIS function. ―

button Function ON:

Function OFF:

【conditions】
When AIS is not used, the button and mode name are
hidden.

↓ When not in use

Display character: When AIS function is ON, the

following will always be displayed.
GND

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-18

 1
function Operation / condition Input range
TT1,2 function Turn on / off the TT1 or 2 function. ―
2
button Function ON: 3
4
Function OFF: 5
6
Display characters: One of the following is displayed 7
according to the input contents.
REL,GND,SE,***
8
【conditions】 9
When TT1 or 2 is not used, the button and mode name
are hidden.
10
11
↓ When not in use
12
13
Radar Overlay Radar Overlay Toggles display on / off. ―
14
display button Display ON: 15
16
Display ON: 17
18
【conditions】 19
If there is no RADAR IF, hide the item. If there is a
RADAR IF, it follows the following conditions.
20
If ISW is installed, items are displayed. 21
In case of no ISW, items are displayed / hidden by
RADAR equipment setting.
22
RADAR equipped: Displays the item. 23
RADAR not equipped: Item is hidden.
24
25
↓ When not in use
APP A
APP B
1
2-19 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 function Operation / condition Input range
Radar switching ▼ Click the button to display the selection item and ―
update the display to the selected item.
Select the data
input source of
Radar Overlay 【conditions】
If there is no RADAR IF, hide the item.
If there is a RADAR IF, it follows the following
conditions. If there is SW, items are displayed. At this
time, the items that can be selected change depending
on the equipment of the radar antenna.
In case of no ISW, items are displayed / hidden by
RADAR equipment setting.
RADAR equipped: Displays the item. In this case,
depending on the equipment setting of Radar 1 / Radar
2, the selectable items change.
RADAR not equipped: Item is hidden.
Permanent Permanent currently occurring If there is information ―
Information to be displayed, information messages (names) are
display area continuously displayed at regular intervals.
Permanent Click the button to display the Permanent information ―
information list list screen.
display button 【conditions】
If there is Permanent information, it becomes effective
display.
If there is no Permanent information, it becomes invalid
display.
If the permanent information list screen is hidden and
there is unconfirmed information, a new badge is
displayed.

2.2.11 ARCS PIN input dialog box

When an ARCS chart is imported, a dialog box for entering an ARCS PIN is displayed at the startup of
the ECDIS mode.
For the details, refer to "6.2.3 Entering an ARCS PIN Number (ARCS Only)".

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-20

 1
2.3 Common Information Window 2
The information that is displayed on the Common Information Window can be classified into
information monitoring and information referencing.
3
4
An information monitoring window is used together includes TT/AIS value information, conning
blocks, etc. 5
• Information monitoring windows are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen are
displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen at the initial display, the display positions can be
6
moved as floating windows.
7
The information reference is the window that is temporarily referenced according to the user request 8
and the information includes AIS messages, alert information, and own ship AIS information.
• The Information Reference can be switched to standard window display or extended window
9
display. For the details of switching between the standard window and the extended window, refer
10
to "2.3.2.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended window".
11
Information reference window
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Information
monitor
19
20
window

21
Memo 22
This section provides the overview of each common information window.
For the operations and settings of the common information windows, refer to "3.6 Operation of the
23
Information Monitor Window". 24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-21 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.1 Information monitor windows
Information monitoring related windows is as follows.

Item Contents Related section

Target INFO TT/AIS movement information 2.3.1.1 Target INFO
TT1 List, TT2 List Tracked target risk sequence list 2.3.1.2 TT List
AIS List AIS target risk sequence list 2.3.1.3 AIS List
AIS Detail INFO Detail information relating one AIS 2.3.1.4 AIS Detail INFO
target
Wind/Current Wind speed and current information 2.3.1.5 Wind/Current
Conning Conning 2.3.1.6 Conning

2.3.1.1 Target INFO

Target INFO is the display monitor window that displays movement information of TT/AIS.
In Target INFO, TT information, AIS information, and AIS extended information are displayed.

TT information display

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-22

 1
The following information items are displayed.
2
Displayed
information
Explanation
3
TT ID Displays the identification number (1 to 100) of a tracked target. 4
When an acquisition target is displayed from RADAR, it is displayed as
“T1-***” or “T2-***” (*** indicates the target number or ship name). 5
BRG Displays the bearing to a tracked target.
6
Range Displays the distance to a tracked target.
COG Displays the course of a tracked target. Displayed as COG in the courser over 7
the ground.
SOG Displays the ship speed of a tracked target. Displayed as SOG in the speed 8
over the ground.
9
CPA Displays the distance of the closest point of approach to the tracked target.
TCPA Displays the arrival time of the closest point of approach to the tracked target. 10
BCR Displays the bow crossing range of a tracked target.
BCT Displays the bow crossing time of a tracked target.
11
12
AIS information
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Standard display Extended display
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-23 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
• AIS information of the target is displayed.

• The following information items are displayed.

Displayed information Explanation

AIS ID Displays the identification number (1 to 1000) of an AIS target.
*The maximum display number is 1000 as the option.
Name Displays the ship name of an AIS target.
Call Sign Displays a call sign.
MMSI Displays a nine-digit identification number for a ship/ground station
equipped with a DSC communication device.
COG Displays the course of an AIS target. Displayed as COG in the courser
over the ground.
SOG Displays the ship speed of an AIS target. Displayed as SOG in the speed
over the ground.
BRG* Displays the bearing to an AIS target.
Range* Displays the distance to an AIS target.
Heading* Displays the heading of an AIS target.
ROT* Displays the turning speed of an AIS target.
POSN and Position Displays the position of an AIS target and position-fix accuracy.
Accuracy* When the position-fix accuracy is low, [>10m] is displayed.
When the position-fix accuracy is high, [<10m] is displayed.
Destination* Displays the destination of an AIS target.
Navigation Status* Displays the navigation conditions of an AIS target.
For detailed explanation, refer to "Navigation Status" in the table provided
in "2.3.1.4 AIS Detail INFO”.
*: Extended display only

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-24

 1
AIS SART information
AIS SART information is displayed by using an extended display. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Unlike the AIS information extended display, the following items are not displayed.
• Call Sign 14
• Destination
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-25 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.1.2 TT List
A TT List lists the degrees of risks of tracked targets.
For the details, refer to "5.10.2 TT List".

2.3.1.3 AIS List

The AIS List lists the degrees of risks of AIS targets.
For the details, refer to "5.10.3 AIS List".

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-26

 1
2.3.1.4 AIS Detail INFO
This window displays detail information on one AIS target. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
AIS information of the target is displayed. 14
When either one of is clicked on, AIS information before or after the information currently
displayed is displayed.
15
16
For the AIS message tray, refer to "2.3.2.2 AIS MSG Tray". 17
The following information items are displayed.
18
Displayed information Explanation 19
AIS ID Displays the identification number (1 to 1000) of an AIS target.
*The maximum display number is 1000 as the option. 20
Name Displays the ship name of an AIS target.
Call Sign Displays a call sign.
21
MMSI Displays a nine-digit identification number for a ship/ground station 22
equipped with a DSC communication device.
IMO No. Displays the 9-digit IMO number. 23
Length
Beam
Displays the length of an AIS target.
Displays the beam of an AIS target.
24
Destination Displays the destination of an AIS target. 25
ETA or UTC Displays the expected arrival time of an AIS target.
APP A
APP B
1
2-27 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 Displayed information Explanation
Navigation Status Displays the navigation conditions of an AIS target.
0: Under Way Using Engine
1: At Anchor
2: Not Under Command
3: Restricted Maneuverability
4: Constrained by Her Draught
5: Moored
6: Aground
7: Engaged in Fishing
8: Under Way Sailing
9: Reserved for HSC
10: Reserved for WIG
11: Reserved
15: Not Defined
Draft Displays the draft of an AIS target.
Type of Ship Displays the ship type of an AIS target.
30: Fishing Vessel
31: Towing Vessel
32: Towing Vessel L>200M B>25M (Towing and length of the tow
exceeds 200m or breadth exceeds 25m)
33: Dredge or Underwater OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater
operation)
34: Vessel-Diving OPE (Engaged in diving operation)
35: Vessel-Military OPE (Engaged in military operation)
36: Sailing Vessel
37: Pleasure Craft
50: Pilot Vessel
51: Search and Rescue Vessels
52: Tugs
53: Port Tenders
54: With Anti-Pollution Equip(Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or
equipment)
55: Law Enforcement Vessels
58: Medical Transports
59: Resolution No18:MOB-83(Ships according to Resolution
No18(Mob-83))
2X: WIG(Wing-in-Ground Effect Craft)
4X: High Speed Craft
6X: Passenger Ships
7X: Cargo Ships
8X: Tanker
9X: Other Type of Ship

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-28

 1
Displayed information Explanation
Cargo Category When the setting of the type of a ship is 2
2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X or 9X, the digit shown at the end of the code
represents the cargo/condition.
3
X1 Category X(DG/HP/MP) 4
X2 Category Y(DG/HP/MP)
X3 Category Z(DG/HP/MP) 5
X4 Category OS(DG/HP/MP)
X9 No Additional Information
6
X0 All Ships of This Type 7
Bearing Displays the bearing of an AIS target.
Range Displays the distance to an AIS target. 8
COG or CTW Displays the course of an AIS target. Displayed as "COG" in the course
over the ground mode and "CTW" in the course through the water mode.
9
SOG or STW Displays the ship speed of an AIS target. Displayed as "SOG" in the 10
speed over the ground mode and "STW" in the speed through the water
mode. 11
Heading
ROT
Displays the heading of an AIS target.
Displays the turning speed of an AIS target.
12
Position Displays the position of an AIS target. 13
Position Accuracy When the position-fix accuracy of an AIS target is low, [>10m] is
displayed. 14
When the position-fix accuracy of an AIS target is high, [<10m] is
15
displayed.
Position Sensor Displays the type of the position sensor used by an AIS target. 16
0: Not Defined
1: GPS 17
2: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS
18
4: Loran-C 19
5: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System 20
7: Surveyed
8: Galileo
21
15: Internal GNSS 22
Status Status of an AIS target
• Sleeping 23
• Active
• Lost
24
• Danger 25
• Selected
Source AIS information source APP A
- Direct
APP B
- Repeated
- VTS 1
2-29 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.1.5 Wind/Current

The Wind/Current Block shows the wind speed and current information.

(1)
(6)

(2)
(3)
(2)

(5) (7)
(4)

26inch screen 19inch screen

[1] Wind/Current meter

Displays the wind speed and current.
The display varies depending on the setting of the [N UP]/[H UP] (N-UP/H-UP switching) button.

[a]

[d] [c]

[b]
[a]
[b]
[c] [d)

N-UP display H-UP display

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-30

 1
[a] Wind bearing/speed
Indicates the wind bearing/wind speed. 2
Arrow feathers are shown when N-UP is selected.
The arrowhead indicates a leeward direction. The number of feathers indicates the wind speed.
3
4
Memo
The number of feathers is based on the Beaufort scale. 5
A triangle arrow is shown when N-UP is selected.
The arrowhead indicates a leeward direction.
6
7
[b] Flow direction/speed
Indicates the flow direction. 8
The arrow indicates the direction of the current.
9
[c] Ship’s heading 10
Indicates the ship's heading.
When N-UP is selected, the north of the direction ring of the meter is fixed on top, and the own 11
ship symbol rotates to indicate the heading.
When H-UP is selected, the ship's heading is fixed on top to show the direction.
12
13
[d] Ground direction
Indicates the ground direction. 14
[2] [N UP]/[H UP] button
15
Used to change the display method for the ship's heading. 16
When the [U-UP] button is clicked, the north of the direction ring of the meter is fixed on top, and the
own ship symbol rotates to indicate the heading. 17
When the [H-UP] button is clicked, the ship's heading is fixed on top to show the direction.
18
[3] Legends 19
Legends of the Wind/Current meter
20
[4] Wind bearing/speed information
Shows the wind bearing/speed information.
21
Display varies depending on the ship's heading display method. 22
23
24
25
Ship's heading display is N-UP Ship's heading display is H-UP APP A

For N-UP, [Bearing] (wind bearing), [Speed] (wind speed), and [BFT] (Beaufort scale) are shown as APP B
numerical values. 1
2-31 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
When H-UP is selected, [Bearing] (wind direction) and [Speed] (wind velocity) are displayed in
numerical values. For a 26-inch screen, either of the following symbol is also displayed.

Memo
No symbol is displayed with the wind bearing 0°or 180°.

[Speed] (wind speed) is shown as a numerical value.

[5] Tidal current information

Shows the tidal current information.
Display varies depending on the ship’s heading display method.

Ship’s heading display is N-Up Ship’s heading display is H-Up

[Set] (tidal current direction) and [Drift] (current drift) are displayed in numerical values.

For 26-inch screen, either of the following symbols is also displayed.

Memo
When the tidal current bearing is 0° or 180°, no symbol is displayed.

[6] Wind bearing/speed information

Shows the wind bearing/speed information.
Display varies depending on the wind bearing true/relative display method.

Ship’s heading display is N-Up Ship’s heading display is H-Up

For True wind bearing, [Bearing] (wind bearing), [Speed] (wind speed), and [BFT] (Beaufort scale)
are shown as numerical values.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-32

 1
For display of a relative bearing, [Bearing] (wind direction) and [Speed] (wind velocity) are displayed
in numerical values. 2
[7] Tidal current information
3
Shows the tidal current information. 4
Display varies depending on the ship's heading display method.
5
6
7
Ship’s heading display is N-Up Ship’s heading display is H-Up 8
[Set] (current direction) and [Drift] (current drift) are shown as numerical values. 9
10
2.3.1.6 Conning 11
12
The Conning shows simple conning information.

1 Click [Conning] on the [Page Selection] dialog box.

13
When [Conning] is not displayed, drag the scroll bar downward. 14
15
16
17
Scroll bar
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-33 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 The [Conning] window is displayed.
There are four panes on the [Conning] window in the case of the 26-inch screen and one pane
in the case of the 19-inch screen. A window switching button is provided in the pane.

26-inch screen

2 Click a window switching button to show the [Contents Selection] window.

26-inch screen

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-34

 1
Memo
When two Engines/Propellers are installed, two buttons are displayed on the 26-inch screen, one for
2
port (PORT) and the other for starboard (STBD). 3
4
5
6
Port Starboard 7
3 Click on the button of the information to be displayed on the pane. 8
[Off]: No display
[Depth]: Water depth information 9
[Rudder]: Rudder angle information
10
[EngineREV STBD]: Starboard engine/propeller information
[EngineREV PORT]: Port engine/propeller information 11
[Weather]: Weather information
[ROT]: Turning speed information 12
[Current]:
[Azimuth Thruster]:
Tidal stream information
Azimuth thruster information
13
14
Memo
Some buttons may not be displayed depending on the installation. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
Example: [Depth] (water depth information) is displayed at the top left pane and [ROT] (turning APP B
speed information) is displayed at the top right pane (26-inch screen).
1
2-35 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.2 Information reference windows
By clicking on the buttons in the window, the contents that are displayed in the window can be
switched.

[AIS MSG Tray] [Active Alert] [Maintenance INFO]

button [NAVTEX] button [Alert History] button [AIS]
button button button

Example of Extended Display

Information reference related windows are listed below.

Button Displayed content Related section

[AIS MSG Tray] AIS message tray 2.3.2.2 AIS MSG Tray
[NAVTEX] NAVTEX message 2.3.2.3 NAVTEX
(Displayed only when
NAVTEX is installed)
[Active Alert] Active alert that occurred in the equipment 2.3.2.4 Active Alert
[Alert History] Alert history that occurred in the equipment 2.3.2.5 Alert History
[AIS] Own ship’s AIS information 2.3.2.6 AIS
[Maintenance INFO] Maintenance information 2.3.2.7 Maintenance INFO

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-36

 1
When unread messages exist
The number of unread messages is displayed on the [AIS MSG Tray] button as a badge. 2
3
4
5
2.3.2.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended
6
window 7
The TT/AIS list can be switched to a standard window or an extended window.
To switch to an extended window, click on the list extension button. 8
To switch to a standard window, click on the list standard button.
9
10
11
List extension List
button standard
button
12
[Example of extended window]
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-37 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
[Example of standard window]
A list screen and a detail screen are available for the standard window.
To switch to the detail screen: Click on the [Detail] button.
To switch to the list screen: Click on the [List] button.

Scroll bar [Detail] button [List] button Scroll bar

When the display contents overlap the top, bottom, left, or right side of the screen, a scroll bar is
displayed.
By dragging the scroll bar, the overlapped section can be displayed.

Memo
At the initial display, a standard window is displayed during route monitoring and in other states, an
expanded window is displayed.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-38

 1
2.3.2.2 AIS MSG Tray
AIS messages are displayed. 2
For the details of the AIS message tray, refer to "5.8 AIS Message Tray".
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-39 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.2.3 NAVTEX
The NAVTEX message is displayed.
This equipment supports the NAVTEX messages of the NMEA format and NAVTEX format.
The format that is used for displaying the NAVTEX messages is determined by the installation.
[1] [2]

[4]

[3] [5] [6]

[1] NAVTEX message list

NAVTEX messages are listed. When a message line is clicked on, the details are displayed in “(2)
Message details”.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

[a] Date Received

Displays a message received time.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-40

 1
[b] Station ID
Displays the message transmission source base station ID (A to Z). 2
[c] Message ID 3
Displays the message ID (A to Z).
4
[d] Disp check box
When this check box is checked, the symbol is displayed.
5
6
[e] Protect check box
When this check box is checked, the messages is protected. 7
Sorting a message list
8
When any of the items in the title line is clicked on, the messages are sorted based on the item.
9
10
11
12
[2] Message details 13
(a)
14
(b) 15
16
(c)
17
18
(d)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
[a] Station ID
Displays the message transmission source base station ID (A to Z) and the name. APP A
[b] Message ID APP B
Displays the message ID and name.
1
2-41 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 [c] Expiration Date
Set the expiration date of the message.

※The expiration date will be 15 days.

[d] NAVTEX Message

A message is displayed.

[3] [Delete…] button

When this button is clicked on, the [Delete] dialog is opened.
By using this dialog, a NAVTEX message can be deleted from the NAVTEX message list.

(a)

[b] [c]

(b) (c)

[a] [Selected Message]/ [Before] (before the specified date) /[All Message](all the
messages)
Select a message to be deleted by clicking on the radio button.
When [Selected Message] is selected, the message that is selected from the NAVTEX message
list is targeted for deletion.
When [Before] is selected, a calendar picker is displayed. Enter a date and click on the [OK]
button. Messages on and before the specified date are targeted for deletion.
When [All Message] is selected, all the messages are targeted for deletion.

Cautoion
Unread messages within 24 hours after receiving can not be deleted.

[b] [OK] button

When this button is clicked on, the NAVTEX messages that are targeted for deletion are deleted.

[c] [Cancel] button

When this button is clicked on, the [Delete] dialog is closed without deleting the NAVTEX
messages.

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-42

 1
[4] [Edit Position…] button
When this button is clicked on, the [Location] dialog is opened. 2
In this dialog, edit the position data of the NAVTEX symbol that is displayed on the map.
3
4
5
6
[a]
7
8
[c]
9
[d]
10
11
[b]
[e] [f]
12
13
[a] Position data list
When the latitude or longitude of the position data is clicked on, a numeric input software 14
keyboard is displayed.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
The position data can be changed by entering a latitude or a longitude.
23
Memo 24
The maximum latitude input range of Location is 85 ° 00.000 (polar range restriction).
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-43 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
 [b] [Insert] button
Copies the selected row to the row following the row that is selected in the location data list.

[c] [Separate]button
Inserts a separator (--------) in the row following the row that is selected in the location data list.
Use the separator by improving the presentation of the position data list.

[d] [Delete]button
Deletes the row (location data or separator) that is selected in the location data list.

[e] [OK] button

Validates the editing of the location data and closes the [Location] dialog.

[f] [Cancel] button

Invalidates the editing of the location data and closes the [Location] dialog.

[5] [Request Message…] button

When this button is clicked on, the “NAVTEX Message Request” dialog is opened.
In this dialog, message transmission can be requested to the message transmission source.

Memo
When NAVTEX messages in NAVTEX format are to be displayed by the installation, the[Request
Message…]button is not displayed.

[×] (Close) button

[a]

[b]

[c] [d]
(a) Base station ID
Select to which base station message transmission is requested by checking the check box of
the base station ID (A to Z).

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-44

 1
(b) Message ID
Select a type of the message to be requested by checking the check box of the message ID. 2
3
(c) [OK] button
When this button is clicked on, transmission of the selected message is requested to the 4
selected base station and the [NAVTEX Messages Request] dialog is closed.
5
(d) [Cancel] button 6
To close the [NAVTEX Messages Request] dialog without requesting message transmission,
click on the [Cancel] button or [x] (Close) button. 7
[6] [Jump] button
8
When this button is clicked on, the NAVTEX symbol of the NAVTEX data that is selected from the 9
NAVTEX message list is displayed on the chart.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Display example of the NAVTEX symbol
16
Memo
When the NAVTEX message contains any of the following latitude/longitude patterns, the NAVTEX 17
symbol is displayed on the chart.
18
- dd-mm.mmf (Example: 35-35.50N)
- ddmm.mmf (Example: 3535.50N) 19
- dd mm.mmf (Example: 35 35.50N)
- dd mmf (Example: 35 35N) 20
- ddmmssf (Example: 353530N)
- dd-mm.mmmf (Example: 35-35.512N)
21
- dd-mmf (Example: 35-35N) 22
- dd-mm-ssf (Example: 35-35-30N)
- dd mm ssf (Example: 35 35 30N) 23
Legend: 'd'=degree, 'm'=mintues, 's'=seconds, 'f'=N/S, E/W
24
25
However, in case of Japanese NAVTEX it is not supported. The NAVTEX symbol will not be
displayed on the chart. APP A
APP B
1
2-45 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.2.4 Active Alert
This window displays active alerts that occurred in this equipment.

For the details, refer to "3.7.4 Displaying alert list and alert history".

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-46

 1
2.3.2.5 Alert History
This window displays the history of alerts that occurred in this equipment. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
For the details, refer to "3.7.4 Displaying alert list and alert history".
17
18
Memo
The Alert History screen is displayed under the extended window only. A standard window is not 19
available.
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-47 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
2.3.2.6 AIS
This window displays AIS information.
The AIS window includes the "Own Ship AIS Data" window that displays the AIS information of the own
ship.

When the [Own Ship AIS Data] button is clicked on, the
Own Ship AIS Data window is displayed.

Own Ship AIS Data window

Ship’s specific Dynamic information

Static information that may be changed static information
at navigation

For the details, refer to "5.11 Confirming Own Ship's AIS Information".

Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-48

 1
2.3.2.7 Maintenance INFO
2
Maintenance information are displayed. 3
For the details of the Maintenance INFO, refer to "19.9 Confirming Maintenance INFO".
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
2-49 Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit
Section 2 Name and Function of Each Unit 2-50
 1
Section 3 Basic Operations 2
3
3.1 Powering On and Starting
Turn on the power supply according to the following procedure.
4
5
6
7
Do not leave the disc in the DVD drive. 8
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
9
For low-temperature start-up, perform pre-heat for more than 30 10
minutes.
11
Otherwise, an operation failure may occur and an accident may occur.
12
13
Press the Power button on the Processing unit.
The Power button is lit and the start-up screen is displayed. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
After the start-up screen is displayed, the task menu is displayed after a brief interval. APP A
APP B
1
3-1 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.2 Starting Each Mode
When this equipment starts up, a task menu is displayed on the screen.
On the Task menu, you can select and start the desired mode from the operation modes available for
this equipment.

When the button of the mode to be executed is clicked on, the screen of the mode is displayed.

Note
When this equipment is started for the first time, if no operation is performed within 10
seconds after the task menu is displayed, the Route Planning System mode screen will
appear.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-2

 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Route Planning System
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-3 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.3 Basic Operations when using a Trackball
The trackball of the keyboard operation unit is mainly used for the operations of this equipment.
This section describes the basic operations performed using the trackball.

3.3.1 Basic trackball operations

As the basic trackball operations, move the cursor that is displayed on the screen and perform various
operations using the left and right mouse buttons.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-4

 1
3.3.2 Basic click operations
2
3.3.2.1 Selecting a button
3
When the cursor is set to a button and the button is clicked on, the function of the selected button is
executed.
4
• When a function On/Off button is clicked on, the setting is switched to On/Off each time.
5
• When a function selection button is clicked on, the function selection menu is displayed.
6
3.3.2.2 Selecting a single object
7
When the cursor is set to an object and the button is clicked on, the primary action (primary operation)
related to the target object is performed.
8
For example, when the cursor is set to the sleeping AIS target and the button is clicked on, "Activate" 9
which is the primary action of the sleeping AIS target is performed.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-5 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.3.2.3 Selecting multiple objects
When the cursor is set to multiple objects and the button is clicked, a list menu of the target objects is
displayed.
When an object is selected from the menu, the AUTO mode operation of the selected object is
executed.

When the cursor is set to multiple objects and the right button is clicked, a target object list menu is
displayed.
When an object is selected from the menu, the context menu of the selected object is displayed.

3.3.3 Basic operations of double-clicking

Double-click the button to end the creation mode in line creation mode or creation of a graphical route.

3.3.4 Basic operations of clicking the right button

When the cursor is positioned on the target object and the right mouse button is clicked, the context
menu of the target object appears.

3.3.5 Displaying simplified information and

operational guide of objects
When the cursor is set to a specific object, the "simplified information" and "operational guide" are
displayed.

Simplified information

Operational guide

When the cursor is moved, the display is cleared.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-6

 1
3.3.6 Cursor types 2
The following cursors are displayed by this equipment.
3
Cursor Cursor Name Description
Pointer cursor Indicates a position on the display panel, menu bar, dialog box, or 4
context menu.
5
Cross-hair cursor Indicates a position on the chart.
In AUTO mode, this cursor is used by an off-centering function. 6
Hand cursor Appears when the cursor is moved while pressing the left button 7
on a chart. This function enables moving the position freely by
dragging the chart. 8
Zoom cursor Appears when a zoom function is selected.
9
Edit cursor Moves an object in user map/manual update/mariner’s mark, or 10
route graphic mode.
11
Offset cursor Appears when the offset of the ship’s own position is set in
adjustment cursor mode. 12
Select cursor Displays the position on the chart during the editing of the user
map/manual update/mariner’s mark and route graphics.
13
Mark cursor Displayed at execution of User Map/Manual Update/Mariner’s 14
Mark, route plan (addition of WPT), or Manual Position Fix.
15
Chart selection Appears when the chart under the ENC/ARCS cursor is selected
cursor or Change Active Panel of ARCS is set. 16
Arrow cursors Appear when any of the following operations is performed.
17
• EBL/VRM, AIS filter, AZ, PI
• User map/manual update 18
• Moving the multi-view bar
• Operation of EBL, VRM 19
20
21
Rotation cursor Appears at PI operation or in route rotation mode of route planning. 22
23
Eraser cursor Appears in eraser tool mode.
24
Target activation Appears when the cursor is moved over a sleeping AIS target. 25
cursor
APP A
APP B
1
3-7 Section 3 Basic Operations
 Cursor Cursor Name Description
Numeric displayed Appears when the cursor is moved over an activated AIS target or
AIS target cursor TT.

Numeric displayed Appears when the cursor is moved over an AIS digital information
AIS target target or a TT digital information target.
cancellation cursor
Pointer cursor Appears when the cursor is moved over a hyperlink.

Move cursor • Appears during the dialog box move mode.

• Appears when moving an intersection point of EBL/VRM.
• Appears when moving Node Fixed EBL/VRM.
EBL cursor Appears at EBL maneuver is created.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-8

 1
3.4 Basic Menu Operations 2
Various functions can be executed or set from the menu that is displayed by clicking on the [Menu]
button.
3
This section describes the basic menu operations. 4
5
3.4.1 Opening the menu 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
[Menu] button 14
15
The menu is displayed.
16
The menu screen comprises two pages. 17
18
19
20
Page switching button: 21
Switch the menu screen by clicking on the button.
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-9 Section 3 Basic Operations
 2 Click on one of the buttons that are displayed on the menu.
A dialog box for executing or setting the applicable function appears.

Display Example

3 A submenu is displayed depending on the function. In this case, display a dialog box
of the function by clicking on the button on the submenu.
Example: TT/AIS

Top menu of
TT/AIS

Submenu of
TT/AIS
When the submenu screen extends over two pages, similar to the menu
screen, it is possible to switch between the pages using the page change
buttons.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-10

 1
4 Some functions comprise a classification pane and an edit pane and a dialog is
2
available to hide the classification pane by using the Disclosure button.
Example: "Settings" is clicked on the menu. 3
Disclosure button
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Classification Edit pane
pane

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
Hiding the classification pane
1
3-11 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.4.2 Menu list
The menus that are displayed vary according to the task that is currently being executed.

Menu Related section

Route Planning Section 7 Route Planning
Route Monitoring Section 8 Route Monitoring
Anchor Watch Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
Chart Section 11 Operating a Chart
User Chart Section 12 Creating a User Chart/Updating a Chart
Logbook Section 13 Logbook
TT/AIS Section 5 Target Tracking and AIS
Tools -
View Section 14 Setting Up Screen View
Alert Section 15 Setting Up Alerts
Settings Section 16 Setting Up the Operation Mode
Chart Maintenance 11.14 Maintaining a Chart
Maintenance 19.1 Maintenance Functions Executed from Menu
Help 3.18 Help
Code Input 3.19 Password Input
Service Section 17 Adjusting and Setting Up Equipment (for Services)

3.4.3 Closing the menu

Click on the [X] button on the menu (submenu).

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-12

 1
3.5 Basic Dialog Box Operations 2
When a dialog box is opened, the dialog box is in the factory setting state or state at termination of the
previous operation.
3
The setting can be changed by the following operation. 4
• Enter a character or a value in the input box.
• Select a setting from the list. 5
• Select a setting by clicking on the button.
• Select a setting by checking or unchecking the check box.
6
7
3.5.1 Changing dialog box settings 8
This section describes the basic setting change procedure by using the "Edit and Send AIS Message" 9
(AIS message editing/transmission) dialog box as the example.
10
11
12
[MMSI] box: 13
Enter a MMSI code
14
[Addressed]/
(value).
[Broadcast] radio
button:
Select whether a MMSI 15
message is to be sent or
a broadcast message is
distributed by clicking on
[Message
[ACK] buttonCategory] 16
list: Select ‘Safety
the radio button.
Message’ or ‘Routine 17
Message’ from the list.
18
Message input area:
Enter a message
19
(characters).
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-13 Section 3 Basic Operations
A function may also be set by opening another dialog box from the dialog box.

File operation dialog box display button:

When this button is clicked on, the "File
operation" dialog box is opened.

[Read only] check box:

Specify the file as Read Only by
checking the box by clicking.

3.5.2 Closing a dialog box

Close the dialog box by clicking on the [X] (Close) button on the dialog box.

[X] button

Memo
When no operation is performed for one minute after a dialog*1 is displayed, the dialog is closed
automatically. When a different dialog is displayed in any of the following cases, the dialog that is
currently displayed is closed automatically.
• Route monitoring is carried out in ECDIS mode.
If setting/editing operation has not been completed when the dialog is closed automatically, the
editing contents are discarded.
*1 The following dialogs are excluded from the targets.
Information monitoring window, information reference window, route monitoring (including Voyage
Information, Voyage Calculation, and Pair of data), MOB

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-14

 1
3.5.3 Title Bar
2
The name (title) of the dialog box is displayed on the title bar of the dialog box.
3
Title of the dialog box
4
5
6
7
8
9
The dialog can be moved by dragging the title bar. 10
11
12
13
When moving the dialog box, move to the position that does not cover the
operation area. If the dialog box covers the operation area, it may intefere the 14
recognition of the display information.
15
Memo 16
Operation area and user dialog area
17
User dialog area
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Operation area
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-15 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.6 Operation of the Information Monitor
Window
This section describes the operation and editing of the information monitor window.
For the details of the information monitor window, refer to "2.3 Common Information Window".

3.6.1 Opening the information monitor window

1 Click on the page switching button on the initial display window.
In the initial display, a blank window appears.

The "Page Selection" dialog box appears by clicking on the page switching button.

Page switching button

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-16

 1
2 Click on the monitor information to be displayed. The applicable window is opened.
2
3
4
Click
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Example: Selecting the "TT1 List" in the RADAR
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-17 Section 3 Basic Operations
Returning to the "Page Selection" dialog box from each window
When the page switching button on each window is clicked on, control returns to the "Page Selection"
dialog box.

Click.

Example: Returning control from TT1 List

Setting another window for the item

1 Select the checkbox for the item for which another window is to be set.

2 Click on the [New Window] button.

The item is displayed on another window.

Memo
The window that is already displayed cannot be set to another window.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-18

 1
3.6.2 Displaying an information monitor window from
2
other than the "Page Selection" dialog box
3
Use the following procedures to display an information monitor window from a display other than the
"Page Selection" dialog box. 4
Information monitor 5
Display method
window
Target INFO 1) Click on the TT symbol. (Cursor AUTO mode)
6
2) Click the right button on the TT/AIS symbol and select Readout
information from the context menu.
7
3) Click on the AIS Active target. (Cursor AUTO mode) 8
TT1 List, TT2 List 1) Select TT/AIS List from [TT/AIS] on the menu.
AIS List 1) Select TT/AIS List from [TT/AIS] on the menu.
9
AIS Detail INFO 1) Select one AIS target from the AIS List and click on the Details 10
button.
2) Click the right button on the AIS symbol, and select Readout detail 11
information from the context menu.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-19 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.7 Confirming and Acknowledging an Alert
When an alert is generated, a buzzer sound is emitted and an alert balloon is displayed in the alert
notification area.

Example of Balloon Alert Disclosure button

To acknowledge the alert detailed information, click on the Disclosure button.

For the details of the subsequent operations, refer to "3.7.2 Confirming alert contents".

The general procedure for handling an alert is shown below.

Alert generation
Task Menu

Stop the buzzer

"3.7.1 Stopping a buzzer"

Check the alert contents

"3.7.2 Confirming alert contents"

Acknowledge the alert

"3.7.3 Acknowledging the alert"

Resolve the alert cause

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-20

 1
3.7.1 Stopping a buzzer
2
To stop a buzzer (silencing), click the silence button in the alert notification area or press the
[SILENCE] key in the trackball operation unit. 3
[SILENCE] key 4
5
Silence button 6
7
8
9
3.7.2 Confirming alert contents 10
Alert icon showing that
acknowledge not allowed 11
Alert icon showing
priority and status
Alert icon showing
aggregation Alert message 12
13
Alert status area
14
Alarm Caution button
15
button
Warning button
16
17
Display Example when an Alert is Generated 18
19
20
21
Display Example when No Alert is Generated
22
When an alert is generated, the alert message is displayed in the "Alert status area".
23
The alert type and the number of alerts are displayed by the button.
24
25
APP A
Alarm Caution button
button APP B
Warning button 1
3-21 Section 3 Basic Operations
• Alarm button: Displayed when an alarm is generated. The button is displayed in red. The
number of alarms is indicated on the button
• Warning button: Displayed when a warning is generated. The button is displayed in orange. The
number of warnings is indicated on the button.
• Caution button: Displayed when a caution is generated. The button is displayed in yellow. The
number of cautions is indicated on the button.

1 Click on the button.

An alert balloon is displayed.

Disclosure button

2 Display the alert detail dialog by clicking on the Disclosure button.

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[1] [Higher] button

When the Higher button is clicked on, details of the alerts of the higher priority than the alert currently
displayed appear.

[2] [Lower] button

When the Lower button is clicked on, details of the alerts of the lower priority than the alert currently
displayed appear.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-22

 1
[3] Disclosure button
When the Disclosure button is clicked on, the original alert balloon is displayed. 2
As a result, the Own Ship Information that was hidden can be re-acknowledged.
3
[4] Detail information 4
Cause (Cause), Status (Status), date and times (Updated), details (Details), category (Category) and
priority (Priority) to be taken are displayed. 5
Memo
6
About Information:
7
Information is displayed in addition to a warning or a caution in the alert status area.
Information is used to report operation errors and so on to the users. 8
Unlike other alerts, no detail display is provided for Information.
9
10
3.7.3 Acknowledging the alert
11
After the [ACK] (acknowledgement) button of the alert detail display dialog box is clicked on or the
[ALERT ACK] button of the trackball operation section is pressed after verification of the alert contents,
12
the alert that is currently displayed is acknowledged.
13
When there are multiple alerts, perform the same operation by displaying the details dialog box of
another alert. 14
When all the alerts are approved, the alert detail display dialog is closed automatically.
15
[ACK] button
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Memo 25
An alert can also be acknowledged by clicking on the [Active Alert] tab - [ACK] button of the [Alert
APP A
List] dialog box.
For the details, refer to "3.7.4 Displaying alert list and alert history". APP B
1
3-23 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.7.4 Displaying alert list and alert history
When an alert list button is clicked on, the [Alert List] dialog box of the common information window is
displayed.

Memo
The common information window can be switched to either the standard window display or the
enlarged window display.
This section uses the enlarged window in the example.
Fort the details of switching between the standard window and the enlarged window, refer to
"2.3.2.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended window".

In the [Active Alert] tab, a list of the current alerts is displayed. In the [Alert History] tab, a list of past
alerts that have been resolved is displayed.

Alert list button

[Active Alert] Tab of the [Alert List] Dialog Box [Alert History] Tab of the [Alert List] Dialog Box

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-24

 1
[[Active Alert] tab]
[1] [2] [5]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
[3] [4]
18
[1] Active alert information
The number of current alerts is displayed.
19
20
Number of unacknowledged alerts
21
Number of alerts
22
23
[2] Active page information
Up to 20 alert information items can be displayed in one page. Use this function to switch pages when 24
the number of alert information items exceeds 20, requiring multiple pages.
25
Move to the
first page
Move to the last page APP A

Move to the previous page Move to the next page APP B

1
3-25 Section 3 Basic Operations
[3] Active alert list

• The alert of the highest priority is automatically selected. When an alert in the active alert list is
clicked on, the alert is selected.

• The details of the selected alert are displayed in "[4] Active alert details".
• When a new alert is generated during the screen display, the alert is added at the top of the list.
• By clicking on any of the items in the title line, active alerts can be sorted based on the item.

• When the [ACK] button is clicked on, the alert is acknowledged.

Memo
The [ACK] button is not displayed for the [Caution] alert since acknowledgement is not required.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-26

 1
[4] Details of active alert
Details of the alert that is currently selected are displayed. 2

[Higher] button [Lower] button

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Alert Detailed information
Cause: Displays the cause of the alert.
13
Details: Displays the details of the cause of the alert. 14
Priority: Displays the alert priority (identification of Alarm/Warning/Caution).
Category: Displays the alert category. 15
Status Displays the status of the alert
(Raised/Silenced/ACKed/Transferred/UnACK-Rectified).
16
Update Displays the latest update time of the alert. 17
[Higher] button 18
When this button is clicked on, the details of the alert of the higher priority than the alert that is currently
displayed appear. 19
[Lower] button 20
When this button is clicked on, the details of the alert of the lower priority than the alert that is currently
displayed appear. 21
[ACK] button 22
When this button is clicked on, the alert that is currently selected is acknowledged.
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-27 Section 3 Basic Operations
[5] Aggregation of alert
When this button is clicked on, display of the aggregation of alert is switched to ON or OFF.

Aggregation: OFF (Default) Aggregation: ON

• When aggregation is off, all alerts are displayed.

• When aggregation is on, alerts are aggregated. Displays Header alerts only.

Header alerts

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-28

 1
• When Cause of Header alerts is clicked, display of Member alerts is switched to ON or OFF. 2
3
4
5
6
Member alerts
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
[Header alerts]
Alert of an aggregation, under which the associated member alerts are sorted. 14
15
[Member alerts]
Alerts aggregated by aggregation source. Member alerts are displayed in a hierarchy.
16
17
Note
Alerts will not be aggregated if more than one member alert does not exist.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-29 Section 3 Basic Operations
[[Alert History] tab]
Alerts that have been generated in the past are displayed.

• Up to 20 events of alerts are displayed per page.

• When an alert is no longer active, the alert is added to the top of the list.
• By clicking on any of the items in the title row, alert can be sorted based on the item.
• Alerts are added per event as follows.

Event Detailed information

Raised Alert raised
Silenced Alert silenced
ACKed Alert acknowledged
Transferred Alert responsibility transferred
UnACK-Rectified Rectified alert was unacknowledged
Rectified Alert rectified
Repeat Alert sound was repeated
Removed Alert removed
This event occurs when equipment shuts down, returns to the
task menu, removes the installation, or loses the alert function.
Call Nav Alarm was transferred to BNWAS

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-30

 1
Memo 2
The Alert History screen is displayed under the extended window only. A standard window is not
available.
3
4
For details on the alert contents, refer to "Reference Guide - Appendix A Alert List" in the Owner's
Manual.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-31 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.8 Switching the Day/Night Mode
The screen display color can be switched to any of five levels according to the brightness within the
bridge.
Use the following procedure for switching.

1 Click on the Day/Night button on the right toolbar.

Adjustment buttons are displayed based on the brightness that is currently set.

Example: Day2 is set.

2 Adjust the brightness by using the [Light] button and the [Dark] button.

Whenever the [Light] button is clicked on, the brightness increases by one level from the

current level.

When the [Dark] button is clicked on, the brightness decreases by one level from the

current level.

: Day 1

: Day 2

: Day 3

: Dusk

: Night

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-32

 1
2
3
Change of the color of the Day/Night button, particularly the use of the 4
[Night] color, may interfere with the recognition of display information.
5
Memo
6
The colors and brightness of the buttons can be changed by setting [Settings] - [Color and 7
Brilliance] in the menu. For the details, refer to "16.15 Setting Color and Brightness ".
8
Relationship between the day/night mode and the screen/operation section brightness setting 9
value
When the day/night mode is changed, the screen/operation section brightness is set to the following 10
values.
11
26-inch monitor 19-inch monitor 12
Screen Day1, Day2, Day3: 67/100 Day1, Day2, Day3: 42/100
brightness Dusk: 60/100 Dusk: 20/100 13
Operation unit
Night: 11/100
Day1: Level4
Night: 4/100
14
brightness Day2: Level3 15
Day3: Level2
Dusk, Night: Level1 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-33 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.9 Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen
and Operation Unit
3.9.1 Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen
The screen brightness can be adjusted within the range from 0 to 100.

1 Click on the [Display Brightness] button on the right toolbar.

The following screen brightness buttons are displayed.

Whenever the [Light] button/[Dark] button is clicked on, the brightness changes by one level.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-34

 1
3.9.2 Adjusting the Brightness of the Operation Unit
2
The brightness of the operation section can be adjusted in 5 levels (0 to 4).
3
1 Click on the [Panel Brightness] (Brightness of the operation unit) on the Right Tool 4
Bar.
5
6
7
The following operation unit brightness buttons are displayed.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Whenever the [Light] button/[Dark] button is clicked on, the brightness changes by one level.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-35 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.9.3 [Display Brightness] dialog box
If the [MULTI] dial is operated while [Display Brightness] function is selected as the [MULTI] dial
assignment function, the [Display Brightness] dialog is displayed.

It is possible to adjust the brightness of the display section by rotating the [MULTI] dial.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-36

 1
2
3.10 Mouseover Display
3
When the mouse cursor is hovered over an object on the screen, the information on the object is 4
displayed on a popup window near the cursor.
When objects overlap, the following priority is applied and information on the object of the higher 5
priority is displayed.
6
Object Priority 7
• AIS target High
8
• Tracking target
• NAVTEX (symbol) 9
• Event mark
10
• Information mark
• Tidal stream mark 11
• User map (symbol)
12
• Buoy object
• Light object 13
• NAVTEX (line)
14
• Clearing Line
• User map (line) 15
• EBL1, EBL2
16
• VRM1, VRM2
• Parallel index lines 1 to 8 17
• Intersecting point fixed EBL/VRM
18
• AZ1, AZ2
• AIS filter 19
• Dragging anchor monitoring
20
• WPT
• NAVTEX (area) 21
• Highlight (Highlighted display)
22
• User map (area) Low
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-37 Section 3 Basic Operations
Memo
Refer to the following section for each object.
• AIS target/tracking target
“5.1 Displaying Symbols”
• NAVTEX (symbol/line/area)
“2.3.2.3 NAVTEX”
• Event mark
“6.12 Marking the Position of Own Ship with an Event Mark”
• Information mark/tidal stream mark/Clearing Line/Highlight (highlighted display)
“12.5.8 Creating Mariner's Mark/Line drawing objects (ECDIS screen only) ”
• User map (symbol)
“12.5.1 Creating a symbol object (Symbol) ”
• EBL1/EBL2/VRM1/VRM2
“4.5 Using the Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and Variable Range Marker (VRM)
• Parallel index lines 1 to 8
“4.6 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI) ”
• AZ1 and AZ2
“15.3 New Target Alarm Generation Conditions”
• AIS filter
“3.13.5 AIS filter”
• Dragging anchor monitoring
“9.2 Starting and Ending Dragging Anchor Monitoring”

3.10.1 Condition and timing of mouseover display

3.10.1.1 Starting mouseover display

Mouseover display is performed under the following condition and timing.
Condition The cursor in AUTO mode and Mouse Over Information is ON in
Tooltips/Infotips of View-Options.
Timing The cursor stops for 500ms.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-38

 1
2
3
［Mouse Over Information］ check box 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
When ［View］－［Options］-［Tooltips/Infotips］ is selected on the menu,
12
the ［Mouse Over Information］ check box is displayed. 13
By default, the check box is turned ON.
14
When the motion mode of the chart is a relative motion display (RM) mode, the fixed object such as
land moves.
15
In this case, mouseover display is not performed simply by hovering the cursor over the object. 16
By moving the cursor once and hovering the cursor over the object again, mouseover display can be
performed. 17
For the details of the motion mode, refer to “6.6.1 Setting a motion mode”.
18
19
3.10.1.2 Terminating mouseover display
20
Mouseover display terminates when the cursor is moved based on a certain distance or the mouse
button is clicked. 21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-39 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.10.2 How to read mouseover display
3.10.2.1 Example of mouseover display
When mouseover is performed on a user map (symbol), the following popup window is displayed.

The width and height of the popup window changes according to the number of characters that are
displayed.

3.10.2.2 Mouseover display of an AIS target/tracking target

The following information is displayed through mouseover display of an AIS target/tracking target.

(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)

(5)

[1] Target ID
A target ID is displayed in the following notation.
AIS:
AIS + target ID
Tracking target (RADAR screen):
TT + target ID
Tracking target (ECDIS screen):
“T1-“+ target ID or “T2-“+ target ID

[2] Ship’s name

Displays the name of the target ship.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-40

 1
[3] COG or CTW
Displays the course over the ground (COG) or the course through the water (CTW). 2
3
[4] SOG or STW
Displays the speed over the ground (SOG) or the speed through the water (STW). 4
[5] Operation guide display area
5
The operations that can be performed for this object are displayed.
6
In this example, [Left : Activate] indicates that if it is clicked on, the AIS target can be activated. [Right :
Show actions] (right: displays the possible operations) indicates that if it is clicked on, a context menu 7
is displayed.
8
9
3.10.2.3 Mouseover display of a buoy/light
10
In mouseover display of a buoy/light, the items containing data among the information that is indicated
below are displayed in the sequence indicated below. 11
The items that are displayed are the same between Buoy and Light other than the title.
12
Buoy / Light [1]
Former Mine Danger ... [2] 13
GBTEST.TXT [3]
14
GBTEST.TIF [4]
Start:CCYYMMDD 15
End:CCYYMMDD
Start:-- MMDD [5]
16
End:-- MMDD
Start:-- MM
17
End:-- MM 18
[1] Title (Buoy or Light)
19
20
[2] Object information
When the information overflows one line, an ellipsis is shown at the end. 21
[3] Text information
22
Displays the text file name of the object.
23
[4] Image information 24
Displays the image file name of the object.
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-41 Section 3 Basic Operations
[5] Start/end for specifying the duration
Displays the start and end dates of the specified duration when an object display duration is specified.
The display formats are as follows:

[In the case of CCYYMMDD]

CCYY: Year MM: Month DD: Day

<Display example>
Start:CCYYMMDD
End:CCYYMMDD

[In the case of --MMDD]

MM: Month DD: Day every year

<Display example>
Start:-- MMDD
End:-- MMDD

[In the case of --MM]

MM: Month every year

<Display example>
Start:-- MM
End:-- MM

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-42

 1
3.11 MOB (Man Over Board) 2
When a person falls overboard, this monitoring function prevents loss of sight of the position of the
person overboard.
3
The MOB use procedure is as follows. 4
5
1 Click on the [MOB] button on the right toolbar.
6
7
8
The [Marker] dialog box appears and the MOB marker is displayed on the own ship’s position
when the button is clicked on. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
[Marker] dialog Box 18
Memo 19
The [Marker] dialog box appears by clicking [Tools] - [MOB] on the menu
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-43 Section 3 Basic Operations
 2 Monitor with the screen and the [Marker] dialog box.
The position relationship between the own ship that is moving and the MOB marker is displayed
as follows.

Own ship's symbol

Position and bearing from own ship

MOB marker

See below for how to reference the [Marker] dialog box.

[1]

[2]

[3] [4]

[5]

[6]

[1] [Position]
Displays the coordinate of the MOB marker.

[2] [Bearing]
Displays the bearing from the own ship to the MOB marker.

[3] [Range]
Displays the range from the own ship to the MOB marker.

[4] NM/Km/sm switching button

Whenever this button is clicked on, the unit of [Range] is switched to NM, km or sm.

Memo
NM denotes nautical mile, sm denotes statute mile, and km denotes kilometer.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-44

[5] [TTG] 1
Displays the time to reach the MOB marker from the ship speed.
2
[6] [Time]
Displays the time elapsed after clicking on the [MOB] button. 3
4
To exit from MOB

1 Click the [X] button in the [Marker] dialog box.

5
6
7
8
9
A confirmation dialog box appears.
10
2 Click on the [OK] button. 11
The [Marker] dialog is closed.
The MOB marker is cleared. 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-45 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.12 Setting up the Timer
When [Timer] is selected in the Tools menu, the [Timer] dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, the time to generate an alarm can be set up.

3.12.1 Setting up the timer

To turn on the timer, select the [(LMT)] check box.
To turn off the timer, clear the [(LMT)] check box.

3.12.2 Setting up the time

When you click on the [Timer (LMT)] input box, the numeric value input keyboard appears. Specify the
time at which to generate an alarm in a range between 00:00 and 23:59.
For the use of the numeric value input keyboard, refer to "3.17.2 Name and function of each section of
the keyboard".

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-46

 1
3.13 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and 2
Variable Range Marker (VRM) 3
3.13.1 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and Variable 4
range marker (VRM)
5
The electronic bearing line (EBL) and the variable range marker (VRM) are the essential tools for
measuring bearings and ranges. 6
This equipment is equipped with two sets each for EBL (EBL1/EBL2) and VRM (VRM1/VRM2).
7
An intersecting point mark is displayed at the intersecting point between EBL and VRM. 8
By setting an intersecting point at any location, the bearing and range from the own ship’s position to
the location can be measured. 9
Two sets of EBL and VRM can be operated independently.
10
11
Measurement
EBL1 reference point 12
13
14
15
EBL2
Intersection 16
mark
17
Intersection mark
VRM1 18
Measurement reference point

VRM2 19
20
The first EBL and VRM are displayed in long dashed line and the second EBL and VRM are displayed 21
in short dashed line.
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-47 Section 3 Basic Operations
 Memo
The line colors can be set on the dialog that is displayed by selecting [Settings] - [Color and
Brightness] on the menu.

3.13.2 Displaying the EBL and VRM buttons

Use the EBL/VRM button for creation and setting of EBL/VRM and bearing/range of EBL/VRM.

[Displaying from the menu]

Use the [EBL/VRM readout] dialog.
Use the following method to display the dialog.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

A menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Tools] - [EBL/VRM] on the menu.

The [EBL/VRM readout] dialog is displayed.

st nd
EBL button (Left: 1 EBL, Right: 2 EBL)
st nd
VRM button (Left: 1 VRM, Right: 2 VRM)

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-48

 1
[Closing the [EBL/VRM readout] dialog]
Click on the [X] button. 2
3
Memo
The display mode of EBL/VRM that is displayed on the dialog by selecting [View] - [Options] - 4
[Tools] on the menu can be set to display/hide.
5
6
7
8
9
When this item checked, the information 10
is displayed and when this item is
unchecked, the information is hidden. 11
The setting is linked to the button
display of the [EBL/VRM readout] 12
dialog.
13
14
15
16
[Displaying by using the [EBL] and [VRM] dials]
By operating the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the keyboard operation unit, the [EBL/VRM readout] dialog
17
can be displayed. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-49 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.13.3 Basic manipulation of EBL/VRM
3.13.3.1 Switching the control right of EBL/VRM
This equipment is equipped with two sets of EBL (EBL1/EBL2) and VRM (VRM1/VRM2).
To use EBL/VRM, the EBL/VRM to be used must be enabled.
To enable EBL/VRM, click on the EBL/VRM button.
The status of EBL/VRM can be checked by using the EBL/VRM button.

[Button in [OFF] state]

EBL/VRM is disabled and is not displayed on the screen

When the button is clicked on, EBL/VRM is displayed and the manipulation is enabled.

[Numeric value displayed on the button]

• When the button is enclosed by a blue frame, EBL/VRM is displayed and the manipulation is
enabled (with control right).
When this button is clicked on, the blue frame is cleared and the manipulation is disabled (without
control right).
• When the button is not enclosed by a blue frame, although EBL/VRM is displayed on the screen,
the manipulation is disabled (without control right).
When the button is clicked on, the display is changed to [OFF].
When the button is double-clicked, the button is enclosed by a blue frame and the manipulation is
enabled (with control right).

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-50

 1
3.13.3.2 Setting up the measurement starting points
2
The measurement starting points of the EBL/VRM in operation can be changed. Set up the
measurement starting points as usage. 3
1 Enable the manipulation of EBL/VRM by clicking on the EBL/VRM button. 4
The display of the clicked button changes from [OFF] to the bearing presentation of the
measurement starting point. 5
2 Click on the Measurement Starting Point button of the EBL/VRM in the operational 6
state.
7
Measurement starting point button
8
9
10
Each time this button is clicked on, the measurement starting point switches in the order of blank
11
field → [C] → [D] → blank field and so on.
12
Blank field (CCRP): Sets the measurement starting point to the own ship position (CCRP).
C (Carried): Fixes the measurement starting point on the screen. 13
D (Dropped): Fixes the measurement starting point at longitude and latitude point.
14
Memo
In the case of [D], it is necessary to connect a navigation unit. 15
16
3.13.3.3 Setting the EBL bearing to True/Relative display 17
The EBL bearing True/Relative display can be changed by using the True/Relative button of EBL of the 18
Navigation Tools (measuring tools).
19
Setting the EBL numeric value display mode
20
1 Click on the true/relative button of EBL bearing.
Each time the button is clicked on, display switches between [T] → [R] → [T] in this order.
21
[T]: Displays EBL bearing in true bearing.
22
[R]: Displays EBL bearing in relative bearing.
23
24
True/relative button of EBL bearing 25
APP A
APP B
Memo
The true/relative presentation of EBL bearing is common between EBL1 and EBL2. 1
3-51 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.13.3.4 Setting up the range unit of VRM
1 Click on the VRM Range Unit button.
Each time the button is clicked on, display switches in the order of [NM] → [sm] → [km] → [NM]
[NM]: Displays the range in the unit of NM.
[sm]: Displays the range in the unit of sm.
[km]: Displays the range in the unit of km.

VRM range unit button

Memo
The VRM range unit is common between VRM1 and VRM2.
NM denotes nautical mile, sm denotes statute mile, and km denotes kilometer.

3.13.3.5 Operating the intersecting point between EBL and VRM

1 Place the cursor on the intersection mark () and click the mouse button.
EBL and VRM are set to a movable state.

Intersection EBL1
mark

EBL2

VRM1 Intersection mark

VRM2

2 Move the cursor to the required target or the coordinate.

EBL and VRM move together with the cursor.

3 Click on the mouse button.

The EBL and VRM are fixed.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-52

 1
3.14 Cursor AUTO Mode 2
The cursor AUTO mode (referred to as AUTO mode henceforth) is a function that automatically
executes the function (operation) that is assigned to the object when the object under the cursor is
3
clicked on. 4
The AUTO mode is effective for the following objects. 5
Section that describes the function
6
Object
(operation) to be executed
7
No object (when the button is clicked on the position 3.13.1 No object
without a valid object under the AUTO mode on a
chart)
8
AIS 3.13.2AIS 9
TT 3.13.3TT
Acquisition/Activation Zone (AZ)
10
3.13.4 (AZ) Acquisition/Activation Zone
AIS filter 3.13.5.AIS filter 11
User chart 3.13.6 User chart
12
Mariner's Mark/Line 3.13.7Mariner’s Marl/Line
Manual update 3.13.8Manual updating 13
Buoy object 3.13.9 Buoy object
14
Light object 3.13.10Light object
EBL 3.13.11EBL 15
VRM 3.13.12VRM 16
EBL/VRM intersecting point 3.13.13 EBL/VRM intersecting point
Node Fixed EBL/VRM 3.13.14 Node Fixed EBL/VRM
17
PI 3.13.15PI, 4.6 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI) 18
WPT of monitored route 3.13.16 WPT of Monitored Route
Monitoring dragging anchor 3.13.17Monitoring dragging anchor
19
Route planning 3.13.18 Planned route 20
Note
21
When using ECDIS in AUTO mode, if there is no object under the cursor, the chart position at the
22
cursor will move to the center of the screen according to "3.13.1". When the ship is under vibration
and rough sea conditions, the center of the chart will be moved to an unintended position by 23
inadvertent left-click operation. Confirm the cursor type on the object is changed to other types
before left-click operation for AUTO mode operation. 24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-53 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.14.1 No object
When the button is clicked on the position on the chart without a valid object under the AUTO mode,
the following operation is performed.

Executes off-centering (sets the clicked position as the center of the screen).

3.14.2 AIS
[Sleeping AIS target target]
When a sleeping AIS target is clicked on, the AIS target is activated.

[Activated AIS target]

When an Activated AIS target is clicked on, the AIS target value is displayed.

[Numeric displayed AIS target]

When the numeric displayed AIS target is clicked on, the AIS target value display is cancelled.

[AIS-SAR aircraft normal target]

When an AIS-SAR aircraft in the normal state is clicked on, the AIS-SAR aircraft is selected and the
AIS-SAR aircraft value is displayed.

[Numeric displayed AIS-SAR aircraft]

When a numeric displayed AIS-SAR aircraft is clicked on, the sleeping target of the AIS-SAR aircraft is
displayed and the AIS-SAR aircraft value display is cancelled.

[Sleeping AIS-SAR vessel target]

The same operation as the normal sleeping AIS target is performed.

[Activated AIS-SAR vessel target]

The same operation as the normal activated AIS target is performed.

[Numeric displayed AIS-SAR vessel target]

The same operation as the normal numeric displayed AIS target is performed.

[Sleeping AIS-SART]
The same operation as the normal sleeping AIS target is performed.

[Activated AIS-SART]
The same operation as the normal activated AIS target is performed.

[Numeric displayed AIS-SART target]

The same operation as the normal numeric displayed AIS target is performed.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-54

 1
[AtoN normal target]
When AtoN target in a normal state is clicked on, the AtoN normal target is selected and the numeric 2
value of AtoN is displayed.
3
[Numeric displayed AtoN target] 4
When a numeric displayed AtoN target is clicked on, the AtoN normal target is deselected and the
numeric value of AtoN normal target is cancelled. 5
[AIS-shore base station normal target]
6
When an AIS-shore base station target in a normal state is clicked on, the AIS-shore base station is 7
selected and the numeric value of AIS-shore base station is displayed.
8
[Numeric displayed AIS-shore base station normal target]
When an AIS-shore base station in a normal state is clicked on, the AIS-shore base station is
9
deselected and the numeric value of AIS-shore base station is cancelled.
10
11
3.14.3 TT 12
[Tracked target]
When a tracked target is clicked on, a numeric value is displayed.
13
14
[Numeric displayed tracked target]
When a numeric displayed tracked target is clicked on, the numeric value display of TT is cancelled. 15
16
3.14.4 (AZ) Acquisition/Activation Zone 17
End Distance
18
19
Start Angle End Angle
20
21
22
Start Distance
23
Own ship 24
[Start Angle]
25
When Start Angle is clicked on, the cursor is set to the Start Angle/End Angle change mode. APP A

[End Angle] APP B

When End Angle is clicked on, the cursor is set to the End Angle change mode. 1
3-55 Section 3 Basic Operations
[Start Distance]
When Start Distance is clicked on, the cursor is set to the Start Distance/End Distance change mode.

[End Distance]
When End Distance is clicked on, the cursor is set to the End Distance change mode.

Memo
When Acquisition/Activation Zone is not displayed on the radar screen, AIS automatic activation is
disabled. If automatic AIS sleeping targets activation is necessary, please set up the
acquisition/activation zone.

3.14.5 AIS filter

Sector Sector
(Start angle) (End angle)

* The section other than the

sides of the sector is not Own ship
targeted for selection.
Ring

[Sector (start angle)]

When Sector (start angle) is clicked on, the cursor is set to the Sector (start/end angle) change mode.

[Sector (end angle)]

When Sector (end angle) is clicked on, the cursor is set to the Sector (end angle) change mode.

[Ring]
When Ring is clicked on, the cursor is set to the Ring change mode.

Memo
The values of Sector (start angle) and Sector (end angle) indicate relative bearings based on the
ship’s heading as the standard.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-56

 1
3.14.6 User chart
2
The operation of an object in the unselected state is different from that of an object in the selected
state. 3
4
3.14.6.1 Non-selected object
5
When an object created on the user map is clicked on, the object is selected and the property screen of
the object is displayed. 6
3.14.6.2 Selected object 7
The operation varies according to the object. 8
9
(1) Symbol
When the selected symbol is clicked on, a symbol move mode is set. 10
When the right button is clicked, the symbol move mode is cancelled.
11
(2) Simple line 12
13
Simple line in the selected 14
state

Vertex
15
16
Simple line in the non-selected state
17
[Selecting vertex]
18
<Non-selected state>
SEL 19
20
Non-selection state
Click The vertex is selected and the
simple line property screen is
21
displayed.
22
<Selected state> 23
Vertex in the selected state
24
SEL
25
APP A
Click The vertex on which the button was
clicked is selected and the simple line
APP B
property screen is displayed.
1
3-57 Section 3 Basic Operations
 [Selecting a line segment]

Corresponding vertex
SEL

Non-selection state Click Line segment selected state. The

property screen of the corresponding
vertex is displayed.

[Moving a vertex]
When the middle point of simple line in the selected state is clicked on, vertex move mode of simple
line is set.

[Inserting a vertex]
When a line segment of simple line in the selected state is clicked on, vertex insertion mode of simple
line is set.

Memo
A vertex can also be inserted by using [Insert Vertex] on the context menu that is displayed by
clicking the right button on the simple line in the selected state.
When the insertion point is the starting point or the ending point, a vertex can be inserted with [Add
Vertex].

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the vertex addition, move, or insertion mode can be cancelled.

(3) Line-Circle
[Moving Line-Circle]
When the circumference of the line-circle in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of line-circle
is set.

[Chainging a radius]
When a square of four corners of the line-circle in the selected state is clicked on, radius set mode of
line-circle is set.

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the line-circle move or radius change mode can be cancelled.

(4) Line-Ellipse
[Moving line-ellipse]
When the circumference of the line-ellipse in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of
line-ellipse is set.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-58

 1
[Changing vertical/horizontal width]
When a square of four corners of the line-ellipse in the selected state is clicked on, a 2
vertical/horizontal width change of line-ellipse mode is set.
3
[Cancelling operation] 4
By clicking the right button, the line-ellipse move or vertical/horizontal width change mode can be
cancelled. 5
(5) Arc
6
7
A square of 8
Drawing start four corners
9
Click 10
11
Arc Drawing end angle 12
[Moving an arc]
13
When the arc in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of arc is set. 14
[Changing a radius] 15
When a square of four corners of the arc in the selected state is clicked on, radius set mode of arc is
set.
16
17
[Drawing start angle]
When a drawing start angle of the arc in the selected state is clicked on, drawing start angle set mode 18
of arc is set.
19
[Drawing end angle]
20
When a drawing end angle of the arc in the selected state is clicked on, drawing end angle set mode
of arc is set. 21
[Cancelling operation] 22
By clicking the right button, the arc move, radius change, drawing start angle change, or drawing end
23
angle change mode can be cancelled.
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-59 Section 3 Basic Operations
(6) Polygon
[Moving a vertex]
When a vertex of the polygon in the selected state is clicked on, vertex move mode of polygon is set.

[Inserting a vertex]
When a line segment of the polygon in the selected state is clicked on, vertex insertion mode of
polygon is set.

Memo
A vertex can also be inserted by using [Insert vertex] on the context menu that is displayed by
clicking the right button on the selected polygon.

[Moving a polygon]
When the inside of the polygon in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of polygon is set.

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the vertex move, insertion, or polygon move mode can be cancelled.

(7) Area-Circle
[Moving Area-Circle]
When the radius of the area-circle in the selected state is clicked on, an area-circle move mode is set.

[Changing a radius]
When a square formed by four corners of area-circle in the selected state is clicked on, an area-circle
radius setting mode is set.

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the area-circle move or radius change mode can be cancelled.

(8) Area-Ellipse
[Moving area-ellipse]
When the radius or inside of the area-ellipse in the selected state is clicked on, an area-ellipse move
mode is set.

[Changing a radius]
When a square formed by four corners of area-ellipse in the selected state is clicked on, an
area-ellipse radius setting mode is set.

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the area-ellipse move or radius change mode can be cancelled.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-60

 1
(9) Sector
[Moving a sector]
2
When a circumference or inside of the sector in the selected state is clicked on, a fan move mode is
3
set.
4
[Changing a radius]
When a square formed by four corners of the sector in the selected state is clicked on, a sector radius
5
setting mode is set. 6
[Drawing start angle] 7
When a drawing start angle of the sector in the selected state is clicked on, a sector drawing start
angle setting mode is set.
8
9
[Drawing end angle]
When a sector drawing end angle in the selected state is clicked on, a sector drawing end angle 10
setting mode is set.
11
[Cancelling operation] 12
By clicking on the right button, the sector move, radius change, drawing start angle change or
drawing end angle change mode can be cancelled.
13
14
(10) Text
[Moving text] 15
When the text object in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of the text object is set.
16
[Cancelling operation] 17
By clicking the right button, the text move mode can be cancelled.
18
(11) Arrow
[Moving an arrow]
19
When a line segment of the arrow in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of the arrow is set. 20
[Moving a start point] 21
When a start point of the arrow in the selected state is clicked on, start point move mode of the arrow
is set.
22
23
[Moving an end point]
When an end point of the arrow in the selected state is clicked on, end point move mode of the arrow 24
is set.
25
[Cancelling operation] APP A
By clicking the right button, the arrow move or start point/end point move mode can be cancelled.
APP B
1
3-61 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.14.7 Mariner's Mark/Line
3.14.7.1 Object in the non-selected state
When the object that is created by using Mariner's Mark/Line is clicked on, the object is selected and
the property screen of the object is displayed.

3.14.7.2 Object in selected state

The operation varies according to the object.

(1) Event mark in the selected state

When an event mark is clicked on, the selected state of the event mark is cleared.

(2) Information Mark i

When Information Mark in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of Information Mark is set.
By clicking the right button, the Information Mark move mode can be cancelled.

(3) Tidal Stream

When Tidal Stream in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of Tidal Stream is set.
By clicking the right button, the Tidal Stream move mode can be cancelled.

(4) Clearing Line

[Moving Clearing Line]
When a line segment of Clearing Line in the selected state is clicked on, move mode of Clearing Line
is set.

[Moving a start point]

When a start point of Clearing Line in the selected state is clicked on, start point move mode of
Clearing Line is set.

[Moving an end point]

When an end point of Clearing Line in the selected state is clicked on, end point move mode of
Clearing Line is set.

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the Clearing Line move or start point/end point move mode can be
cancelled.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-62

 1
(5) Highlight
[Moving a vertex] 2
When a vertex of a highlight in the selected state is clicked on, vertex move mode of highlight is set.
3
[Inserting a vertex] 4
When a line segment of a highlight in the selected state is clicked on, vertex insertion mode of
highlight is set. 5
6
Memo
A vertex can also be inserted by using [Insert vertex] on the context menu that is displayed by 7
clicking the right button on a highlight in the selected state.
8
[Moving a highlight] 9
When an inside of a highlight in the selected state is clicked on, entire shift mode of highlight is set.
10
[Cancelling operation] 11
By clicking the right button, the vertex move, insertion, or highlight move mode can be cancelled.
12
(6) Plotted Position
[Moving a Plotted position]
13
When Plotted position in the selected state is clicked on, a Plotted position mode move is set. 14
[Cancelling operation]
15
By clicking the right button, the Plotted position move mode can be cancelled. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-63 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.14.8 Manual updating
3.14.8.1 Unsaved object
The operation of AUTO mode of unsaved objects is the same as for the user map.

3.14.8.2 Saved object

When setting an edit mode by clicking on the saved object, the property screen of the saved object is
displayed.

3.14.8.3 C-MAP chart

When the C-MAP chart is updated manually and any of the following conditions is satisfied, the
updated object is deleted automatically.
• The database has been updated.
• The object is in the Hide state.
• A period of 90 days has elapsed from the updated object creation date.

3.14.9 Buoy object

When a buoy object is clicked on, a pick cursor is displayed at the clicked point and the [Chart Info] tab
of the [Pick Report] dialog box is displayed.

Memo
The pick cursor indicates a square frame that is displayed at the point from which the chart
information was read and the chart object information inside of the frame is displayed in the [Pick
Report] dialog.

3.14.10 Light object

When a light object is clicked on, a pick cursor is displayed at the selected point and the [Chart Info] tab
of the [Pick Report] dialog box is displayed.

Memo
The pick cursor indicates a square frame that is displayed at the point from which the chart
information was read and the chart object information inside of the frame is displayed in the [Pick
Report] dialog.

3.14.11 EBL
When EBL is clicked, the mode becomes one in which EBL is operated alone.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-64

 1
3.14.12 VRM
2
When VRM is clicked, the mode becomes one in which VRM is operated alone.
3
4
3.14.13 EBL/VRM intersecting point
5
When the EBL/VRM intersection point is clicked, the mode becomes one in which EBL and VRM are
operated simultaneously. 6
7
3.14.14 Node Fixed EBL/VRM 8
When Node Fixed EBL/VRM is clicked on, the clicked point becomes the EBL/VRM intersecting point, 9
and an EBL/VRM (1step) drawing mode is set. (The start point follows the own ship’s position.)
10
3.14.15 PI 11
Four PI setting modes are available and the operation of the cursor AUTO mode varies depending on 12
the setting.
For the details, refer to "4.6 Parallel Index Line (PI)". 13
14
3.14.16 WPT of Monitored Route 15
When a WPT of a monitored route is clicked on, the detail information of the WPT is displayed. 16
17
3.14.17 Monitoring dragging anchor 18
3.14.17.1 Object in the unselected state 19
When a monitoring dragging anchor object is clicked on, the clicked object is set to the selected state 20
and the [Anchor Watch] dialog box is displayed.
21
22
3.14.17.2 Selected state
23
Dragging anchor monitoring circle
[Moving a dragging anchor monitoring circle] 24
When a circumference of a dragging anchor monitoring circle in the selected state is clicked on,
move mode of dragging anchor monitoring circle is set.
25
APP A
[Changing a radius]
When a square of the four corners of a dragging anchor monitoring circle in the selected state is APP B
clicked on, radius setting mode of dragging anchor monitoring circle is set. 1
3-65 Section 3 Basic Operations
 [Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the dragging anchor monitoring circle move or radius change mode can
be cancelled.

Dragging anchor monitoring polygon

[Moving a polygon]
When a vertex of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon in the selected state is clicked on, a vertex
move mode of dragging anchor monitoring polygon is set.

[Inserting a vertex]
When a line segment of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon in the selected state is clicked on, a
vertex insertion mode of dragging anchor polygon is set.

Memo
A vertex can also be inserted by using [Insert vertex] on the context menu that is displayed by
clicking the right button on a dragging anchor monitoring polygon in the selected state.

[Moving a polygon]
When an inside of the dragging anchor monitoring polygon in the selected state is clicked on, a total
shift mode of dragging anchor monitoring polygon is set.

[Cancelling operation]
By clicking the right button, the vertex move, insertion or dragging anchor monitoring polygon move
mode can be cancelled.

3.14.18 Planned route

[WPT]
When WPT in the unselected state is clicked on, WPT is in the selected state and WPT edition mode is
set.

Unselected state Selected state

By clicking on the right button, the WPT move mode can be cancelled.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-66

 1
[Leg]
When Leg in the unselected state is clicked on, WPT is in the selected state and WPT insert mode is 2
set.
3
WPT corresponding
4
to the selected Leg
5
6
7
Unselected
state
Selected state
8
By clicking the right button, the WPT insertion mode can be cancelled. 9
10
[PORT] 11
When PORT in the unselected state is clicked on, PORT is in the selected state and PORT width
change mode is set. 12
13
WPT corresponding
to the selected PORT 14
15
16
Unselected Selected state 17
state

By clicking the right button, the PORT width change mode can be cancelled.
18
19
[STBD]
When STBD in the unselected state is clicked on, STBD is in the selected state and STBD width 20
change mode is set.
21
WPT corresponding 22
to the selected STBD
23
24
25
Unselected Selected state
state APP A
By clicking the right button, the STBD width change mode can be cancelled. APP B
1
3-67 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.15 Saving the screen that is currently
displayed
The image that is displayed on the screen can be saved as a PNG file.
Use the following procedure to save screen images.

1 Click on the Disclosure button on the left toolbar.

Normally, hidden buttons are displayed.

2 Click on the screen capture button.

The screen that is currently displayed is saved and the next confirmation dialog box is
displayed.

When the screen contents cannot be saved:

When the screen contents cannot be saved due to insufficient disk free space, an error dialog is
displayed.
In this case, secure sufficient disk free space and save the contents again.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-68

 1
3.16 [MULTI] Dial 2
In the case of JAN-5203, the [MULTI] dial function is not available.
3
3.16.1 Functions of [MULTI] dial 4
By turning the [MULTI] dial, the functions that are assigned to the [MULTI] dial can be operated. 5
Assignment to the [MULTI] dial can be changed.
6
7
3.16.2 Functions assigned to [MULTI] dial
8
3.16.2.1 Displaying a screen for setting the function that is assigned
9
By pushing the [MULTI] dial, the setting screen for the function that is currently assigned can be
displayed. 10
Assigned function name 11
12
13
3.16.2.2 Changing the function that is assigned 14
1 Press the [MULTI] dial. 15
The [Key Assignment] dialog box of the assigned function is displayed.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-69 Section 3 Basic Operations
 2 Select a function to be assigned from [Multi Dial] by turning the [MULTI] dial.

Sequence number of
Another function available for selection assigned function and the
Item on the blue button is the function that total number
is currently selected Another function available
Description of the function that is for selection
currently selected

The table below lists the functions that can be assigned.

No. Function name Function outline

1 Vector Time
2 C UP Angle
3 Own Track Color
4 Display Brightness
5 Panel Brightness
6 Gain
7 Sea
8 Rain
Selection of a vector length
Change of the course-up angle
Selection of an own track color
Adjustment of brightness of the display panel
Adjustment of brightness of the operation panel
Adjustment of sensitivity
Removal of sea clutter
Removal of rain and snow clutter

1 Press the [MULTI] dial.

The selected function is set to the assigned function.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-70

 1
3.17 Basic Operations of the Software 2
Keyboard 3
Use a software keyboard for inputting numeric values and characters in various setting operations. 4
This section describes the basic operations of a software keyboard.
5
6
3.17.1 Starting a software keyboard
7
When the mouse button is clicked on a numeric input text box on such as a dialog box, a numeric input
software keyboard is displayed. 8
When the mouse button is clicked on a character input text box, a character input software full
keyboard is displayed. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
The mouse cursor moves to the
16
inside of the software keyboard.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-71 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.17.2 Name and function of each section of the
keyboard
Numeric value input software keyboard

[3] [5]

[1]

[2] [2]

[10]
[4]

[6]

[11]
[7]

[8]

[9]

[12]

Software full keyboard for character input

* The description of the functions common to those of a numeric value input software keyboard is omitted.
[18]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-72

 1
[1] Input value display section
Displays the value that is input/edited through the software keyboard. 2
[2] Spin button
3
• When the right spin button is clicked on, the minimum unit value that can be set is added to the 4
value that is displayed. When the left spin button is clicked on, the minimum unit value that can be
set is subtracted from the value that is displayed. 5
6
7
8
9
Example of addition 10
• When the mouse button is held down on the right spin button, the value is added consecutively. 11
When the mouse button is held down on the left spin button, the value is subtracted consecutively.
• When the value set by the right spin button operation exceeds the maximum value, the minimum
12
value is set subsequently. When the value set by the left spin button operation becomes lower than 13
the minimum value, the maximum value is set subsequently.
14
[3] Numeric value slider
When the value adjustment button on the value slider is clicked on, the input value increases or
15
decreases.
16
[4] Operation guide display button 17
Displays an operation guide.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
To close the operation guide, click on the operation guide display button again or click on a location
other than the operation guide. APP A
APP B
[5] [CLR] key
Clears the input value that is currently selected. 1
3-73 Section 3 Basic Operations
[6] Back Space key
Clears the input value on the left-side of the cursor position.

[7] [Cancel] key

Cancels the input operation and closes the software keyboard.

[8] Option key

Displays the following keys according to the type of the software keyboard.
• Signed keyboard: + key and - key
• Latitude software keyboard: Direction key [N key and S key)
• Longitude software keyboard: Direction key [E key and W key)

[9] [Enter] key

Determines the input operation.

[10] Input range display section [format display section)

Displays the values and character types that can be input.

[11] Numeric keys

Use the keys for input of numeric values.

[12] Arrow keys

When there are multiple input sections, the active part can be moved to the left/right by clicking on the
arrow key.
Example:

When the [left arrow key) is clicked on, the input section moves to "12".

When the [right arrow key) is clicked on, the input section moves to "000".

[13] Lowercase character switching key

Changes the character input key mode to the lowercase character mode.

[14] Uppercase character switching key

Changes the character input key mode to the uppercase character mode.

[15] Symbol switching key

Changes the character input key mode to the symbol mode.

[16] Key alignment switching key

Switches the character key alignment between QWERTY alignment and alphabetic alignment.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-74

 1
[17] Character input key
Use this key for character input. 2
[18] [DEL] key
3
Deletes the character on the left-side of the cursor. 4
5
3.17.3 Numeric value input example 6
In this example, "12°34.567’ S" (south latitude 12°34.567’) is input as the latitude. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1 Start up the latitude software keyboard. 15
35 ° 00 . 000 ‘ N
16
17
2 Enter "1".
18
1 ° 00 . 000 ‘ N
19
20
3 Enter "2".
21
12 ° 00 . 000 ‘ N 22
The active part moves to the right by one position. 23
24
4 Enter "3".
25
12 ° 3 . 000 ‘ N
APP A
APP B
1
3-75 Section 3 Basic Operations
 5 Enter "4".

12 ° 34 . 000 ‘ N
The active part moves to the right by one position.

6 Enter "5" and "6".

35 ° 34
12 00 . 56 ‘ N

7 Set the input part at the right end as the active part (by clicking on "N" in this
example).

8 Click on the [S] key of the Option key.

"N" changes to "S".

9 When the right arrow key is clicked, input is determined and the software keyboard is
closed.

Inputting a single-digit value

Enter a value and click on another input part or move the active part by using the right arrow key.
Example:

35 ° 00 . 000 ‘ N

Enter 1.

1 ° 00 . 000 ‘ N

The value that is input by clicking on another input part or

the right arrow key becomes a single-digit value and the
value is determined. 0 is input in the blank space.

01 ° 00 . 000 ‘ N

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-76

 1
Inputting blank space in the decimal fraction section [3 digits)
After a value is input and the [Enter] key is clicked on, the input of the decimal fraction section is 2
determined.
Example 3
35 ° 00 . 5 ‘ N 4
5
Enter "5" and click on the [Enter] key.
A "0" is displayed in the blank column 6
next to "5", and the numerical value
gets confirmed. 7
8
3.17.4 Character input example 9
This section describes character input by using a full keyboard.
10
Input caret
11
Indicates the
character input
12
ab 13
position.

14
Active mark
Indicates the character string that is being input. 15
16
Input example 17
1 Start up a full keyboard.
18
When a value (character) has been input in the text box, the full character string is selected at
startup. 19
aaaaaaaaaa 20
21
2 Delete the character string by clicking the Back Space key. 22
23
24
3 Input any character string.
25
ab
APP A
APP B
4 Determine the input by clicking on the [Enter] key.
1
3-77 Section 3 Basic Operations
Character modification example

1 Move the cursor to the left-end (or right-end) of the character string to be modified and
click the mouse button.

The input caret moves to the clicked position.

2 Click the mouse button on the input caret position and select the character string to be
modified by dragging with the trackball.
*When the character string is selected, the input caret is cleared.

abcdefgh

3 Perform the following operation in the selected state.

[Deleting a selected section]

abcdefgh
When the Back Space key is clicked on, the
selected section is deleted.

[Replacing a selected section]

abcdefgh
Input any character in the selected state. (In this
i
example, "i" is input.)

[Canceling a selected state]

Under a selected state, click on another section inside of

abcdefgh the active mark to cancel the selection. The input caret
moves to the clicked position.

4 After modification is determined, determine the input by clicking on the [Enter] key.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-78

 1
3.18 Setting a Date and a Time (Calendar 2
Operation) 3
Set a date and a time on the calendar input screen.
The following calendar types are available.
4
5
6
7
8
Calendar picker Calendar picker + Time picker 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
From-To calendar picker
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-79 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.18.1 Details and usage of a calendar picker and a
time picker
3.18.1.1 Details of a calendar
[2] [1]

[3]

Selected date

[4]

[5]

[1] Year selection spin button

Selects a year to be displayed in the date selection box.
• When the right spin button is clicked on, the year is changed in the ascending order.
• When the left spin button is clicked on, the year is changed in the descending order.

[2] Month selection spin button

Selects a month to be displayed in the date selection box.
• When the right spin button is clicked on, the month is changed in the ascending order.
• When the left spin button is clicked on, the month is changed in the descending order.

[3] Day selection box

Selects a day.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-80

 1
[4] Time selection spin button
Sets an hour, a minute, and a second. 2
• When the upper spin button is clicked on, the hour, minute, and second are changed in the
ascending order.
3
• When the lower spin button is clicked on, the hour, minute, and second are changed in the 4
descending order.
5
[5] [OK] button
Completes the setting and closes the calendar.
6
7
3.18.1.2 How to use a calendar 8
9
1 Click on (calendar) button next to the date setting box.
10
A calendar is displayed.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2 Set a year and a month by using the year selection spin button and the month selection 22
spin button respectively.
23
3 Click on the day to be set from the day selection box.
* In the case of a calendar picker only, the day is set at this stage and the calendar picker is
24
closed. 25
4 Set a time by clicking on the time spin button of the time picker.
APP A
5 Click on the [OK] button.
APP B
The setting is completed and the calendar is closed.
1
3-81 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.19 Help
Help information on the operation of this equipment can be displayed.
For the details of installation of Help, refer to “19.7 Updating Help data”.

Memo
The Preface, Section 1 and Appendix A are not displayed in the Help.

6 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

7 Click on the [Help] button on the menu.

The [Help] dialog box appears.

[2] [5] [6] [8)]

[1]
[3]

[7]

[4]

[1] Backward button

The display of the content display pane goes backwards by one.

[2] Forward button

The display of the content display pane goes forwards by one.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-82

 1
[3] [Contents] tab
Displays the contents. The contents are displayed in the content pane.
2
For the usage method, refer to “Searching the required information from the 3
contents”.
[4] Content pane 4
The contents are displayed in tree format. When an item is clicked on, the related
5
contents are displayed in the content display pane.
6
[5] Home button
7
Displays the home screen of the [Help] dialog box.
8
[6] [Search] tab
9
Searches the character string in Help.
For the procedure, refer to "Searching terminologies". 10
11
[7] Content display pane
Displays the contents of the item that was clicked on. 12
13
[8] [×] button.
Closes the [Help] dialog box. 14
15
Searching the required information from the contents
16
1 Click on the [Contents] tab.
The contents are displayed on the contents pane. 17
2 Click on the item containing the required information. 18
The contents of the item that was clicked on are displayed on the contents display pane.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-83 Section 3 Basic Operations
Searching terminologies

1 Click on the [Search] tab.

A search character input box is displayed.

2 Enter a required terminology and click on the [Search] button.

Search is performed within Help. When the applicable terminology is hit, the item containing the
terminology is displayed on the contents pane.

3 Click on the item containing the required information.

The contents of the item that is clicked on are displayed on the contents display pane.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-84

 1
3.20 Password Input 2
Equipment settings are protected by a password. To open the dialog box of the protected setting
function, the password input is necessary.
3
Use the following procedure to enter a password. 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
The menu is displayed.
14
2 Change over to the second page of the menu using the page switching button of the 15
menu.
16
3 Click on the [Code Input] button on the Menu.
17
18
19
20
The password input dialog box appears.
21
4 Enter "0" (zero) and click on the [Enter] key.
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-85 Section 3 Basic Operations
 5 Display the menu by clicking again the [Menu] button on the left toolbar, and change
over to the second page using the page switching button.
The [Service] button is displayed in the menu.

6 Click on the [Service] button.

Check that service-related menus are displayed in the sub-menu.

Subsequently, service-related menus can be set.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-86

 1
3.21 Managing Files with File Manager 2
The file manager function enables the copying of route files and user map from the hard disk of this
equipment to external storage media such as DVD or from external storage media to the hard disk of
3
this equipment. 4
5
3.21.1 Displaying the [File Manager] dialog box 6
1 Click on the [Menu] on the left toolbar. 7
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Tools] - [File Manager] button on the menu.

8
The [File Manager] dialog box appears. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-87 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.21.2 File management
The [File Management] tab enables file management.
File management copies files between SSD of this equipment and external storage media and deletes
files.
This section describes file management by using the example copying a file in the file list of the drive
that is specified in the [Drive] list on the left hand side of the dialog box to the drive that is specified in
the [Drive] list on the right hand side.

1 Click on the [File Management] tab.

2 Select the drive that contains the file to be copied from the [Drive] combo box.
Files in the drive are displayed in the list.

[Drive] combo box

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-88

 1
The following file types can be displayed by the file manager.

No. File type File extension Contents

2
1 Route File rtm Route 3
2 User Chart uchm User chart
3 Target Track ttr Track of other ship [including the 4
GPS buoy)
4 Screen Shot (AUTO) png Automatically generated screen shot
5
5 Screen Shot (User) png Manually created screen shot 6
6 Preferences ini Personal setting
7 Voyage Log pbl, index, pbo, rot, pbt Playback data 7
8 Logbook lgb, lgblst Logbook (for up to 3 months)
8
3 Select the files to be copied by checking them. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-89 Section 3 Basic Operations
 4 Select a drive of the storage destination from the [Drive] combo box and select a copy
location from the folder tree that is displayed.

[Drive] combo box

5 Click on the [Copy>>] (copy to the right) button.

The files are copied.

When the drive of the copy source and the drive of the copy destination are reversed, click on
the [<<Copy] (copy to the left) in Step 5.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-90

 1
Deleting a file
2
1 Click on the [Delete] button.
A deletion confirmation dialog is displayed. 3
2 To delete the file, click on the [OK] button. 4
5
3.21.3 Loading and saving files
6
The [File Load/Save] tab enables loading and saving files.
7
3.21.3.1 Loading files 8
3 Click on the [File Load/Save] tab. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
［Name］（file name）
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-91 Section 3 Basic Operations
 4 Check [Display] of the file to be loaded.

Memo
Only one file can be selected each time.

[Modified] (last modified date) Temporarily displays the Track of the line that was
[Display] (column check box) checked.
Each title is sorted in the ascending/descending When the line is unchecked, the line is hidden.
order whenever the button is clicked on.

5 Select the file loading mode from the [Load Mode] combo box.

One of the following modes

is displayed.
• [Overwrite]
• [Add]
6 Click on the [Load] button.

A confirmation dialog box appears.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-92

 1
7 Click on the [OK] button.
2
3
4
5
6
The selected file is loaded. 7
8
3.21.3.2 Saving files
9
8 Click on the [File Load/Save] tab.

9 Select a file type from the [File type] combo box.

10
10 Click on the [Save Current Target Track] button.
11
12
Memo
The name of the Save Current Target Track button varies according to the file type. 13
14
15
16
17
18
［Save Current Target Track］（save button）
19
20
A confirmation dialog box appears

11 Enter a name under which the file is saved in the input box and click on the [OK]
21
button. 22
23
24
25
APP A

The Target Track that is stored is saved. APP B

1
3-93 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.21.3.3 Deleting data
1 Click on the [File Load/Save] tab.

2 Select a file type from the [File type] combo box.

3 Click on the [Delete Current Target Track] button.

Memo
The name of the Delete Current Target Track button varies according to the file type.

［Delete Current Target Track］（delete button）

A confirmation dialog box appears.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

The Target Track data that is stored is deleted.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-94

 1
3.22 Returning to a Task Menu by Ending 2
the Operation 3
1 Click on the [MENU] on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
2 Change over to the second page of the menu using the page switching button of the
menu. 14
3 Click on the [Code Input] button on the menu. 15
16
17
18
The password input dialog box appears.
19
4 Enter 9999 and click on the [Enter] key.
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-95 Section 3 Basic Operations
 Returns to the task menu.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-96

 1
3.23 Terminating this equipment 2
3
4
5
When turning off the power supply, do not hold down the power button of the
Processing unit. Otherwise, the equipment is not terminated normally, possibly
6
causing a failure.
7
8
1 Press the power supply button on the Processing unit.
The power is turned off and the light of power supply button goes off.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
3-97 Section 3 Basic Operations
3.24 Using a DVD Drive

Do not leave the disc in the DVD drive.

Malfunctions of the drives may result.

The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) is equipped with a DVD drive.

DVD drive:
Use to read a DVD/CD-ROM.

Note
Do not remove a DVD disk while the access lamp of the DVD drive is lit.

Section 3 Basic Operations 3-98

 1
Section 4 Range and Bearing 2
Measurement Methods 3
Please refer to the following instruction manual.
4
Instruction Manual Reference Section 5
JAN-7201/9201 Section4
Instruction Manual ＜Basic Operation＞ Range and Bearing Measurement Methods 6
JAN-7201S/9201S Section4
7
Instruction Manual ＜Basic Operation＞ Range and Bearing Measurement Methods
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
4-1 Section 4 Range and Bearing Measurement Methods
Section 4 Range and Bearing Measurement Methods 4-2
 1
Section 5 Target Tracking and TT/AIS 2
Please refer to the following instruction manual. 3
Instruction Manual Reference Section 4
JAN-7201/9201 Section5
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Target Tracking and TT/AIS 5
JAN-7201S/9201S Section5
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Target Tracking and TT/AIS
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

5-1 Section 5 Operation of Target Tracking and TT/AIS

Section 5 Operation of Target Tracking and TT/AIS 5-2
 1
Section 6 Functions of the Route 2
Planning System 3
4
6.1 General Flowchart
5
A general flowchart of sailing using the Route Planning System is shown.
6
7
Start Route Planning System
(Power On)
Task menu Click on [Route
Planning Route 7
Select Route Planning System from Monitoring (ECDIS)].
the Task menu 9
10
11
Route Planning System screen
12
display
13
Adjustments 14
• Screen brightness
• Brightness of the operation unit
• Sound volume etc.
15
16
Is route planning,
17
user map preparation and
chart import/update Required
18
19
required?
Not Required

20
• Select [Route] Route Planning Refer to the following sections:
• Select [To WPT] • Table editing • Section 7 Route Planning
• Section 12 Creating a User Map/
21
• Graphical editing
Updating a Chart
Route monitoring User chart editing • 11.14 Maintaining a Chart 22
• Alert monitoring (Arrival,
Route, etc.)
Chart Maintenance
23
• Import/update
Refer to "6.1.1
24
Work Flowchart
While Sailing".
25
26
End route monitoring
27
Shut down the Route Planning System (power off)

6-1 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.1.1 Work Flowchart While Sailing
Sailing start

Display the "Route

Monitoring" dialog box Click [Route Monitoring] on the menu.

Select [Route]

Select the route to be used. (Initially, UNLOAD is being displayed.)

Select a waypoint Select a waypoint from [To WPT].

Navigate own ship along the route.
Move own ship to the
waypoint

Own ship's symbol

To WPT

Route monitoring When the ship arrives at the WPT, an "Arrived at

("Arrived at WPT" alert is WPT" alert is activated and the next WPT is
activated when arrived at updated.
the WPT.)
After confirming the alert, click on the [ALERT
ACK] (alert acknowledgment) button and stop
the alert.

Select [UNLOAD] from

[Route] and finish route
monitoring.

End of sailing

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-2

 1
6.2 Starting and Preparing the Route 2
Planning System 3
6.2.1 Powering on and starting 4
The ECDIS is powered on according to the following procedure.
5
6
7
Do not leave the disc in the DVD drive. 7
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
9
For low-temperature start-up, perform pre-heat for more than 30 10
minutes.
11
Otherwise, an operation failure may occur and an accident may occur.
12
1 Press the Power ON button on the Processing unit. 13
The Power button illuminates. After a while, the Task menu is displayed.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-3 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.2.2 Starting the Route Planning System
6.2.2.1 Starting the Route Planning System from the Task Menu
When the Route Planning System is started, the Task menu appears on the screen.
Start the Route Planning System from the Task Menu.

1 Click on the [Route Planning Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] button on the Task menu.

The Route Planning System screen is displayed.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-4

 1
6.2.2.2 Starting Route Planning System from a non-Route Planning
System task screen 2
3
Note 4
In case of JAN-5203, there is not task switching buttons of [RADAR], [ECDIS], [CON] and
[AMS] by function restriction.
5
6
7
7
Route Planning System
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-5 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.2.3 Entering an ARCS PIN Number (ARCS Only)
When ARCS charts have been imported, the ARCS PIN code input dialog box appears when the Route
Planning System is started.
Since ARCS is restricted by the ARCS PIN number, ARCS is not displayed unless the correct ARCS
PIN number is input.
To use ARCS charts, be sure to perform the following operation.

1 Input a PIN number in [ARCS PIN] of the [ARCS PIN] dialog box

2 Click on the [OK] button.

When the [X] button is clicked on, Route Planning System starts without displaying ARCS.

Note
ARCS is not displayed when the contract has expired even if the correct ARCS PIN number is
input.

Memo
It is necessary to enter an ARCS PIN code only when the Route Planning System screen will be
displayed for the first time.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-6

 1
6.3 Moving the Chart 2
Charts can be moved by the following methods.
• Moving by the [Home] button
3
• Moving by the cross-hair cursor 4
• Moving by the hand cursor
• Switching display from the [My Port List] dialog box 5
• Displaying by entering a position
6
7
6.3.1 Moving the chart with the [HOME] button
7
Display can be moved to a position where the heading direction of own ship can be observed in a
panoramic view. Use this feature if own ship is lost from charts. 9
10
1 Click on the [Home] button in Chart Information Area.
11
12
13
Display moves to a position
14
where the heading direction of
own ship can be observed in a
15
panoramic view.
Own ship
16
symbol
17
Screen Display of Home Position
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-7 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.3.2 Moving the chart with the cross-hair cursor
When the cross-hair cursor is moved to an arbitrary position on the chart and then clicked, the chart
can be moved. The chart moving position varies with the setting of the motion mode.
For information about the motion mode, refer to "6.6 Selecting Motion/Bearing Mode".

[When the motion mode is set to true motion]

The position of the cross-hair cursor becomes the center of the screen.

Cross-hair cursor intersecting point Moving to the Center of the Screen

[When the motion mode is set to relative motion]

The position of the cross-hair cursor becomes own ship's display position.

Moving the position of own ship’s display

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-8

 1
6.3.3 Moving the chart with the hand cursor
2
The chart can be moved by grabbing it with the hand cursor.
3
1 Move the cursor to the position where you want to grab the chart. 4
2 When the trackball is turned while the button is pressed, the cursor changes to a hand 5
cursor and the chart moves.
6
7
7
Hand cursor
9
10
11
Memo
If own ship sails outside of the screen, the motion mode will automatically be set to Free (free
12
motion). 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-9 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.3.4 Switching a chart to be displayed by "My Port
List"
If port names are registered in My Port List in the [My Port List] dialog box, chart display can be
switched to the one having the latitude and longitude of a registered port at the center of the chart.

3 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

4 Click on [Chart] - [My Port List] on the menu.

The [My Port List] dialog box appears.

Port list

[Jump] button

For how to register and delete ports, refer to "6.7 Registering and Displaying My Port List".

5 Click on a port in the list to select it.

6 Click on the [Jump] button.

The chart is displayed having the latitude and longitude of the selected port at the center of the
chart.

Example: Location registered as a

port

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-10

 1
6.3.5 Displaying the chart by entering the position
2
By entering a position, the chart of a desired position can be displayed.
3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 4
The menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on [Chart] - [Off Center by Entering Position] on the menu.
The [Off Center by Entering Position] dialog box appears. 6
7
7
[Jump to the following position]
button
9
Latitude and longitude input
boxes
10
11
The latitude and longitude of the center of the current screen is displayed in the latitude and 12
longitude input boxes.
13
3 Click the latitude and longitude input boxes. 14
4 Enter the latitude and longitude of the chart you want to display with the software 15
keyboard.
16
Memo 17
The maximum latitude input range is 85 ° 00.000 (polar range restriction).
18
19
5 Click on the [Jump to the Following Position] button. 20
The chart is displayed having the entered latitude and longitude at the center of the chart.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-11 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.4 Zooming In/Out the Chart
The chart can be enlarged and reduced by the following methods.

Item Related sections

Enlarging a selected area
Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM
IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key on the operation unit
(S-57/C-MAP only)
Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider
(S-57/C-MAP only)
Enlarging/reducing with the Large/Small
buttons (RNC only)
6.4.1 Enlarging a Selected Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
6.4.2.1 Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM
IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key on the trackball operation unit
6.4.2.2 Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider
(S-57/C-MAP only)
6.4.2.3 Enlarging/reducing with the [Large]/[Small]
buttons (RNC only)

6.4.1 Enlarging a Selected Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)

A selected area can be enlarged to the full chart screen size.

1 Click on the [Zoom Area] button.

[Zoom Area] button

The cross-hair cursor changes to a zoom cursor.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-12

 1
2 Using the trackball, move the cursor to "A" located at the upper left of the range you 2
want to enlarge, and then click.
3
3 Using the trackball, move the cursor to "B" located at the lower right of the range you
want to enlarge, and then click. 4
The enlarging range is enclosed with a rubber band and then that range is enlarged to the full
screen size. 5
Once enlarged, the zoom cursor changes back to the cross-hair cursor.
6
7
7
9
10
Selected area
11
12
13
Memo
Switching charts 14
• Generally, multiple charts with different scales are provided for the same area; charts having
matching scale values are selected/displayed by enlargement or reduction.
15
• When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and the original scale 16
is beyond this range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
• This equipment is equipped with a world map background chart as the reference chart and the 17
chart is always displayed in background.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-13 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.4.2 Enlarging/reducing a chart with the Zoom
function
6.4.2.1 Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key on
the trackball operation unit (S-57/C-MAP only)
Note
This operation is not available in JAN-5203.

1 Each time the [ZOOM IN] key is pressed, the chart is enlarged according to the range
or scale that has been set up.
Each time the [ZOOM OUT] key is pressed, the chart is reduced according to the range
or scale that has been set up.

[ZOOM IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key

For the details of switching between range and scale, refer to "6.4.3 Switching between scale
and range (S-57/C-MAP only)".

6.4.2.2 Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider (S-57/C-MAP only)

1 When the slider handle is clicked upward, display is enlarged. When it is clicked
downward, display is reduced.
Each time the [In] (zoom in) button is clicked on, the chart is enlarged according to the
range or scale that has been set up.
Each time the [Out] (zoom out) button is clicked on, the chart is reduced according to
the range or scale that has been set up.

[In] button

Slider

[Out] button

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-14

 1
For more information about switching between range and scale, refer to "6.4.3 Switching
between scale and range (S-57/C-MAP only)". 2
Memo
3
Over Scale parmanentIndication 4
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale activated if the displayed chart is more
than double in size than the original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure below will be 5
displayed on the "chart" to notify lower chart accuracy and clarity. The vertical lines will not be
displayed if the size has been made larger (double or more) through proper operation.
6
An “Over Scale” parmanentIndication is displayed in the alert display area. 7
7
9
10
11
Notification line at Over Scale 12
Case in which an Over Scale parmanentIndication is not displayed (1) 13
When a single cell is displayed in full screen with the scale exceeding double the compilation scale, the
Over Scale warning line is not displayed. However, an “Over Scale” parmanentIndication is displayed. 14
15
When the display area comprises a single
16
Compilation Scale
GB4X0000＝1/52,000、M_CSCL＝1/45,000
GB5Xnnnn＝1/25,000
compilation scale, AP (OVSC01) drawing is
not performed.
GB4X0000 17
18
M_CSCL
（A)

Display example of the display area 19

(within the screen frame)
GB5X01NW GB5X01NE
20
（A)

GB5X01SW
（B)
Display scale
1/10,000
21
GB5X01SE
GB5X
22
23
02SE （B)
Display scale
1/10,000

24
25
26
27

6-15 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

Case in which an Over Scale parmanentIndication is not displayed (2)
When multiple cells exist within the screen frame in the scale exceeding double the compilation scale,
an Over Scale warning line is not displayed in cells other than the cell of the minimum scale.
However, warning display is performed and an “Over Scale” parmanentIndication is displayed.

Compilation Scale
GB4X0000＝1/52,000、M_CSCL＝1/45,000 When the display area comprises multiple
GB5Xnnnn＝1/25,000 compilation scales, the scales other than the
minimum scale are not used for AP
GB4X0000
(OVSC01) drawing.
M_CSCL

Display example of the display area

（A)
(within the screen frame)

GB5X01NW GB5X01NE
（A)
Display scale
1/10,000
GB5X01SW
（B)
GB5X01SE
GB5X
（B)
02SE
Display scale
1/10,000

6.4.2.3 Enlarging/reducing with the [Large]/[Small] buttons (RNC

only)
1 Each time the [Large] button is clicked on, the chart is enlarged by one scale level
(larger scale charts).
Each time the [Small] button is clicked on, the chart is reduced by one scale level
(smaller scale charts).

[Large] button

[Small] button

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-16

 1
6.4.3 Switching between scale and range
2
(S-57/C-MAP only)
3
The current scale or range is displayed on the Scale/Range button in Chart Information Area.
4
5
Scale Display Range Display
6
7
The settings of scale and range as well as their switching method are as follows.
7
1 Click on the Scale/Range button. 9
The scale and range settings menu appears.
10
Scale/Range button 11
12
Scale values
Range values
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2 Select a scale or range value from the menu.
21
The chart is displayed having the selected scale or range. 22
Memo 23
For range display, the half of the screen width becomes the specified range when displayed.
For a multi screen (refer to “6.10 Multi View Display and Wide Range View Window Display of 24
Charts”), the half the display screen View1/View2 becomes the specified range when displayed.
25
26
27

6-17 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.5 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display in the chart is subdivided
into three object groups; Base (Base display), STD (Standard Display), and All (All display). You can
change the object category using the display panel.

Base (Base Display)

A group of important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts (coastline and safety contour lines)

STD (Standard: Standard display)

A group of objects less important than base display (fixed and floating objects for monitoring)

All (All display)

All objects

Custom (Custom)
Refer to "6.5.2 Customizing object display"

Memo
About display in the chart
Display in the chart can be considered as the composite of various layers. For example, STD
(Standard: Standard display) is the composite of object layers for Base (Base display) and
object layers for STD (Standard: Standard display).
In addition to the object layers of the S-57/C-MAP charts themselves, own ship, user charts,
event marks, EBL/VRM, radar images, etc. can be combined and then displayed.

You will see all layers being selected.

Event marks, etc.

Layer

Layer Objects of "All (All display)"

Layer Objects of "STD (Standard: Standard display)"

Layer Objects of "Base (Base standard)"

Note
The initial chart screen status is "STD (Standard: Standard display)". For safe sailing, use the
"STD (Standard: Standard display)" or "All (All display)", not the "Base (Base display)".

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-18

 1
6.5.1 Switching object display
2
1 Click on one of the buttons of the Chart Information Area display category.
3
4
5
Information displayed on the chart changes.
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
"Base (Base display)" Example 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
"STD (Standard: Standard display)" Example 22
23
24
25
26
27

6-19 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

 "All (All display)" Example

Note
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart can be displayed.

6.5.2 Customizing object display

When the [Custom] button of the Chart Information Area is clicked on, the object corresponding to the
setting in the [Chart Display] dialog is displayed.
Any of the objects that are displayed on the [Chart Display] dialog can be set.

1 Click on the [Custom] menu display button.

[Custom] button

The display changes as follows.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-20

 1
2 Click on the [Chart display setting] button. 2
[Chart Diaplay] dialog is displayed.
The edit pane is divided into three dialogs. 3
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
4
5
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3 Set the object to be displayed. 16
For the setting of the [Chart Display] dialog, refer to "14.2.10 Setting up the display of Chart".
17
Memo
The [Chart Display] dialog can also be displayed by selecting [View] - [Options] - [Chart Diaplay] 18
on the menu.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-21 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.6 Selecting Motion/Bearing Mode
Using the Motion/Bearing Mode combo box in Chart Information Area, set up the motion mode and the
bearing mode on own ship's chart. The mode that can be selected varies with the chart type.

S-57/C-MAP Ed.3 Charts

Motion mode button Bearing mode button

[Selectable combinations in the motion mode and the bearing mode]

Bearing mode
N UP H UP C UP WPT UP
Motion mode
TM  ×  ×
RM    
Free  ×  ×

ARCS Charts

Motion mode button

*The bearing of the ARCS chart is fixed to N UP.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-22

 1
6.6.1 Setting motion mode
2
Set a motion mode with the Motion Mode combo box in Chart Information Area.
3
1 Click on the Motion Mode combo box.
4
2 Select a motion mode.
5
Setting item Description Display image
[TM] True Motion Mode
6
• Land and other fixed objects are fixed
Fixed 7
on the display and only own ship
moves on the display. When own ship Heading line 7
reaches the predetermined limit, the
chart is automatically shifted so that
Own ship 9
own ship always remains on the
10
screen.
[RM] Relative Motion Mode 11
• Own ship is fixed at the center of the
screen and the fixed objects such as
Moves
relatively 12
land move relatively. Heading line
13
Fixed on ship position
14
15
[Free] Free
• You can freely move the chart on the 16
Fixed
display regardless of the own ship’s
Heading line
17
direction. As the own ship goes, it
disappears from the screen.
Own ship
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-23 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

Mode change by the operation:
In the following cases, the motion/bearing mode will be automatically changed from the current mode
to another one.
• From [TM] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen by scrolling the chart..
- When an area outside of the own ship range was displayed by loading charts or clicking the
[Jump] button in the [My Port List] dialog box.
• From [RM] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen by scrolling the chart..
- When an area outside of the own ship range was displayed by loading charts or clicking the
[Jump] button in the [My Port List] dialog box.
• From [Free] mode to [TM] mode:
- When the [Home] button was clicked on,
the rotation in the Free mode is retained after changing to the TM mode.

Note
H UP, WPT UP, C UP are valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1:5,000,000.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-24

 1
6.6.2 Setting Bearing mode (S-57/C-MAP only)
2
Set a bearing mode with the Bearing Mode button in Chart Information Area.
3
1 Click on the Bearing Mode combo box.
4
2 Select a bearing mode.

Setting item Description Display image

5
[N UP] North up 6
• The chart is always displayed
towards true north. Fixed objects do 7
Heading line
not flicker and are easily identified on
the chart, and the true bearing of the
7
objects can readily be read out. Own ship
9
10
[H UP] Head up
The chart is displayed by orienting the 11
Heading line
ship's heading upward. Cannot be
selected under TM (true motion).
12
Own ship 13
14
[C UP] Course up 15
• At the setting of Course Up, the ship’s
heading (HDG) is fixed and displayed Heading line
16
immediately above the screen.
17
Own ship
18
19
[WPT UP] Way point up Target WPT
• The chart rotates automatically so 20
that the screen is always oriented
upward until the target WPT.
21
22
Heading line
Own ship 23
24
25
26
27

6-25 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

 Setting item Description Display image
[C UP Course UP by angle setting
(Angle • When this item is selected, the [C UP
Setting)] (Angle Setting)] dialog box appears. Heading line
The course angle that was set on the
dialog is displayed right above the
Own ship
chart and fixed.

- Input the angle of the ship’s heading

in the [Angle] input box of the [C UP
(Angle Setting)] dialog box.
- The angle can be input
(increase/decrease) by operating
the angle input slider.
- After completing the setting, click on
the [X] button.

Display changes according to the selected bearing mode.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-26

 1
6.7 Registering and Displaying My Port List 2
6.7.1 Registering to My Port List 3
You can register any position on the chart to the [My Port List] dialog box. After registration, you can
directly access to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
4
1 Set the location to be registered.
5
S-57/C-MAP
6
Since the center position and the display scale of the screen that is currently displayed are
registered in the port name list, move the location to be registered to the center of the screen in 7
advance.
To display another position, shift the chart area (refer to "6.3 Moving the Chart") or zoom in
7
to/out from the chart. (Refer to "6.4 Zooming In/Out the Chart".
9
ARCS
Since the center position and the display scale of the screen that is currently displayed are 10
registered in the port name list, move the location to be registered to the center of the screen in
advance. 11
To display another position, please refer to "6.9.1 Selecting charts from all".
12
2 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
13
3 Click [Chart] - [My Port List] on the menu. 14
The [My Port List] dialog box appears.
15
In the [My Port List] dialog, the Name, LAT (latitude), LON (longitude), and display Scale (scale)
of the port that is currently registered are displayed. 16
17
18
19
My port list
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-27 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

 4 Enter the registration name of the port in the [My Port List] (port name) input box.

5 Click on the [Save] button.

The coordinates (latitude and longitude) of the center of the chart display and the display scale
according to the registration name designated in the step 4 are registered in the list as the port.

6.7.2 Deleting a port

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click [Chart] - [My Port List] on the menu.

The [My Port List] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the port to be deleted from the My Port List.

The port is selected.

4 Click on the [Delete] button.

The selected port is deleted from the My Port List.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-28

 1
6.8 Selecting a S-57 chart 2
Because the chart of own ship's position is automatically called up after power on, generally route
monitoring can be performed instantly.
3
If you want to display charts other than the chart automatically called up, select a chart from those that 4
are displayed by selecting [Chart] - [Select S-57 Chart] on the menu.
5
For the details, refer to "11.2 Displaying/Searching an S-57 Chart [Select S-57 Chart]".
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-29 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.9 Selecting an ARCS chart
This section describes chart selection and the functions on the display, which are available on the
ARCS chart.

6.9.1 Selecting charts from all

You can select desired charts from all the charts stored in this system.

1 Click on the [Select] button in Chart Information Area.

Chart selection button

The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.

[OK] button

2 Select the desired chart in the list by clicking it and then click on the [OK] button.
The selected chart is displayed on the screen.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-30

 1
6.9.2 Changing active panels (ARCS only)
2
The active panel on the chart can be changed.
3
1 Right-click on the chart
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 On the Context menu, click on the [Change Active Panel]. 5
The selectable active panel painted in blue is displayed.
6
3 Click on in the blue panel. The corresponding chart is then displayed.
7
7
9
10
11
Blue square
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Selected chart
24
25
26
27

6-31 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.9.3 Changing a low resolution chart (ARCS only)
1 Right-click on the chart
The context menu is displayed.

2 On the Context menu, click on the [Load Low Resolution].

The low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-32

 1
6.9.4 Changing a high resolution chart (ARCS only)
2
1 Right-click on the chart
The context menu is displayed. 3
2 On the Context menu, click on the [High Resolution Area]. 4
The cursor changes to the zoom cursor and an orange frame appears on the chart.
5
3 Move the cursor to the area to be expanded (the frame moves together with the cursor)
and click the mouse button. 6
The high-resolution chart in the area within the frame is displayed on the screen.
7
Orange frame
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
High resolution chart

6-33 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.9.5 Displaying the note and diagram (ARCS only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.

1 Right-click on the chart

The context menu is displayed.

2 On the Context menu, click on the [Note and Diagram].

The [Note and Diagram] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the item you want to display. The note or diagram on the corresponding chart
is displayed.
Clicking the [X] buttons, the dialog box is closed and the chart display returns to the
original display position.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-34

 1
6.10 Multi View Display and Wide Range 2
View Window Display of Charts 3
The multi view display function divides the chart window into two windows and displays the same chart
4
or different charts separately in these two windows.
5
Note 6
ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 cannot display charts of other models simultaneously.
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Example of Multi Window Display (Top-Bottom)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Example of Multi Window Display (Picture in Picture) 26
27

6-35 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.10.1 Display of multi view
6.10.1.1 Displaying multi view
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Select [View] - [Multi View Mode] on the menu.

The [Multi View Mode] dialog box appears.

View
modes

3 Click on a multi view mode to select it.

The selected multi view mode takes effect.

View1

View2

Top-Bottom

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-36

 1
2
3
4
View1 View2 5
6
7
7
Right-Left
9
10
View2 11
12
13
View1
14
15
16
17
Picture in picture
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-37 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.10.1.2 Multi view operation procedure

[Operation When Manipulating Multi View]

• The same view is displayed in View1 and View2.
• Except for the items that can be set up separately in View2, View1 and View2 are displayed by
linking.
• Rubber bands during create or edit operation (such as Route Planning) can only be displayed in
active view.
• EBL/VRM and EBL maneuvers are shared between View1 and View2 and the same contents are
displayed (however, the contents may differ depending on the setting of the measurement
reference point).

Note
The bearing mode of View2 always operates by interlocking with the bearing mode of View1.

[Specifying an area to be displayed in View2]

In View1, you can specify an area you want to display in View2.

1 Click on the [Select Area from View1 for View2] button in the [Multi View Mode] dialog.

The button is displayed in reverse video.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-38

 1
2 Move the cursor to View1.
2
The cursor changes to the range selection cursor.
3
4
5
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
3 Drag the cursor and specify an area you want to display in View2.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-39 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

 4 Click on.

The specified range is displayed in View2.

The [Select Area from View1 for View2] button is displayed in normal video.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-40

 1
[Selecting a View]
Various operations can be performed in the selected view. 2
1 Click on the view you want to make active. 3
4
5
6
7
7
9
10
11
The clicked view becomes the active view.
Which view is active can be checked in active information display.
12
13
When View1 is active
14
When View2 is active
15
16
17
18
19
Active information display area 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-41 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

[Moving the Boundary Line of View]
When the view mode is either Top-Bottom or Right-Left, the boundary line of view can be moved.

1 To move the boundary line of view, click on the boundary line.

2 When the cursor changes to the arrow shape shown below, move the boundary by
dragging the cursor to the arrow directions.

[Moving View2]
When the view mode is Picture in picture, the position of View2 can be moved.

1 Click on the title bar of View2

2 When the cursor changes to the arrow shape shown below, move View2 by dragging
the cursor to the arrow directions.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-42

 1
6.11 Verifying Object Information (Pick 2
Report Function) 3
Each of the objects on the chart has its own attributes (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land and
river).
4
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, attributes such as lighting color and frequency can be read 5
out. If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out.
6
Attribute information of these objects can be read and verified by using the pick report function.
The pick report displays the following information.
7
• S-57 chart
7
• C-MAP chart
• ARCS chart 9
• AIO
• Manual update 10
11
6.11.1 Pick Report of the S-57 chart 12
6.11.1.1 Displaying a Pick Report of the S-57 chart 13
1 Click the right button on the chart. 14
15
16
17
18
19
A pick mark and the context menu are displayed. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-43 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

 2 Click on [Cursor Pick] on the context menu.

[Pick Report] dialog box appears.

Display switching

Display switching tab

This tab switches the information that is displayed. When the [Object] (Object Information) tab is
clicked on, object information is displayed. When the [Chart Legend] tab is clicked on, chart information
is displayed. When the [Update Log] tab is clicked on, chart update history is displayed.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-44

 1
6.11.1.2 Verifying Object Information
When the [Object] tab on the display switching tab is clicked on, object information is displayed. 2
3
4
5
6
Object List area
7
7
9
［Display administrative information］

10
Object information area
11
12
13
14
Object list area
15
The object within the pick cursor and its geometry are displayed in the object information area.
When an object is selected in the object list area, the selected object is displayed on the map in 16
highlight mode in the case of the S-57 chart.
17
[Display administrative information]
When this item is selected, the attributes of the administrative information and the contents are
18
displayed. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-45 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

Object information area
Information (attributes) of the object that was selected from the object list is displayed.

[Attribute] [Value] (Attribute value)

(Attribute name)
Additional information file

[Attribute]
[Value] (Attribute value)
(Attribute name)

[View Table] button

Displaying an additional information file

The additional information file on the object that was selected from the object list is displayed in [Value]
in hyperlink format.
Additional information files include text files (extension.TXT) and image files (extension.TIF).

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-46

 1
When Hyperlink is clicked on, the additional information file is displayed in a separate dialog box.
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
9
10
[View Table] button
When the [View Table] button of [Value] is clicked on, the data is displayed in a separate dialog box in
11
the format that is specified as the attribute.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tidal stream - panel values Tide - value of harmonic constituents 26
27

6-47 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

Accuracy information and symbol addition information of an object
When the [Other INFO] tab is clicked on, the accuracy information and symbol addition information of
the object are displayed in the object information area.

［Other INFO］ tab

［Information］ combo box

Each information item can be selected and displayed by using the [Information] combo box.

Coordinate display of an Unknown object

When an Unknown object is selected from the object selection list on the pick report screen, a text box
is displayed indicating the coordinate of one representative point of Unknown objects.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-48

 1
Pick report collection object display
The collection object that is linked to the object that is selected from Picked objects is displayed. 2
Three collection object types are available： Aggregation, Association, and Stacked on/Stacked under.
3
When the [Collection] button is clicked on, a Collection objects list is displayed.
When [Back] button is clicked on after the list is displayed, the Picked Object list is displayed. 4
5
6
7
7
9
［Collection］ button 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Collection objects list area
19
20
［Back］ button 21
22
23
24
25
When there are no collection objects linked to the selected object, the Collection button is displayed as
26
Disabled. 27

6-49 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.11.1.3 Verifying Chart Information
When the [Chart Legend] tab of the display switching tab is clicked on, chart information is displayed.

［Name］ (Chart name)

[Name] (Chart name)

When there are multiple charts on the selected chart position and a chart is selected from the list, the
information about the chart is displayed. When [All] is selected from the list, information about all the
charts is displayed.

Display of Zone Of Confidence

If Data Quality Indicator of the chart information is depth data, hyper link selection is displayed on the
list. If hyper link is selected, the Zone of Confidence dialog is displayed.

[Zone Of Confidence] hyper link

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-50

 1
6.11.1.4 Verifying Chart Update History
When the [Update Log] tab of the display switching tab is clicked on, chart update history is displayed. 2
3
4
5
6
7
Separator of chart update
7
history
9
10
11
12
13
14
If the chart update history consists of multiple pages and cannot be displayed on one page of the
screen, drag the scroll bar to display the rest.
15
16
17
18
19
20
Scroll bar
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-51 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.11.2 Pick report of the C-MAP chart
For C-MAP, T & P can be selected instead of AIO with the Object Groups filter on the Object tab.
The following contents are displayed from the [Update Log] (chart update history) tab.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-52

 1
6.11.3 Pick report of the ARCS chart
2
The display method is the same as that of S-57.
In the case of ARCS, only the chart information area is displayed. 3
4
5
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-53 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.12 Marking the Position of Own Ship with
an Event Mark
While sailing, you can mark the position of own ship on the chart with an event mark.

1 Click on the [Event] button in Chart Information Area.

An event mark is marked to the position of own ship and the [Property] dialog box of event
marks appears.

Event mark

The display position, ID, and date and time of creation of the event mark are displayed in the
[Property] dialog box.
Enter any desired comment in the [Comment] input box.

[Deleting the Event Mark]

The event mark can be deleted by either of the following methods.
• Right-click on the event mark and click on [Delete this object] on the Context menu that appears.
• Click on the event mark when in the Delete mode.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-54

 1
6.13 Displaying Radar Images on a Chart 2
by Overlaying (Option) 3
Note
4
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction.
5
6
Radar images can be displayed by overlaying on the chart. 7
Note 7
• To perform overlay display of radar images, the radar function must be installed and radar
images must be received from the radar system.
9
*The radar function is installed as standard on the ECDIS. It is an optional function for machines
10
dedicated to the ECDIS.
• If the radar system displays a short-range image and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the 11
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
• While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 11 steps 12
(0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/12/24/48/96 NM).
13
• In the case of ARCS charts, the display range varies with the chart to be displayed. If a range
over 120 NM is selected, radar image display automatically turns off. 14
• The screen display color will automatically change to [Day3] when RADAR Overlay is turned
on. (When the screen display color is Dusk/Night, automatic switching does not occur.) 15
• When Multi-view is used, images cannot be displayed on View2.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-55 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.13.1 Turning On/Off overlay display
Note
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Select [View] - [Options] - [RADAR] on the menu.

3 Select [RADAR Overlay].

Radar overlay display is set to On.

4 Select a radar system to be used from the pull-down menu.

Memo
• When multiple radar systems are available, click the [RADAR Overlay] combo box and then
select the radar image to be used from the pull-down menu that appears. (Radar images can
be selected from the maximum of 8 systems, [RADAR1] to [RADAR8].)
• Even if the connection between this equipment and the radar system is not set or the
connection setting is cancelled, reconnection is set automatically. As a result, the overlay
display of the radar image is continued.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-56

 1
[Transparency Setting of Echo/Trails]
Transparency can be set up by clicking the [Transparency of Echo/Trails] slider handle to right and left. 2
3
4
5
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Opacity Transparency
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-57 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.13.2 Turning On/Off range ring display
Note
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Select [View] - [Options] - [Tools] on the menu.

3 To show range rings, select [Range Rings].

To hide range rings, clear it.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-58

 1
6.13.3 Turning On/Off bearing scale
2
Note 3
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction.
4
5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 6
The menu is displayed.
7
2 Select [View] - [Options] - [Tools] on the menu.
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
3 To show a bearing scale, check [Bearing Scale].
To hide a bearing scale, clear it.
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-59 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.13.4 Radar image adjustment
Note
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction.

Radar images can be adjusted using the [RAIN], [SEA] and [GAIN] dials on the keyboard operation
unit.

[RAIN] dial: Suppressing rain and snow clutter

The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial to the right
enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images of rain and snow. Take care not to
over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces sea clutter. So,
using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial turned as far as
possible to the left.

[SEA] dial: Suppressing sea clutter

The [SEA] dial lowers the gain at a short range to reduce sea clutter. Turning the [SEA] dial to the right
increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter. Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you
may miss small targets like buoys and small boats.

[GAIN] dial: Adjusting sensitivity

The [GAIN] dial adjusts the gain of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right increases the gain
and widens the range in which RADAR echo can be observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view at a short range or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the gain making targets easier to view. Take care not to over-adjust this dial.
Otherwise, you may miss small targets.

Memo
If the keyboard operation unit is not available, the radar image can be adjusted using [Rain], [Sea]
or [Gain] slider in the setting dialog of [Settings]- [Signal Process (Basic)] on the menu.
The [Signal Process (Basic)] setting dialog can also be displayed by operating the [RAIN], [SEA],
or [GAIN] dials on the keyboard operation unit.
When one of the dials is held down (for 2 seconds or more) at operation termination, the setting
dialog is closed.
For the details of the [Signal Process(Basic)] setting dialog, refer to "16.2 Basic setting of radar
signal processing".

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-60

 1
6.14 Setting a true bearing 2
When a gyro signal is input by using GYRO I/F, sometimes the true bearing value indicated by the
3
master gyro and the true bearing value indicated by this equipment do not match. 4
In this case, set the true bearing value of this equipment to the value of the master gyro by using the
following procedure. 5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 6
The menu is displayed.
7
2 Click on [Settings] - [General] on the menu.
The [General] dialog is displayed. 7
3 Click on the [Gyro Setting] input box. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
4 Enter the master gyro value through the software keyboard.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-61 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

6.15 Setting an own ship’s speed
6.15.1 Switching an own ship’s speed sensor
1 Click on the STW Source combo box of the own ship’s information

2 Select a sensor source in the [STW] combo box. Any of the following sensor sources
can be selected.
MAN
Logx ("x" indicates the equipment number)
When [Menu] is selected, the [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog is displayed.
When [MAN] (Manual) is selected, a speed through water can be input in the [Sensor
Selection/Status] dialog.

• When using 1-axis log, heading speed component can be detected, but transverse
speed component cannot be detected. Then leeway effect (component drifted by
wind) cannot be detected.

• When using 2-axes log, its accuracy in shallow waters may be deteriorated, and its
speed in deep sea areas may be unable to be detected.

• When using a GPS, COG accuracy is less than ±3° at speed: from 1kn to 17kn, and
is less than ±1° at speed: more than 17kn.

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-62

 1
6.15.2 Entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed
2
manually
3
When the device (example: LOG) that is connected to this equipment fails to function, the target
tracking device and true motion display can be used by entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed 4
manually by using the following procedure.
5
1 Select [Menu] from the corresponding combo box.
6
7
7
9
10
11
12
The [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog box appears. 13
2 To enter the ship’s heading manually, select [Manual] from the [Heading] combo box. 14
To enter the ship’s own speed manually, select [Manual] from the [STW] combo box.
15
3 Click on the input combo box.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
4 Enter numeric values through the software keyboard.
24
25
26
27

6-63 Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System

Section 6 Functions of the Route Planning System 6-64
 1
Section 7 Route Planning 2
3
4
5
Edit the navigation route according to the world geodetic system (WGS-84). 6
If you use the navigation route edited by a geodetic system other than the world
geodetic system, an accident may occur.
7
8
The Route Planning function creates and edits a route of a ship in advance. A route comprises WPTs
(waypoints) from the starting point to the arrival point and the straight lines (legs) that connect the
7
WPTs. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Route Planning Example
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-1 Section 7 Route Planning

7.1 Overview of the Route Planning
Function
Table editing function
This function enables creation of a route in table format by using the [Route Planning] dialog box.
A route is created by entering each WPT into the WPT list.
For the details of route planning with table editing, refer to "7.6 Planning a Route by Using Table
Editing".

Graphic editing function

This function enables creating a route on a chart.
A route plan is created by adding a WPT on a chart.
For the details of route planning with graphic editing, refer to "7.7 Planning a New Route by Graphic
Editing".

Route planning safety checking function

This function checks the safety of the planned route.
For the details, refer to "7.9.1 Checking a route based on the safety standards".

Route planning limit checking function

This function checks whether the planned route does not violate the pre-defined limit.
For the details, refer to "7.9.2 Checking a route based on the limits".

Navigation calculating function

This function supports the calculation of distance and bearing that are required for navigation.
For the details, refer to "7.10 Navigation Calculation Function".

Import/Export function
This function imports/exports a route file.
For the details, refer to "7.11 Importing/Exporting a Route File".

Note
• When a route is created exceeding the limit value, an error message is displayed and Route
planning operation stops.
• If the distance between WPTs exceeds 150° in longitude, the route cannot be created.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-2

 1
7.2 Setting Route Display 2
Before creating a route, set route display (display/hide of the route information to be displayed on the
3
screen) at route setting.
4
Arrival radius 5
Arrival circle
6
Port side (red
line) and width 7
of port side
8
Leg
7
10
11
12
WPT: Waypoint Ship's speed Starboard side (green
and distance line) and width of 13
starboard side
14
Use the following two dialogs for the setting. 15
16
7.2.1 Setting [Route] after selecting [View] - [Options] 17
on the menu
18
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
19
2 Click on the [View] - [Options] - [Route] on the menu. 20
The "Route" setting screen is displayed.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-3 Section 7 Route Planning

 (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

[1] [Show ETA]

By selecting the [ETA] check box, the display of the ETA (estimated time of arrival to WPT) becomes
effective at route monitoring.
When [UTC] from [Format] is clicked, UTC is displayed and when [LMT] is clicked, LMT is displayed.

Not selecting the [ETA] check box

Selecting the [Show ETA] check box, and clicking [UTC] as the arrival time display format

Selecting the [Show ETA] check box, and clicking [LMT] as the arrival time display format

Section 7 Route Planning 7-4

 1
[2] [XTD Limit Line]
When this item is selected, a cross track limit line is displayed. 2
When this item is selected, the line color can be set.
When [IALA-A] is clicked on, the starboard side is displayed in green and the port side is displayed in
3
red. 4
When [IALA-B] is clicked on, the starboard side is displayed in red and the port side is displayed in
green. 5
[3] [Show WPT Name] (Show comment)
6
When this item is selected, a comment is displayed near the WPT. 7
When this item is selected, the character size of the comment can be set.
When [Standard] is clicked on, the comment is displayed in the standard character size. 8
When [Small] is clicked on, the comment is displayed in the character size smaller than the standard
size.
7
10
[4] [Alternate Route] (Change Color)
When [Blue] is clicked on, the route is displayed in blue. 11
When [Orange] is clicked on, the route is displayed in orange.
12
7.2.2 Setting [Settings] - [Route] on the menu 13
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 14
The menu is displayed.
15
2 Click on the [Settings] - [Route] on the menu.
The [Route] dialog is displayed. 16
17
18
19
[1]
20
21
[2]
22
23
[3]
24
[4]

[5]
25
26
[1] [Default] (Factory settings) 27
Set factory settings of the route display that is created at route planning.
[XTD(PORT)]:

7-5 Section 7 Route Planning

Set a port side cross track limit.
[XTD(STBD)]:
Set a starboard side cross track limit.
[Arrival radius]:
Set an arrival radius of WPT.

[Speed]:
Set a planned ship’s speed.

[Sail]:
Select sailing mode.
• When [RL] is selected, the mode is set to Rhumb Line.

Display Example

• When [GC] is selected, the mode is set to Great Circle.

Display Example

[Turning radius]:
Set a turning radius.
[Time zone] combo box:
Set a time zone.
Section 7 Route Planning 7-6
 1
[2] [Distance calculation mode]
Set a method for calculating a distance between WPTs. 2
When [Straight] is selected, a distance between WPTs is calculated with a straight line
3
WPT 3
4
5
WPT 1 WPT 2
6
When [with Turn] is selected, a distance between WPTs is calculated based on the expected route.
7
WPT 3
8
7
WPT 1 WPT 2
10
[3] [Monitoring]
Set a route monitoring method. 11
When [Wheel-over line] (steering line) is selected, monitoring is performed by using Wheel-over line
(WOL) along each WPT.
12
13
14
Wheel over line
15
16
17
18
19
When [Arrival circle] is selected, monitoring is performed by using the arrival circle along each WPT. 20
21
Arrival circle 22
23
24
25
26
27

7-7 Section 7 Route Planning

[4] [MAX Latitude]
Set maximum latitude.
A WPT can no longer be entered in a latitude higher than the latitude that has been set up.

If sailing is [GC], it is possible to create a route by automatically adding WPTs so as not to exceed the
maximum latitude in the case of a route in which part of the leg passes a latitude
higher than the maximum latitude.

If the maximum latitude is 60° or higher, a route can be created even if the GC leg exceeds 60°.

60°N

If the GC leg exceeds 60° when the maximum latitude is 60°, WPTs are automatically added and the
route is adjusted so as not to exceed 60°.
WPTs (W001 and W002) in this example are added so as not to
exceed the maximum latitude (60°).
The segment between W001 and W002 becomes an RL leg.

60°N

Note:
• A route cannot be created with a leg of 150° or higher in the longitudinal direction.
• Create a user map at latitude 84° or lower.

[5] [Minimum Leg Length for Limit Check] combo box

Select a multiplier for determining the "minimum leg length" that is used for limit check from 1, 2, 4, 6,
or 8.
Calculation expression: Minimum leg length = (Hull length) x multiplier

Section 7 Route Planning 7-8

 1
7.3 Starting and Ending the [Route 2
Planning] Dialog Box 3
Plan a route on the [Route Planning] dialog box. The procedures for starting and ending the [Route
Planning] dialog box are as follows.
4
5
7.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 7
The top menu is displayed.
8
2 Click on the [Route Planning] button on the top menu.
The [Route Planning] dialog box appears on the screen. 7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Display Example 19
20
The width of the dialog box varies according to the screen size.
21
7.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box 22
1 Click on the [X] button on the dialog box. 23
24
25
26
27

7-9 Section 7 Route Planning

7.4 Name and Function of Each Section of
the [Route Planning] dialog Box
The [Route Planning] dialog box comprises as below.

Title bar
Route
planning
bar

Route
planning
tab

Name Function
Title bar Displays the menu title, "Route Planning".
Route Planning bar Route planning tools are assigned (Refer to "7.4.1 Route Planning bar".).
Route planning tab Displays the file name and route data of the route file that is being created
(Refer to "7.4.2 Route planning tab".).

7.4.1 Route Planning bar

The Route Planning bar comprises the following tools.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

[1] [New] button

When this button is clicked on, a new route planning tab is added to the dialog box, enabling creation
of a new route file.

Note
Up to four route files can be opened concurrently. If four files have already been opened, the [New]
button is disabled. To create a new route file, close one or more of the files that are opened and
click on the [New] button.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-10

 1
[2] [Open…] button
When this button is clicked on, the [File Operations] (Open a file) dialog box appears and a required file 2
can be selected and opened from the route list of the files that have been saved.
3
Note 4
Up to four route files can be opened concurrently. If four files have already been opened, the
[Open] button is disabled. To open from the saving list, close one or more of the files that are 5
opened and click on the [Open] button.
6
[3] [Save] button 7
When the [Save] button is clicked on, the route file is saved.
For the details, refer to "7.5 Saving a Route". 8
7
[4] Route planning menu button
When this button is clicked on, the route planning menu is displayed. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The following operations can be performed by using the route planning menu.
17
Menu button name Function Related section 18
[New] Creates a new route file. 7.6.2 Creating a new route file by
table editing
19
7.7.2 Creating a new route file by 20
graphic editing
[File operation…] Displays the [File operation] dialog 7.6.4 Editing a route by table editing 21
[Save] (overwrite save)
box.
Saves a route file by overwriting. 7.5 Saving a Route
22
[Save as…] Saves a route file by naming the 7.5 Saving a Route 23
file.
[Import] Displays the [Import] dialog box. 7.11.1 Importing a route file 24
[Import](GPS Shared) Displays the [Import(GPS Instruction Manual <Function 2>,
25
(import from GPS) Shared)] dialog box. 1.6 Importing the Route File That Is
Received from GPS 26
[Export] Displays the [Export] dialog box. 7.11.2 Exporting a route file
Send to GPS Displays the [Send to GPS] dialog. Instruction Manual <Function 2>, 27
(Export for GPS) 1.6.1 Transmitting a route file to GPS

7-11 Section 7 Route Planning

 [Setting…] Displays the [Route] dialog box for 7.2.2 Setting [Settings] - [Route] on
setting initial values of the route at the menu
route planning.

[5] [Edit] button

When this button is clicked on, the Edit menu is displayed.

The following operations can be performed by using the Edit menu.

Menu button name Function Related section

[Use EBL/VRM] When this item is selected by clicking on the item, the 7.7.2.1 Creating
EBL/VRM mode that enables creation of a route by using a route by using
EBL and VRM becomes available. When the item is EBL/VRM
clicked on again, the check mark is cleared and
EBL/VRM mode is cancelled.
[Use Assistant circle] When this item is selected by clicking on the item, the 7.7.2.2 Creating
Use Assistant circle mode that enables creation of a a route by using
route by using an assistant circle (supplementary line) the assistant
becomes available. When the item is clicked on again, circle function
the check mark is cleared and the Use Assistance circle
mode is cancelled.
[WPT Reverse Order] When this item is selected by clicking on the item, the -
order of the WPT that is currently selected can be
reversed.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-12

 1
[6] Display area switching button
Chart display can be changed to the display area/scale suitable for the editing. 2
Previous Display WPT-WPT
3
4
5
6
Display centered WPT Display entire route
7
Center of WPT 8
Between WPTs
7
10
11
12
Button name Function
13
[Previous] Switches the chart display to the display area/scale before the chart
display was switched. 14
[Display centered WPT] Displays the WPT that is currently being edited at the center of the chart.
[Display WPT-WPT] Displays on the chart the WPT that is currently being edited and the
15
previous WPT. 16
[Display entire route] Displays the entire route that is being edited on the chart.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-13 Section 7 Route Planning

[7] Multi view switching button
A method of splitting a chart can be selected.

Single View Top Bottom View

Right Left View Floating View

Button name Function Display image

[Single View] Displays a chart on a single screen.

[Right Left View] Displays a chart by splitting it into 2

screens of left and right.

[Top Bottom View] Displays a chart by splitting it into top and

bottom.

[Picture in Picture] Displays a dialog box of another chart

(Dialog view) inside of the chart screen.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-14

 1
[8] [Display full] (Full screen display) button
A chart can be displayed in full screen mode by clicking on this button that clears the operation section 2
and display section other than the [Route Planning] dialog box. When this button is clicked on again,
the operation section and the display section are re-displayed.
3
the operation section and the display section are re-displayed. 4
5
6
7
8
Usual display Full screen display
7
[9] [Show Route Check…] (Route check screen display) button 10
When this button is clicked on, the [Check Route] dialog appears.
When an error is detected, the error count is displayed with a badge.
11
Error count
12
13
For the details of the [Check Route] dialog, refer to "7.9 Checking Route Data". 14
15
7.4.2 Route planning tab 16
When a route file is opened, a route plan tab comprising a file name display section and route data is
displayed. Up to four route planning tabs can be displayed concurrently.
17
18
File name display section
The file names that are currently opened are displayed in the tabs. When the display of the file name is
19
clicked on, the route file can be switched. 20
21
22
"*" is attached to the top of the name of the file you are editing.
A badge is displayed on the name of the file that is being monitored or under automatic sailing. 23
24
25
Monitoring badge Automatic sailing badge
26
When the [X] button on the file name display section is clicked on, the tab is closed. If an attempt is 27
made to close the tab that has not been saved, a save confirmation message dialog box appears.

7-15 Section 7 Route Planning

To close the tab by saving the route file by overwriting, click on the [Yes] button. When not saving the
route file by overwriting, click on the [No] button. When the [X] button is clicked on, the file returns to
the state prior to the clicking on the [X] button on the file name display section.

Route data
WPTs that form the route and the WPT data are displayed in a list.

[1] [2] [4]

[3]

Route Data

[1] [Insert] button

A new WPT is inserted in the selected WPT.

[2] [Delete] button

The selected WPT is deleted.

[3] [Comment] field

The comment of the route file is displayed.

[4] WPT list

Data of each WPT is displayed.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-16

 1
7.5 Saving a Route 2
1 Click on the [Save] button on the Route Planning bar.
3
4
5
Or select the [Save] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu button
6
7
8
7
10
11
12
At creation of a new route, a [Save as Route File] dialog box appears.
13
Perform Steps 2 to 4 in the [Save as Route File] dialog.
When the existing route file is saved, the [Save as Route File] dialog box does not appear since 14
the file is overwritten.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
2 Enter [Name] and a comment in [Comment] as required.
23
Note
Although up to 64 characters are allowed for a route name, only 8 characters are output when the 24
information is transmitted to another equipment as the route information (RTE sentence).
25
Memo
26
When all the files that have been saved are opened, all the file names may not necessarily be
displayed. Files can be distinguished easily by entering comments. 27

7-17 Section 7 Route Planning

 3 Click on the [Save] button.
The file is saved.

4 The file name that is displayed on the Route Planning tab changes to the name that is
specified in the [Name] box.
For the details of the Route Planning tab, refer to "7.4.2 Route planning tab".

When a route of the same file name already exists

1 When file saving operation is performed, a dialog box message appears confirming
whether the file is to be overwritten.

2 When overwriting the file, save the file by clicking on the [Yes] button. When not
overwriting the file, close the dialog box by clicking on the [No] button and change the
file name on the [Save as Route File] dialog box.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-18

 1
Memo
• The following message is displayed when an attempt is made to overwrite a protected file. 2
3
4
5
To cancel the save operation, close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button or the [X] 6
button. When saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as...] button. The
dialog box is closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears. 7
• The following message is displayed when an attempt is made to overwrite the route file that is 8
currently being monitored.
7
10
11
12
To cancel the save operation, click on the [No] button or [X] button. To continue the monitoring
of the updated route by saving the route file by overwriting, click on the [Yes] button. When 13
saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as...] button. The dialog box is
closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears.
14
• The following message is displayed when an attempt is made to overwrite the file of the route 15
under automatic sailing.
16
17
18
19
To cancel the save operation, close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button or the [X]
button. When saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as…] button. The
20
dialog box is closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears. 21
The monitored route does not change by the save operation. Automatic sailing continues based
on the pre-saved route. 22
23
24
25
26
27

7-19 Section 7 Route Planning

 Note
When editing the file of the route being monitored, if the limit check detects a turning radius error
("The straight route can not be created."), The following popup will be displayed when saving.

To cancel the save operation, close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button or the [X] button.
When saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as...] button. The dialog box is
closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears.

Saving a route file by naming the file

Click on [Save as...] of the route planning menu button on the Route Planning bar.
When the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears, save the file by entering a new file name.

Setting a route file to a Read Only mode (disabling editing)

Check Read only for the file that is to be set to [Read only] (disabling editing) mode. To cancel Read
Only (disabling editing) specification, clear the check.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-20

 1
7.6 Planning a Route by Using Table 2
Editing 3
4
5
Edit the navigation route according to the world geodetic system (WGS-84). 6
If you use the navigation route edited by a geodetic system other than the world
geodetic system, an accident may occur.
7
8
7.6.1 Table editing operation flow 7
10
7.6.1.1 Creating a new route file
11
1 Start [Route Planning]. 12
Reference: "7.3.1 15BStarting the [Route Planning] dialog box"
13
14
Create a new route file.
2 Reference: "7.6.2 20BCreating a new route file by table editing"
15
16
17
Set WPTs from WPT0 to WPT of the final destination.
3 Reference: "7.6.2 20BCreating a new route file by table editing" 18
19
20
Save the route.
4 Reference: "7.5 5BSaving a Route" 21
22
23
End [Route Planning].
5 Reference: "7.3.2 16BEnding the [Route Planning] dialog box" 24
25
26
27

7-21 Section 7 Route Planning

7.6.1.2 Editing a route

Steps 1 and 2
Start [Route Planning].
1 Reference: "7.3.1 15BStarting the [Route Planning] dialog
are not required
when editing the
route that is
box" currently
displayed.

Open the route file to be edited.

2 Reference: "7.6.4 22BEditing a route by table editing"

Edit the route file.

3 Reference: "7.6.4 22BEditing a route by table editing"

Save the route.

4 Reference: "7.5 5BSaving a Route"

End [Route Planning].

5 Reference: "7.3.2 16BEnding the [Route Planning] dialog box"

Section 7 Route Planning 7-22

 1
7.6.2 Creating a new route file by table editing
2
1 Click on the [New] button on the Route Planning bar
3
4
5
Or select the [New] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu button.
6
7
8
7
10
11
A new tab is added.
12
13
14
15
16
2 Enter the latitude and the longitude of WPT0 (waypoint 0) 17
Enter the latitude by clicking on [LAT] of [Position].
18
Enter the longitude by clicking on [LON] of [Position].
Use the software keyboard for entering the latitude and longitude. 19
20
21
Range of the values
that can be entered
22
23
24
25
Latitude software keyboard Longitude software keyboard 26
Memo 27
The maximum latitude input range of Position is 85 ° 00.000 (polar range restriction).

7-23 Section 7 Route Planning

 3 Set the following items as required.
*Some items are for display only and cannot be set.
Item Description
[Name] Set a name of WPT.
[LegBWW] This is the bearing from the previous WPT and is not set in
WPT0. The specifiable range is from 0.0° to 359.9°.
Editing is disabled when [GC] is selected in [Sail].
[Leg Distance] This is the distance from the previous WPT and is not set in
WPT0. The specifiable range is from 0.0 to 9999.9 NM.
Editing is disabled when [GC] is selected in [Sail].
[Sail] [RL] or [GC] can be selected from the list.
[XTD PORT] (Port side cross Set a port side cross track limit. The specifiable range is from
track limit) 0.01 to 5.00 NM.
[XTD STBD] (Starboard side Set a starboard side cross track limit. The specifiable range is
cross track limit) from 0.01 to 5.00 NM.
[Arrival Radius] Sets the arrival radius. (0.01 to 9.99 NM)
[Turning Radius] (Turning Sets the turning radius. (0.00 to 9.99 NM)
radius)
[Planned Speed] (Planned Sets the planned ship’s speed. (1.0 to 99.9kn)
speed)
[ROT] ROT is automatically calculated from the planned speed and
turning radius.
[ETA] ETA is automatically calculated from the position of WPT,
planned speed, and time zone.
[Time Zone] The time difference of the time of arrival can be input within
the range from -13.30 to +13.30.
[TWOL] TTG can be automatically calculated from the position of WPT
and planned speed.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[TTG]
[Total Distance] This is the total distance between WPT0 and the final WPT.

Memo
The values that are set by selecting [Settings] – [Route] on the menu is reflected in [Sail],
[XTD PORT], [XTD STBD], [Arrival radius], [Turning Radius], [Planned Speed], and [Time
Zone]. For the details, refer to "16.8 Setting up Parameter Values at Route Planning
Creation".

4 Add the next WPT by clicking on the next WPT No. or the [Insert] button after entering
the latitude and longitude.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-24

 1
2
3
4
5
WPT1 is added.
6
5 Set the item as indicated in Step 3. 7
6 Enter data up to the last WPT with the same procedure. 8
The route based on the input data is displayed each time.
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
7 After completing the creation, save the route file. 19
For the saving procedure, refer to "7.5 Saving a Route".
20
7.6.3 Deleting WPT data
21
1 Select WPT data to be deleted and click on the [Delete] button.
22
7.6.4 Editing a route by table editing 23
Memo 24
Steps 1 and 2 are not required when editing the route that is currently displayed.
25
1 Click on the [Open] button on the Route Planning bar
26
27

7-25 Section 7 Route Planning

 Or select the [File operation…] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning
menu button.

The [File operation] dialog box appears.

2 Select the route file to be edited and click on the [Open] button.

Memo
If [Read only] is selected, the file overwrite function is disabled. To overwrite the existing
file, clear the item before opening the file.

The route file is displayed on the [Route Planning] dialog box.

For the details of the Route Planning tab, refer to "7.4.2 Route planning tab".

Section 7 Route Planning 7-26

 1
3 Select WPT No. of WPT to be changed and click the right mouse button.
2
The context menu is displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
WPT0 is selected WPT0 is selected and WPT is The last WPT is selected 7
other than the last WPT
10
A route can be edited by selecting the "Edit" mode from the context menu. 11
The procedures for editing are as follows.
12
Menu button Function Related section
13
name
Insert WPT Adds WPT. 7.6.4.1 Route Planning bar 14
Delete WPT Deletes WPT. 7.6.4.2 Deleting WPT
Divide leg... Displays a leg division dialog box. 7.6.4.3 Dividing a leg
15
Divides the leg in the dialog box. 16
Set default Reflects the initial value of the route plan 
setting in the specified WPT. 17
Copy route Copies the entire route. 7.6.4.4 Copying the entire
route
18
Paste route Pastes the copied course to the last WPT 7.6.4.5 Pasting the copied 19
of the course. route
Insert other Displays the insertion dialog of some other 7.6.4.6 Inserting the other 20
route route. route
Inserts some other dialog in the route that
21
is being edited on the dialog. 22
Add WPT Inserts the WPT of the same value as the 7.6.4.7 Insert the same
last WPT. WPT as the last WPT 23
24
25
26
27

7-27 Section 7 Route Planning

 4 After completing the editing, click on the [Save] button on the Route Planning bar.

Or select the [Save] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu button

For the details of save operation, refer to "7.5 Saving a Route ".

7.6.4.1 Inserting WPT

Insert the WPT of the same value as the selected WPT.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the WPT to be inserted.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Insert WPT] of the context menu.

WPT is inserted following the selected WPT.

7.6.4.2 Deleting WPT

Delete the selected WPT.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the WPT to be deleted.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Delete WPT] on the context menu.

The selected WPT is deleted.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-28

 1
7.6.4.3 Dividing a leg
2
A leg can be divided by setting a longitude or a nautical mile.

1 Click the right button on the WPT No. to be divided.

3
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 Click on [Divide leg...] of the context menu.
5
The [Divide Route] dialog box appears.
6
7
8
7
10
11
3 Enter a division interval.
[Every (LON)] (Longitude division)
12
1) Click on "Every(LON)".
13
2) Enter a longitude interval for division.

[Every(NM)] (Nautical mile division)

14
1) Click on "Every(NM)". 15
2) Enter a nautical mile interval for division.
16
4 Click on the [OK] button.
The leg that is selected in Step 1 is divided in the unit that is specified in Step 3. 17
Note 18
When the total number of WPTs exceeds the maximum value of 511 as a result of leg division, leg
division is executed within the range of 511 in the entire route.
19
20
7.6.4.4 Copying the entire route 21
Copy the entire route that is selected.
22
1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. other than the last WPT.
The context menu is displayed. 23
2 Click on [Copy route] on the context menu. 24
The entire route is copied.
25
26
27

7-29 Section 7 Route Planning

7.6.4.5 Pasting the copied route
The route that was copied to the last WPT of the route is pasted.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the WPT on which the route is to be
pasted.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Paste route] in the context menu.

The routes are pasted(inserted).

Note
After pasting the copied route, when a route planning error occurs as a result of recalculation of
the BWW, Distance, Total Distance, ROT, TWOL, and ETA, an error message is displayed and the
route will not be pasted.

Memo
The same operation is performed also when the next No. button of the last WPT is clicked.

7.6.4.6 Inserting the other route

Insert the route of some other file into the final WPT of the route.

1 Click the right button on WPT No.

A context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Insert other route] in the context menu.

The [Insert other route] dialog is displayed.

3 Select a route file to be inserted from the [Select Route] combo box.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

The route file is inserted.

Note
If the range can be inserted is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the route will not be
inserted.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-30

 1
7.6.4.7 Insert the same WPT as the last WPT
Insert the same WPT as the last WPT following the last WPT.
2
1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the last WPT. 3
The context menu is displayed.
4
2 Click on [Add WPT] on the context menu.
WPT is added following the last WPT.
5
6
7
8
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-31 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7 Planning a New Route by Graphic
Editing

Edit the navigation route according to the world geodetic system (WGS-84).
If you use the navigation route edited by a geodetic system other than the world
geodetic system, an accident may occur.

7.7.1 Graphic editing operation flow

7.7.1.1 Creating a new route file

Start [Route Planning].

1 Reference: "7.3.1 15BStarting the [Route Planning] dialog box"

Create a new route file.

2 Reference: "7.7.1.1 Creating a new route file".

Set WPTs from WPT0 to the WPT of the final destination on the chart
3 For the details, refer to the flowchart provided in "7.7.1.2 Editing a route file".

Save a route.
4 Reference: "7.5 5BSaving a Route"

End [Route Planning].

5 Reference: "7.3.2 16BEnding the [Route Planning] dialog box"

Section 7 Route Planning 7-32

 1
7.7.1.2 Editing a route file
2
Start [Route Planning]. When editing the route 3
1 Reference: "7.3.1 15BStarting the [Route Planning] dialog
that is currently
displayed, steps 1 and 2
are not required.
4
5
2 Open the route file to be edited. 6
Reference: "7.7.3 25BEditing a route by graphic editing"
7
8
3 Edit the route file.
7
Reference: "7.7.3 25BEditing a route by graphic editing"
10
11
4 Save the route. 12
Reference: "7.5 5BSaving a Route"
13
14
5 End [Route Planning].
Reference: "7.3.2 16BEnding the [Route Planning] dialog box"
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-33 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7.2 Creating a new route file by graphic editing
1 Click on the [New] button on the Route Planning bar.

Or select the [New] button on the menu that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning
menu button.

2 Placing the cursor on the WPT0 position.

The latitude and the longitude of the WPT are displayed near the cursor.

3 Click the mouse button.

WPT0 is added.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-34

 1
4 Move the cursor.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
WPT0 Rubber band

10
5 Click the mouse button.
11
WPT1 is added at the cursor position. 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
WPT1
19
6 Add as many WPTs as required in the same way.
20
7 After creating the last WPT, double-click the left button or click the right button.
21
The Route planning is terminated.
22
Note 23
In the case of ARCS, when a WPT is specified at a position other than the active chart and
another panel exists at the position, the panel display is switched automatically. 24
25
8 Save the route file that was created. 26
For the details of how to save the file, refer to "7.5 Saving a Route".
27

7-35 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7.2.1 Creating a route by using EBL/VRM

1 Click on [Use EBL/VRM] on the [Edit] button to select it.

The cursor changes to EBL/VRM.

2 Move the cursor to the position used as the mark (example: headland) and click on the
position.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-36

 1
3 Move the cursor and determine the WPT position while checking the bearing from the 2
position used as the mark.
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
10
11
12
The latitude/longitude is displayed next to the cursor.
13
4 Click the mouse button. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
WPT0 is created. 24
5 Add as many WPTs as required in the same way.
25
Memo 26
When EBL/VRM is not used for creation of the next WPT, clear the item by clicking on [Use
EBL/VRM].
27

7-37 Section 7 Route Planning

 6 After creating the last WPT, double click the left button or click the right button.
The Route planning is terminated.

7.7.2.2 Creating a route by using the assistant circle function

A route can be created by using an assistant circle (supplementary line).
The assistant circle function adds WPT at the position where the mark such as headland and the leg
intersects at right angles.
When the position that is used as the mark is determined and the cursor is moved to the position, WPT
is added at the position where the leg and the position intersect at right angles.

1 Select the [Use Assistant circle] check box of the [Edit] button.

2 Move the cursor to any position and click the left button.
WPT0 is created.

3 Move the cursor to the position as the mark (example, headland) and click the button.

Supplementary line

Section 7 Route Planning 7-38

 1
4 Move the cursor and click the button while checking the leg bearing. 2
3
4
5
6
Assistant circle 7
8
7
10
11
12
Supplementary line 13
14
WPT1 is created at the intersecting point of the assistant circle and the supplementary line.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Memo
The direction of the leg varies according to the positional relationship of the cursor. 22
23
24
25
26
When the cursor is on the right side of the When the cursor is on the left side of the
position of WPT and the position used as the
mark, the leg will be on the lower side.
position of WPT and the position used as the
mark, the leg will be on the upper side.
27

7-39 Section 7 Route Planning

 5 Add as many WPTs as required in the same way.

Memo
When Use Assistant circle is not used for creation of the next WPT, clear the item by
clicking on [Use Assistant circle].

6 After creating the last WPT, double click the left button or click the right button.
The Route planning is terminated.

7.7.3 Editing a route by graphic editing

1 Click on the [Open] button on the Route Planning bar.

Or select the [File operation...] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu
button.

The [File operation] dialog box appears.

2 Select the route file to be edited and click on the [Open] button.

Memo
If [Read only] is selected, the file overwrite function is disabled. To overwrite the existing
file, clear the item before opening the file.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-40

 1
3 Edit the route with graphic editing. 2
Refer to the following for the editing methods.

Editing operations that are allowed by clicking on WPT or a leg of the route
3
Editing function Related section 4
Inserting WPT between WPTs 7.7.3.1 Inserting a WPT between WPTs
5
Moving WPT 7.7.3.2 Moving a WPT
Changing XTD (cross track limit) 7.7.3.3 Changing XTD (cross track limit) 6
Operations that are allowed on the context menu that is displayed by clicking the right
7
mouse button on WPT or a leg of the route 8
7
10
11
12
13
WPT0 or the last WPT is selected WPT other than WPT0 and the last WPT is selected 14
15
16
17
18
A leg is selected XTD is selected 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-41 Section 7 Route Planning

 Menu Function Related section
Add WPT Adds WPT. 7.7.3.4 Adding WPT on the context
menu
Move WPT Moves WPT. 7.7.3.5 Moving WPT on the context
menu
Delete WPT Deletes WPT. 7.7.3.6 Deleting WPT on the context
menu
Copy this route Copies the entire route. 7.7.3.7 Copying and pasting a route
Paste this route Pastes the copied route on to on the context menu
another route file.
Rotate this route Rotates the route. 7.7.3.8 Rotating a route on the
context menu
Move this route Moves the route. 7.7.3.9 Moving a route on the context
menu
Insert other route Inserts another dialog into the route 7.7.3.10 Inserting other route on the
that is being edited. context menu
Insert WPT Inserts WPT between WPTs. 7.7.3.11 Inserting WPT between
WPTs on the context menu
Divide leg... Displays a leg division dialog. 7.7.3.12 Dividing a leg on the context
Divides the leg in the dialog. menu
Change XTD Changes the XTD (cross track limit). 7.7.3.13 Changing XTD (cross track
limit) on the context menu

4 After completing editing, save the route file.

For the details of how to save the file, refer to "7.5 Saving a Route".

7.7.3.1 Inserting a WPT between WPTs

1 Click the left button on the leg between the WPTs in which a WPT is to be inserted.
The leg is set to a selected state.

Click

Section 7 Route Planning 7-42

 1
2 Determine the WPT insertion position by moving the cursor.
A rubber band is displayed. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 Click the mouse button.
A WPT is added. 7
10
11
12
13
14
15
WPT that was added
16
Cancelling the operation
17
The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 3. 18
19
7.7.3.2 Moving a WPT
20
1 Click on the WPT to be moved.
The WPT is set to a selected state. 21
22
23
24
25
26
Click.
27

7-43 Section 7 Route Planning

 2 Move the WPT to any position.
A rubber band covering from the WPTs at the front and back to the cursor is displayed.
*In the case of WPT0 or the last WPT, a rubber band is displayed from one side.

3 Click the mouse button.

The move is determined.

Cancelling the operation

The move operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 3.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-44

7.7.3.3 Changing XTD (cross track limit) 1
1 Click on the XTD. 2
The cursor is changed to the XTD change mode.
3
2 Move the cursor and change the XTD.
Use the information (XTD distance) that is displayed near the cursor and the line that is linked to
4
the cursor as the guideline. 5
6
7
8
7
10
11
Note
12
The line cannot be moved exceeding the limit of XTD (5.00 NM). 13
3 Click the mouse button. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The width of the XTD is changed. 22
23
Cancelling the operation
The change operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 3. 24
25
26
27

7-45 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7.3.4 Adding WPT on the context menu
Add a WPT to WPT0 or the last WPT.

1 Click the right mouse button on WPT0 or the last WPT.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Add WPT] on the context menu.

The cursor changes to the WPT addition mode.

3 Move the cursor on the position of the WPT to be added.

4 Click the mouse button.

WPT that was added

WPT is added.

Note
In the case of ARCS, when WPT is specified at a position other than the active chart and
another panel exists at the positon, the panel display changes automatically.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-46

Cancelling the operation 1
The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.
2
7.7.3.5 Moving WPT on the context menu 3
1 Click the right button on the WPT to be moved. 4
The context menu is displayed.
5
2 Click [Move WPT] on the context menu.
6
7
8
7
10
11
The cursor mode changes to the WPT move mode.

3 Move the cursor to the required position.

12
13
14
15
16
17
4 Click the mouse button. 18
19
20
21
22
WPT that was moved. 23
Cancelling the operation 24
The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.
25
26
27

7-47 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7.3.6 Deleting WPT on the context menu

1 Click the right button on the WPT to be deleted.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Delete WPT] on the context menu.

The WPT is deleted.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-48

 1
7.7.3.7 Copying and pasting a route on the context menu
2
A route can be copied and pasted on to another route file.

1 Click the right button on a WPT of the route to be copied.

3
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 Select [Copy this route] on the context menu.
5
Selected
6
route
7
8
Route file that
7
is currently
being selected 10
11
The route is copied.

3 Open the route file of the paste destination by switching the tab.
12
4 Select the route to be pasted and click the right button. 13
14
15
16
17
Route file at the 18
paste destination
19
20
5 Click on [Paste this route] in the context menu.
21
The copied route is pasted to the selected route.
22
23
Pasted route 24
25
26
27

7-49 Section 7 Route Planning

 Note
At pasting, BWW, Distance, Total Distance, ROT, TWOL, and ETA are recalculated. When a Route
planning error occurs as a result, an error message is displayed and insertion and pasting are not
performed. For the error messages that are displayed, refer to "7.12 Error Messages that are
Displayed when a Route is Created".

7.7.3.8 Rotating a route on the context menu

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. that is used as the reference of rotation.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Rotate this route] on the context menu.

3 Rotate the route.

The route rotates

based on the
selected WPT

Section 7 Route Planning 7-50

 1
4 Click the mouse button.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
Cancelling the operation 10
The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.
11
7.7.3.9 Moving a route on the context menu 12
1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT of any of the routes to be moved. 13
The context menu is displayed.
14
2 Click [Move this route] on the context menu.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-51 Section 7 Route Planning

 3 Move the route.

4 After positioning the route, click the mouse button.

Cancelling the operation

The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-52

 1
7.7.3.10 Inserting other route on the context menu
2
Insert the route of another file into the last WPT of the route.

1 Click the right mouse button on WPT No.

3
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 Click on [Insert other route] in the context menu.
5
6
7
8
7
10
11
The [Inset other route] dialog is displayed. 12
3 Click on the route file to be inserted from the [Select Route] combo box. 13
4 Click on the [OK] button. 14
15
16
17
18
The route file is inserted.
19
20
21
22
Inserted route 23
24
25
Note
26
When the range exceeded the insertion allowed range, an error message is displayed and the
27
route will not be inserted.

7-53 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7.3.11 Inserting WPT between WPTs on the context menu

1 Click the right mouse button on the leg between the WPTs within which WPT is to be
inserted.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Insert WPT] on the context menu.

The cursor mode changes to the WPT insertion mode.

3 Move the cursor to the position in which WPT is to be inserted.

4 Click the mouse button.

WPT is inserted.

Cancelling the operation

The insertion operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-54

 1
7.7.3.12 Dividing a leg on the context menu
2
1 Click the right mouse button on the leg of the route to be divided.
The context menu is displayed. 3
2 Click [Divide leg...] on the context menu. 4
5
6
7
8
The [Divide Route] dialog box appears.
7
10
11
12
13
14
3 Input a division interval. 15
[Every(LON)] (longitude division)
1) Click on "Every(LON)".
16
2) Enter a longitude division interval. 17
[Every(NM)] (nautical mile division)
1) Click on "Every(NM)".
18
2) Enter a nautical mile division interval. 19
4 Click on the [OK] button. 20
The leg that was selected in Step 1 is divided in the unit specified in Step 3.
21
22
23
24
25
Note 26
When the total number of WPTs exceeds the maximum value of 511 as a result of leg division, leg
division is executed within the range of 511 in the entire route. 27

7-55 Section 7 Route Planning

7.7.3.13 Changing XTD (cross track limit) on the context menu

1 Click the right mouse button on XTD.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Change XTD] on the context menu.

3 Change the width of XTD by moving the cursor.

4 Click the mouse button.

The XTD width is changed.

Cancelling the operation

The operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-56

 1
7.8 Creating an Alternate Route 2
3
An alternate route can be created by referencing the route that is currently displayed on the screen
during sailing. An alternate route can be written over the existing route that is being monitored or can 4
be saved by assigning a new name.
5
The following two charts indicate the original route and the modified alternate route. The diagram
shows that an alternate route is created while the original route is displayed.
6
In the example below, the following WPTs are changed. 7
• W001 Position (shift)
• W002 (Insertion. As a result, the subsequent WPT numbers are incremented by 1.) 8
• W006 (1 WPT is added to the last WPT.)
7
Memo 10
The original route is displayed in red to distinguish it from the alternate route.
11
Original route
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-57 Section 7 Route Planning

Original route and alternate route

Alternate route W006: Add to the last WPT

W001: Shift W002: Insertion

Section 7 Route Planning 7-58

 1
7.8.1 Creating an alternate route
2
1 Click the right button on the WPT of the route or leg that is being monitored.
The context menu is displayed.
3
2 Click on [Monitoring WPT xxx] or [Monitoring LEG xxx] in the context menu. 4
5
6
7
8
7
10
11
12
13
14
The context menu is displayed.
15
3 Click on [Edit this route] in the context menu.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
The [Route Planning] dialog is displayed.
26
27

7-59 Section 7 Route Planning

 4 For table editing, edit the route by using the same procedure as that from Step 3 in
“7.6.4 Editing a Route in Table Editing”.

5 For graphic editing, click the right button on the WPT of the route or leg that is being
monitored.
The context menu is displayed.

6 Click on [Planning WPT] or [Planning LEG] in the context menu.

The context menu for editing WPT or leg is displayed.

7 Edit the route by using the same procedure as that from Step 3 in “7.7.3 Editing a route
in graphic editing”.

7.8.2 Saving an alternate route

7.8.2.1 Overwriting without changing a file name

1 Click on the [Save] button.

A confirmation dialog is displayed.

2 Click on the [YES] button.

The alternate route is displayed and used instead of the original route.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-60

 1
Note
In this case, the name of the route that is being monitored remains unchanged. The origianl route 2
file is cleared since it is overwritten.
3
4
7.8.2.2 Saving by assigning a name
5
1 Click on [Save as] of the route plan menu button on the route plan bar.
The [Save as Route File] dialog is displayed. 6
2 Enter a new file name and click on the [Save] button. 7
An alternate route is displayed and used instead of the original route.
8
Note
7
In this case, the name of the route that is being monitored changes to the file name that was input.
The original route file remains. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-61 Section 7 Route Planning

7.9 Checking Route Data
Route data is constantly checked based on the safety standards and limits.
These items are checked on the [Check Route] dialog box.
The [Check Route] dialog box appears by clicking on the [Show Route Check] button on the Route
Planning bar.

7.9.1 Checking a route based on the safety standards

The result of safety check is displayed on the "Safety check" tab.
Cause

Count badge
Re-check button
Check box Approval status (Result)
WPT

[Disregard] button
[Jump] button [Reset] button
[Safety contour] box

When safety errors are detected, the number of errors is displayed on the count badge. When the error
count exceeds 999, "More" is displayed instead of the count.
The list of Cause and Result of the errors that were detected is displayed for each WPT prior to and
following the error occurrence point.
The following causes are displayed.

Cause
SpeConAre(Traffic separation zone)
SpeConAre(Traffic crossing)
SpeConAre(Traffic roundabout)
SpeConAre(Traffic precautionary)
SpeConAre(Two way traffic)
SpeConAre(Deeper water route)

Section 7 Route Planning 7-62

 Cause 1
SpeConAre(Recommended traffic lane)
SpeConAre(Inshore traffic zone) 2
SpeConAre(Fairway)
3
SpeConAre(Restricted area)
SpeConAre(Caution area) 4
SpeConAre(Offshore production area)
SpeConAre(Military practice area)
5
SpeConAre(Seaplane landing area)
6
SpeConAre(Submarine transit area)
SpeConAre(Canal) 7
SpeConAre(Fishing ground)
SpeConAre(Fishing prohibited)
8
SpeConAre(Pipeline area) 7
SpeConAre(Cable area)
SpeConAre(Anchorage area) 10
SpeConAre(Anchorage prohibited)
SpeConAre(Dumping ground)
11
SpeConAre(Cargo transshipment area) 12
SpeConAre(Incineration area)
SpeConAre(Specially protected area) 13
SpeConAre(Safety contour)
14
SpeConAre(Coast line)
SpeConAre(Obstruction) 15
SpeConAre(Under water rock)
SpeConAre(Wreck)
16
SpeConAre(Spoil ground) 17
SpeConAre(Sensitive sea area)
SpeConAre(Archipelagic sea lane) 18
SpeConAre(Marine farm/aquaculture)
AtoN
19
Vertical Clearance 20
Hazard
Caution Object 21
Warning object
Alarm Object
22
Sounding 23
PSSA (Particularly Sensitive Sea Area)
Areas to be avoided 24
25
memo
When the S63 chart and the C - MAP chart are used in combination with the safety check 26
function, the S63 chart takes precedence.
27

7-63 Section 7 Route Planning

Updating an error list
By clicking on the Re-check button, the latest error information is displayed by rechecking the
information.

Sorting error display

By clicking on any of the items on the title line, error display can be sorted based on the item. A sort
mark ( or ) is displayed on the title of the selected item.
Whenever an item is clicked on, the error display is sorted based on the ascending ( ) or the
descending ( ) order.

Selecting an error to be processed

Select the check box of the error to be processed. To select all the errors, select the check box on the
title line.
When the [Jump] button is clicked on, control jumps to the occurrence point of the error that was
selected on the error list.

Ignoring an error
Click on the [Disregard] button. To restore the error that was once ignored, click on the [Reset] button.

Checking an error target on the list

When an error is detected, the WPT under which the error occurred is highlighted in orange.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-64

 1
Checking an error target on the route
When an error is detected, the [Safety contour Alert] object in the Alert List is displayed in red and 2
[Navigational Hazard Alert] and [Area Alert] are highlighted in yellow.
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
When error display is clicked on the error list, the error target are highlighted. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-65 Section 7 Route Planning

7.9.2 Checking a route based on the limits
The result of limit check is displayed on the [Limit check] tab.
Count badge

Re-check
WPT Cause

Limit parameters

When limit errors are detected, the error count is displayed on the count badge. When the error count
exceeds 999, "More" is displayed instead of the count.
The cause of the error that was detected is displayed for each of WPTs prior to and following the error
occurrence point.
The following causes are displayed.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-66

 1
Cause
The planned radius is beyond the MAX turn radius. 2
The planned radius is under the MIN turn radius.
The course angle of leg is beyond the maximum.
3
The planned speed is beyond the MAX planned speed. 4
The planned speed is under the MIN planned speed.
The planned ROT is beyond the MAX ROT. 5
The planned ROT is under the MIN ROT.
6
The leg length is shorter the MIN Leg length.
The straight route cannot be created. 7
8
Updating error display
By clicking on the re-check button, the latest error information is displayed by rechecking the 7
information.
10
Sorting error display 11
By clicking on any of the items on the title line, error display can be sorted based on the item. A sort
mark ( or ) is displayed on the title of the selected item.
12
Whenever an item is clicked on, the error display is sorted based on the ascending ( ) or the 13
descending ( ) order.
14
15
Verifying an error target on the list
When an error is detected, WPT of the error target is highlighted in orange. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-67 Section 7 Route Planning

7.10 Navigation Calculation Function
This section describes the function that supports the distance and bearing calculation that are required
for navigation.

7.10.1 ROT (Rate of Turn)

ROT is automatically calculated from the planned ship’s speed and the turn radius and displayed on
[ROT].

7.10.2 ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)

ETA is automatically calculated from the WPT position, planned ship’s speed, and time zone and is
displayed on [ETA].
When ETA includes a date other than the current date, Viewing Does Not Include Current Date is
displayed in Permanent Information because displaying of a date-dependent object is executed.

Detailed wording which each ETA's range is displayed within one day, each one or more is different.

When the ETA rage is one day or less

Section 7 Route Planning 7-68

 1
When the ETA range is greater than one day
2
3
4
5
6
7
* For the date-dependent objects, refer to the following.
Section 11 - 11.5 Displaying a date-dependent object – Displaying an indication of duration 8
specification.
7
10
7.10.3 TWOL (Time to Go) 11
TTG is automatically calculated from the WPT position and planned ship’s speed and displayed on 12
[TWOL].
A display format can be selected from the list that is displayed by clicking on the TWOL title.
13
14
[Days hh:mm]

01Days 23:59
15
16
[hhhh:mm]

9999:59
17
18
Memo 19
In the navigation calculation function, each value is calculated using CCRP as a reference point.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

7-69 Section 7 Route Planning

7.11 Importing/Exporting a Route File
By using the [Import] or [Export] dialog box, the route file that was created can be imported/exported.
The dialog box can be displayed as follows.

1 Click on the Route Planning menu button.

2 Select [Import] or [Export] from the list that is displayed.

The [Import] or [Export] dialog box appears.

7.11.1 Importing a route file

1 Specify the "Drive", the "Folder", the "File name", and the "File Type" that stores the
file to be imported.

2 Click on the [OK] button.

The route file that is selected can be imported.
Press the [X] button to cancel the importing of a file.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-70

 1
Note
The file type of the file to be imported can be selected in the [File Type] combo box.The file types 2
that can be imported are as follows.
.rtn: Displays a route file (normal).
3
This file is used for ECDIS (JAN-701B/901B) and Chart Radar (JMA-900B) 4
.rta: Displays a route file (TCS route).
This file is used for ECDIS (JAN-701B/901B) and Chart Radar (JMA-900B) 5
.rtm: Displays a route file used in this equipment.
.rtz: Displays a route file (the route plan exchange format specified in IEC61174). RTZ version
6
1.0 and RTZ version 1.1 are supported. 7
.csv: Displayes a route file in CSV format.
*(Wildcard): Displays all the files that can be imported. 8
When importing a route file created by another company's device, be sure to check the route file
7
with the route planning function before using it. If the XTD, Arrival Radius, PlanSpeed, Sail, Turn
10
Radius, and Time Zone of the route file to be imported contain values outside the set range, the
default values will be replaced and imported. (If a csv format route file containing values outside 11
the set range is imported, an import error will occur. The value does not replace the default value)
12
7.11.2 Exporting a route file 13
1 Specify the "Drive", the "Folder", the "File name", and the "File Type" that stores the 14
file to be exported.
15
2 Click on the [OK] button.
The route file that is currently opened is exported. 16
Press the [X] button to cancel the exporting of a file.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Note 27
When .rtz is selected, the route file will be exported in RTZ version 1.0 format.

7-71 Section 7 Route Planning

7.12 Error Messages that are Displayed
when a Route is Created
When a route is created, the following error messages may be displayed, disabling execution of the
specified operation.

Error message Status

The total number of WPTs exceeded the upper limit

(511).

The leg length exceeded the maximum value (longitude

150°).

The latitude exceeded the latitude upper limit.

Section 7 Route Planning 7-72

 1
Section 8 Route Monitoring 2
3
8.1 Route Monitoring 4
The route monitoring function enables monitoring of the position of own ship, heading, and ship speed,
and calculation of an expected time of arrival using the route created in route planning.
5
6
Memo
For moitoring a route, it is necessary to create a route file or copy a route file in route planning in 7
advance.
For the details of route planning, refer to "Section 7 Route Planning".
8
9
8.1.1 Starting route monitoring 9
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
11
The menu is displayed.
12
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.
13
14
15
16
[File operation] dialog box display button

17
18
19
20
21
3 Select a required route file.
[Selecting from the [Route] combo box] 22
1) Click on the [Route] combo box.
23
2) Select a required route.
24
[Selecting from a route file list]
1) Click on the [File operation] dialog box display button. 25
2) Select a required file from the list of the [File operation] dialog box.
About the [File operation] dialog box, refer to "8.2 Selecting and Deleting Route Files"
26
3) Click on the [Open] button. 27

8-1 Section 8 Route Monitoring

 Limit check at the start of route monitoring
The limit check is automatically executed at the start of route monitoring.
At this time, if a turning radius error ("The straight route cannot be created.") is detected,
return the route to unload and the following popup will be displayed.

In ECDIS, clicking [here] on the popup screen, the route planning screen is displayed with
the route open and can be edited.

Automatic safety checking after loading a route

When a route file is loaded, safety checking is executed automatically.
When an error is detected, the [Safety Contour Alert] object is displayed in red and [Navigational
Hazard Alert] and [Area Alert] are highlighted in yellow.

4 Select a WPT to which the ship is to travel. A WPT can be selected automatically or
manually.
[Automatic selection]
The nearest WPT from the own ship’s position is selected automatically.
1) Open the next WPT list by clicking on the [To WPT] combo box.
2) Select [AUTO Select].

[Manual selection]
Select a WPT manually.
1) Open the next WPT list by clicking on the [To WPT] combo box.
2) Click on a required WPT .

8.1.2 Ending route monitoring

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.

The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the [Route] combo box.

4 Click on [UNLOAD].

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-2

 1
8.2 Selecting and Deleting Route Files 2
Selection of the route to be displayed and deletion of obsolete route files are enabled on the [File
3
operation] dialog box.
Use the following procedure to open the [File operation] dialog box. 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears. 7
3 Click on the [File operation] dialog box display button. 8
The [File operation] dialog box appears.
9
Selection check File name Comment File creation date 9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
8.2.1 Selecting a route to be displayed 20
1 Select the selection check box of the route file to be displayed.
When [Name] is clicked on, is displayed. Whenever is clicked on, the file display 21
sequence changes to the ascending/descending sequence based on the names.
22
Likewise, when you click on [Comment] and [Data (UTC)], it switches in ascending / descending
sequence. 23
2 Click on the [Open] button. 24
25
26
27

8-3 Section 8 Route Monitoring

8.2.2 Deleting a route file
1 Click the selection check of the route file to be deleted.

2 Click on the [Delete] button.

A message dialog box is displayed as to whether the deletion is to be executed.

3 When executing deletion, click on the [Yes] button. To cancel deletion, click on the
[No] button.

Note
The file of the route that is currently monitored or the route that is used for cannot be deleted.
The following message dialog box appears.

Close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-4

 1
8.3 [Voyage Information] (Voyage 2
Monitoring Information) Dialog Box 3
Note 4
In case of JAN-7201S/9201S, automatic sailing function and S-Joy function are not available by
function restriction. Therefore the informations for their functions are not available. 5
6
The [Voyage Information] (voyage monitoring information) dialog box is used to monitor voyage
statuses. 7
In addition to voyage monitoring, execution of course change and termination of automatic navigation
can also be performed. 8
Use the following procedure to open the [Voyage Information] dialog box.
9
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
9
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu. 11
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.
12
3 Click on the [Voyage Information] button.
The [Voyage Information] dialog box appears.
13
14
15
[1]
16
17
[2)
18
19
[3]
20
[4) 21
[5] 22
23
24
25
26
[1] Route name display
A file name of the route that is being monitored is displayed. 27

8-5 Section 8 Route Monitoring

 [2] To WPT information
The To WPT information that was selected in the [Route Monitoring] dialog box is displayed.

[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]

[f] [g] [h]

[a] [To WPT] (To WPT number)

Displays a To WPT number.

[b] [BWW] (Angle of own ship - To WPT)

Displays a bearing between the WPTs (To WPT bearing from the previous To WPT).

[c] [DWOL] (Distance of own ship - To WPT)

Displays the distance between own ship and To WPT.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[DTG]

[d] [TWOL] (Expected traveling time)

Displays an expected traveling time to reach the position indicated by To WPT.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[TTG]

[e] [ETA] (Expected time of arrival)

Displays the expected time of arrival at the position indicated by To WPT.

[f] Cross track direction

Displays a cross track direction of the own ship.
When the own ship is cross-tracked on the right side, [STBD] is displayed and when the own
ship is cross-tracked on the left side, [PORT] is displayed.

[g] Cross track distance

Displays a cross track distance of the own ship.

[h] Cross track distance unit switching button

Switches the display unit of a cross track distance. Whenever the button is clicked on, the
unit is switched to "m" or "NM".

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-6

 1
[3] Next WPT information
2
[a]
[b]
3
4
[a] [Next WPT] (Next WPT number)
Displays a Next WPT number.
5
6
[b] [Next Course] (Leg bearing of Next WPT)
Displays a leg bearing of the Next WPT. 7
[4] Automatic sailing information 8
This section displays the status of Auto Pilot that is installed.

Note
9
In case of JAN-5203, automatic sailing function is not available by function 9
restriction.
11
[a]

[b] [c]
12
13
[a] Automatic sailing mode
Displays an automatic sailing mode. 14
Display Status 15
No display A/P (Auto Pilot) non-connection setting or automatic sailing alert is
16
occurring
Track Control The A/P steering mode is set to Track Control. 17
The A/P steering mode is set to Heading Control.
Heading Control
The A/P steering mode is set to Manual.
18
Manual
Override Ship avoiding operation in progress 19
Memo
20
The display contents vary depending on the auto pilot that is installed. For the details, 21
refer to the Auto Pilot Instruction Manual.
[b] Control mode 22
Displays a control mode of automatic sailing.
Display Status
23
No display Automatic sailing inactive 24
KEEP Automatic sailing/maintaining the course
25
TURN Automatic sailing/turning (TCS category C)
26
27

8-7 Section 8 Route Monitoring

 [c] Turning mode
Displays a turning mode of automatic sailing.

Display Status
No display Automatic sailing inactive

MAN Manual course change mode

AUTO Automatic turning mode

(5) Switching tab

When this tab is clicked on, the contents of the following dialog are switched.

[Clicking on the [Autosail] tab]

The dialog is switched to [Autosail] (automatic ailing) dialog.

[a]

[b]

(a) Course to steer

Displays the course to steer to be transmitted to auto pilot.

(b) [Track Control Stop] (stop automatic sailing) button

To stop automatic sailing, click on this button.
The following message dialog is displayed.

When the [OK] button is clicked on, automatic sailing terminates.

Memo
When a message dialog box indicating the switching of the Auto Pilot mode to the
Manual mode is displayed, switch the Auto Pilot steering mode to the Manual mode.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-8

 1
[Clicking on the [S-JOY] tab]
The dialog is switched to [S-JOY] dialog and information on S-JOY is displayed. 2
3
4
[a] [b]
5
6
7
8
(a) Steering right
9
Displays the steering right of S-JOY.
When the steering right is available, the circle is filled. 9
(b) Mode
11
Displays the S-JOY mode. 12
The contents that are displayed in the dialog vary as follows.
S-JOY mode Contents that are displayed in the dialog 13
Track ACT Rudder 14
Heading Set HDG, Rudder Limit, ROT
15
Radius Set HDG, Set Radius, ACT Radius, ROT

Planned Turn Set HDG, Set Radius, ACT Radius, ROT 16

Rudder Set Rudder, ACT Rudder, ROT 17
[Clicking on the [Total] tab]
18
The dialog is switched to the [Total] dialog. 19
20
21
[a]
22
[b] 23
24
(a) [Total Distance (from WPT0)] 25
Displays the total distance from WPT0 to own ship.
26
(b) [Final ETA] 27
Displays the expected time of arrival to the final WPT that is calculated based on the current
ship’s speed.

8-9 Section 8 Route Monitoring

8.4 [Voyage Calculation] Dialog Box
The [Voyage calculation] dialog box is used to calculate the expected WPT arrival time, the time
required, and required ship speed
It is also possible to calculate a distance between two points such as between WPTs, from the own
ship’s position to WPT, or any position on the route to WPT.
Use the following procedure to open the [Voyage calculation] dialog box.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.

The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the [Voyage calculation] button.

The [Voyage calculation] dialog box appears.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-10

 1
When the [Schedule] (schedule calculation) button is clicked on, a schedule calculation dialog is
displayed. 2
When the [Distance] (distance calculation) button is clicked on, a distance calculation dialog is
displayed.
3
4
5
6
[1]
7
[2]
8
[1]
[3] 9
[4]
9
11
12
[5]
[2]
13
14
[3] 15
16
[Schedule] Dialog [Distance] Dialog
17
[Schedule] Dialog 18
[1] [Destined WPT] combo box
Select a destined WPT. 19
[2] [Distance] (Distance up to the destined WPT)
20
Displays a distance from the own ship’s position to the selected WPT.
21
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrival circle] selected:[Distance]
22
[3] [TWOL] (Expected traveling time)
Displays a traveling time required based on the position from the current SOG value to the destined
23
WPT.
24
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrival circle] selected:[TTG]
25
[4] [ETA] (Expeced time of arrival)
Displays a time at arrival of the destined WPT from the current SOG value. 26
27
[5] [Calculation] (Calculation)
Selects a calculation method and enters the values.

8-11 Section 8 Route Monitoring

[Distance] Dialog
[1] [From]
Selects a starting point calculation method and enters the values.

[2] [To]
Selects an ending point calculation method and enters the values.

[3] [Distance (Result)] (Distance calculation result)

Displays distance from the starting point and ending point that were obtained from the setting.

8.4.1 Calculating a schedule

1 Click on the [Schedule] button.

2 Click on the [Destined WPT] combo box.

3 Click on the WPT number whose schedule is to be calculated.

The measured distance from the own ship to the selected WPT, the estimated required time
calculated based on the SOG (Speed Over the Ground), and the estimated time of arrival are
displayed.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-12

 1
4 Select a calculation method and enter a value. 2
When [Average Speed] (calculated ship’s speed), [TTG] (calculated traveling time), or [ETA]
(calculated time of arrival) is selected and a value is entered, the calculation result of the ship’s 3
speed, expected traveling time, and expected time of arrival are displayed. These three items
are displayed by linking.
4
5
[Average Speed]: Enter a ship’s speed.
[TWOL]: Enter a calculated traveling time. 6
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[TTG]
[ETA]: Enter a calculated time of arrival by using a calendar/time picker. 7
8
8.4.2 Calculating a distance 9
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1 Click on the [Distance] button.
23
24
25
26
27

8-13 Section 8 Route Monitoring

 2 Select starting point calculation method and enter a value.
Set a starting point for distance calculation by selecting [WPT] (selection of starting WPT), [Pick
on the route] (selecting any position on the starting route), or [Ship’s position] (selection of the
own ship’s position).

[WPT]: Click on a WPT used as the starting point from the combo box.

[Pick on the route]: Any position on the routes set in the starting WPT and the end WPT is
used as the starting point.
When the [Edit] (editing any position) button is clicked, the color of the
selectable route changes to green. When any position is clicked, that
position becomes the starting point.

[Ship’s position]: The own ship’s position is used as the starting point. Click on the WPT to
be passed through from the [Via WPT] combo box.

3 Select an ending point calculation method and enter a value.

Set an ending point for distance calculation by selecting [WPT] (selection of ending WPT) or
[Pick on the route] (selecting any position on the ending route).

[WPT]: Click on a WPT used as the ending point from the combo box.

[Pick on the route]: Any position on the routes set in the starting WPT and the end WPT is
used as the end point.
When the [Edit] (editing any position) button is clicked, the color of the
selectable route changes to green. When any position is clicked, that
position becomes the end point.

Memo
When the [Edit] button is clicked on, the following message dialog box appears.

Position selection can be cancelled by clicking on the [Cancel] button.

Memo
For schedule and distance calculation, each value is calculated using CCRP as a reference
point.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-14

 1
8.4.3 Example of distance calculation 2
Calculating with [WPT]
3
4
5
6
7
8
Selected
segment
9
9
11
12
13
Route distance between selected WPTs
14
Selecting [Pick on the route] (Selecting any starting point on the route) as the starting point:
15
Set any position on the route as 16
the starting point

17
18
Selected 19
segment
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Route distance between selected WPTs

27

8-15 Section 8 Route Monitoring

Selecting [Ship’s position] (Selecting the own ship’s starting position):

Own ship's
position

WPT Selected
segment

Route distance between selected WPTs

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-16

 1
8.5 Comparing the Data between the 2
Planned Route and the Actual Route 3
The [Pair of data] dialog box enables comparison of data between the planned route and the actual
route.
4
Use the following procedure as below to open the [Pair of data] dialog box. 5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 6
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.

7
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears. 8
3 Click on the [Pair of data] button. 9
The [Pair of data] dialog box appears.
9
11
[1] [5] 12
[2]
[6]
13
[7]
[3]
14
[8]
[4]
15
16
17
Planned data is displayed in [Plan] (route plan) and the actual route data is displayed in
[Actual] (actual route) in the dialog. 18
[1] Planned course 19
Displays a planned course.
20
[2] Planned ship's speed 21
Displays a planned ship’s speed.
22
[3] Planned turn radius
Displays a planned turn radius.
23
24
[4] Planned ETA
Displays a planned expected time of arrival. 25
[5] Actual ship’s heading
26
Displays an actual ship’s heading. 27

8-17 Section 8 Route Monitoring

 [6] Actual speed
Displays an actual ship’s speed.

[7] Actual turn radius

Displays an actual turn radius.

[8] Actual ETA

Displays an expected time of arrival (ETA) that is calculated from the actual ship’s speed.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-18

 1
8.6 Verifying Detail Information of WPT 2
Detail information of each WPT on the route can be verified.
3
Use the following procedure to display the detail information of WPT.

1 Right-click on [WPT].
4
The context menu is displayed. 5
6
7
2 Click on the WPT to be verified from the context menu.
8
The context menu is displayed.
9
9
11
3 Click on [Readout WPT information...]. 12
The detail information dialog of the WPT is displayed.
13
[1] 14
[2] 15
16
[3]
17
[4]
18
[5]

[6] 19
[7]
20
[8]
[9]
21
22
[1] WPT number 23
Displays a WPT number.
24
[2] [Position] (WPT position) 25
Displays the latitude/longitude of WPT.
26
[3] [Name] (WPT name)
Displays a WPT name.
27

8-19 Section 8 Route Monitoring

 [4] [DIST] (Distance between own ship and WPT)
Displays a distance from the own ship’s position to WPT.

[5] [BRG] (Bearing between own ship and WPT)

Displays a bearing from the own ship to WPT.

[6] [TTG] (Expected time required to reach WTP)

Displays a time required to reach WPT based on the own ship’s speed (SOG) and the
distance.

[7] [ETA] (Expected time of arrival at WPT)

Displays an expected time of arrival at WPT based on the own ship’s speed (SOG) and the
distance.

[8] [Plan ETA] (Expected time of arrival at WPT)

Displays an expected time of arrival based on route planning.

[9] [Turning Radius] (Turning radius)

Displays a WPT turning radius.

Section 8 Route Monitoring 8-20

 1
Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging 2
Anchor 3
Anchor Watch is a function that sets a circular or polygonal dragging anchor monitoring area around
4
the own ship and realizes safe voyage by generating an anchor alert when a part of the outline of the 5
own ship exceeded the monitoring area.
6
Dangerous based on the judgment
7
Generates a dragging anchor
monitoring alert 8
Radius of monitoring circle
9
Center of
monitoring circle 10
Safe based on the judgment 12
13
14
15
16
Dangerous based on the judgment 17
Generates a dragging anchor
monitoring alert 18
19
Polygonal area
Safe based on the judgment
20
21
22
Dragging Anchor Monitoring Area 23
24
25
26
27
付録

9-1 Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor

9.1 Setting a Dragging Anchor Monitoring
Area
This section describes the setting of a dragging anchor monitoring area.
The setting varies depending on whether the shape of the dragging anchor area is a circle or a
polygon.

9.1.1 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring circle

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Anchor Watch] button on the menu.

The [Anchor Watch] dialog box appears.

3 Select [Circle] from the [Mode] (dragging anchor monitoring mode selection) combo
box.

Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9-2

 1
4 Select the initial position of the center position of the dragging anchor monitoring 2
circle from the [Watch] button.
Change the initial position of the center position of the dragging anchor monitoring circle to the 3
anchor position.
4
The value of [Anchor 1] [Anchor 2] can be set in [Service] - [Installation] - [System
Configuration] - [CCRP]. 5
When you press the [Anchor 1] and [Anchor 2] buttons, coordinates are displayed at [Anchor
6
Position] (center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle).
7
5 Enter the size of the dragging anchor monitoring area. 8
[Radius] (Radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle)
Input range
9
10 to 1500 m 10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

9-3 Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor

9.1.2 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring polygon
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Anchor Watch] button on the menu.

The [Anchor Watch] dialog box appears.

3 Select [Polygon] from the [Mode] (dragging anchor monitoring mode selection) combo
box.

4 Click on the [New] button.

The data of the [Point] (vertex) list is cleared.

5 Place the cursor on the chart.

6 Click to determine the vertex position. Create three or more vertices to create a
polygon.
By inputting position coordinates (longitude and latitude) of the vertex positions of the polygon
in the [Point] list, the vertex position can be changed.
When the polygon is created, the number of vertices is displayed in [(Total:)]. Up to 360 vertices
can be set.

Creation example:
Click (vertex 2)

Click (vertex 1)

Click the right mouse button or

double-click on the ending point

Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9-4

 1
9.2 Starting and Ending Dragging Anchor 2
Monitoring 3
9.2.1 Starting dragging anchor monitoring 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [Anchor Watch] button on the menu.
The [Anchor Watch] dialog box appears. 7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
The preview of dragging anchor monitoring area that was set is displayed (broken line). 19
20
21
22
23
When the dialog is displayed, the anchor position is placed at the center of the circle.
24
25
26
27
付録

9-5 Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor

 3 Set dragging anchor monitoring to ON by clicking on the [Monitoring Anchor] button.

Dragging anchor monitoring starts based on the setting.

The dragging anchor monitoring area on the chart is changed to a solid line.

When own ship exits from the dragging anchor monitoring area, the "Outside Anchor Watch
Area" warning is displayed.

Memo
"Outside Anchor Watch Area" warning escalates to "Outside Anchor Watch Area" alarm 2 minutes
after own ship exits from the dragging anchor monitoring area.

9.2.2 Ending dragging anchor monitoring

Set the button display to [OFF] by clicking on the [Monitoring Anchor] button.
Alternatively, use the following procedure.

1 Click the dragging anchor monitoring circle.

A context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Finish Monitoring Anchor] on the context menu.

The [Monitoring Anchor] button display is changed to [OFF] and the display of the dragging
anchor monitoring area on the chart is changed to the broken line display.

Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9-6

 1
9.3 Editing/Deleting a Dragging Anchor 2
Monitoring Area on the Chart 3
The size and shape of the anchor monitoring area can be changed or deleted on the chart.
4
These operations are also available on the context menu. 5
These operations can be performed either before or after starting dragging anchor monitoring. 6
7
9.3.1 Changing a size of a dragging anchor 8
monitoring circle on the chart 9
1 Click on the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
10
A square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
12
13
14
15
2 Click on any of the vertices of the square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring
circle.
16
The cursor changes to the arrow cursor.
17
18
19
20
21
3 Move the cursor until the dragging anchor monitoring circle becomes a required size
and click the mouse button.
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
The size of the dragging anchor monitoring cicle is changed.

9-7 Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor

9.3.2 Changing a size of a dragging anchor
monitoring circle on the context menu
Change of a dragging anchor monitoring circle can also be executed from the context menu.

1 Click on the dragging anchor monitoring circle.

A square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.

2 Click on any of the vertexes of the square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring
circle.
A context menu is displayed.

3 Click on [Change radius] on the context menu.

The cursor is set to the Arrow cursor.

4 Move the cursor until the dragging anchor monitoring circle becomes a required size
and click the mouse button.
The size of the dragging anchor monitoring circle is changed.

9.3.3 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor

monitoring polygon on the chart
Changing a vertex

1 Click on the vertex of the dragging anchor monitoring polygon to be changed.

The cursor is set to the Edit cursor.

Edit

2 Move the cursor to the required vertex position of the dragging anchor monitoring
polygon and click the mouse button.

Edit

The position of the vertex is changed.

Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9-8

 1
Adding a vertex
2
3 Click the mouse button on the position where a vertex to be added.
The cursor is set to the Edit cursor. 3
4
5
6
Edit

7
4 Move the cursor to the position where a vertex is to be set and click the mouse button.
8
9
10
Edit
12
A new vertex is added. 13
14
9.3.4 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor 15
monitoring polygon on the context menu 16
The following operation can be performed on the context menu that is displayed by clicking the right
mouse button on the dragging anchor monitoring polygon.
17
[Clicking the right mouse button on the line
[Clicking the right mouse button on a vertex of
18
other than vertices of the dragging anchor
monitoring polygon]
a dragging anchor monitoring polygon]
19
20
21
22
Each function is as follows. 23
[Insert vertex] (Addition of a vertex)
Adds a vertex at the position where the mouse button is clicked on. 24
[Delete vetex] (Deletion of a vertex)
Deletes the selected vertex.
25
[Delete this object] (Deletion of an object) 26
Deletes a selected dragging anchor monitoring polygon.
27
付録

9-9 Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor

 Note
When deletion of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon is attempted during execution of dragging
anchor monitoring, the following message dialog box is displayed.

To execute deletion, click on the [Yes] button. The monitoring area is deleted and dragging anchor
monitoring is terminated.

Section 9 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9-10

 1
Section 10 Automatic Sailing 2
(Option) 3
4
Note
In case of JAN-5203, automatic sailing function is not available by function restriction. 5
6
Please refer to the following instruction manual. 7
Instruction Manual Reference Section
JAN-7201/9201 Section10
8
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Automatic Sailing (Option) 9
JAN-7201S/9201S Section10
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Automatic Sailing (Option) 10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

10-1 Section 10 Automatic Sailing (Option)

Section 10 Automatic Sailing (Option) 10-2
 1
Section 11 Operating a Chart 2
Please refer to the following instruction manual. 3
Instruction Manual Reference Section 4
JAN-7201/9201 Section11
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Operating a Chart 5
JAN-7201S/9201S Section11
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Operating a Chart
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

11-1 Section 11 Operating a Chart

Section 11 Operating a Chart 11-2
 1
Section 12 Creating a User Chart/ 2
Updating a Chart Manually 3
Please refer to the following instruction manual.
4
Instruction Manual Reference Section 5
JAN-7201/9201 Section12
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Creating a User Chart/ Updating a Chart Manually
6
JAN-7201S/9201S Section12 7
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Creating a User Chart/ Updating a Chart Manually
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

12-1 Section 12 Creating a User Chart/ Updating a Chart Manually

Section 12 Creating a User Chart/ Updating a Chart Manually 12-2
 1
Section 13 Logbook 2
Please refer to the following instruction manual.
3
Instruction Manual Reference Section 4
JAN-7201/9201 Section13
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞ Logbook 5
JAN-7201S/9201S
Instruction Manual ＜Function＞
Section13
Logbook
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

13-1 Section 13 Logbook

Section 13 Logbook 13-2
 1
Section 14 Setting up Screen View 2
Screen display detail is set through the [View] menu. 3
The display procedure of the View setup dialog box is as follows.
4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on the [View] button on the menu. 6
The submenu is displayed.
7
8
9
10
When submenu buttons are clicked, their respective setup dialog boxes are displayed.
11
Button Dialog box Reference 12
Multi View
Mode
14.1 Setting Chart
Display Mode (Multi
13
View Mode) 14
15
17
Options 14.2 Setting Screen 18
Display Options
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-1 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.1 Setting Chart Display Mode (Multi View
Mode)
In the [View-Multi View Mode] dialog box, chart display modes can be set.

14.1.1 Setting Multi-Screen

For details about how to use the multi-screen, refer to "6.10.1 Displaying multi view".

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [View] - [Multi View Mode] on the menu.

The [View-Multi View Mode] dialog box appears.

You can select a chart display mode from the following four modes.

• [Single View Mode]: Displays a chart in full screen.

• [Top-Bottom Mode]: Divides the screen into top and bottom sections; the same or
different charts can be displayed in two views of View 1 and
View 2.
• [Right-Left] Mode: Divides the screen into left and right sections; the same or
different charts can be displayed in two views of View 1 and
View 2.
• [Picture in picture] Mode: Displays the chart in View 2 on top of the chart in View 1 as a
child dialog box.

1 Click on the icon of the chart display mode to be used.

A selection frame appears on the icon of the selected mode.

2 Click on the [Select Area from View1 for View2] button.

The button is highlighted.

3 On the chart in View 1, select an area you want to display in View 2.

The selected area is displayed in View 2.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-2

 1
14.2 Setting Screen Display Options 2
In the [View-Options] dialog box, the screen display options can be set.
3
Take the following steps to display the [View-Options] dialog box. 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [View] - [Options] on the menu.
The [View-Options] dialog box appears. 7
Disclosure button
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
Classification pane Edit pane 20
The [View-Options] dialog box consists of the classification pane and edit pane. 21
Click on the Disclosure button to hide the classification pane.
22
1 Click on the screen view of which you want to set up the options in the classification
pane. 23
The Option setup dialog box for the screen view you have selected appears in the edit pane.
24
2 Set up in the edit pane.
25
26
27
付録

14-3 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

Screen display set in the [View-Options] dialog box
The following table shows the classification panes and the related sections.

Classification pane Related section

Own Ship 14.2.1 Setting up the display of Own Ship symbol
Own Track 14.2.2 Setting up the display own ship’s track
Route 14.2.3 Setting up the display of Route Monitoring
14.2.4 Changing the color of the alternative route
User Chart 14.2.5 Setting up the display of User Chart
Mariner’s Mark/Line 14.2.6 Setting up the display of Mariner's Mark Line
RADAR 14.2.7 Setting up Radar Overlay and Transparency of Echo/Trails
Target 14.2.8 Setting up the display of TT/AIS Target
Target Track 14.2.9 Setting up the display of other ship’s track
GPS Buoy 14.2.12 Setting up AIO/T&P display
Chart Common 14.2.10 Setting up the display of Chart Common
Chart Display 14.2.11 Setting up the display of Chart
AIO/T&P 14.2.12 Setting up AIO/T&P display
Graphical Indication 14.2.13 Set display of danger detection highlight
Tools 14.2.14 Setting up the display of Range/Bearing Measurement
Function
Unit 14.2.15 Setting up the display of unit of setting value
Control 14.2.16 Setting up display of Own Ship Track Control, display
format of Own Ship/Cursor Position and display of
Sub-Information dialog
*1: In case of JAN-5203, RADAR is not available to select by function restriction.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-4

 1
14.2.1 Setting up the display of Own Ship symbol
2
When you select [Own Ship] in the classification pane, the [Own Ship] dialog is displayed in the edit
pane.
3
Configure the setting for own ship symbols.
4
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button. 5
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-5 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

 AIS Filter Stabilisation Indicator

Heading Line
Sea Stabilised Vector
Ground Stabilised Vector

Vector Time Mark

Beam Line

Stern Line POS2 Symbol

Vector display at primary position

In the own ship symbol, COG (Course Over the Ground) vector, HDG (Heading) vector, and heading
line can be displayed. The COG or HDG vector can also be displayed by the length proportionate to
the current ship speed in minute by the setting. For example, when the vector length is set to 10
minutes, the vector tip is at the predicted position after 10 minutes if the ship is assumed to navigate at
the current speed.

Time (own ship’s vector length)

Time (own ship’s vector length)

Vector Time Mark Vector Time Mark

(Vector time mark) (Vector time mark)

HDG vector COG vector

• To display the COG (Course Over the Ground) vector, check [Ground Stabilised Vector] in [Vector].
• To display the HDG (Heading) vector, check [Sea Stabilised Vector] in [Vector].
• To display the heading line, check [Heading and Beam Line].

For details on the setting of type and length of the vector to be displayed, refer to the following table.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-6

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Type Select an own ship symbol from the combo box (symbols Simplified Symbol, 3
of other ships are also linked). Outline
4
: Simplified Symbol
5
: Outline
Heading and Selecting this enables to display heading lines and beam To enable: Select.
6
Beam Line lines. To disable: Clear.
(Heading 7
line/beam line
display) 8
Ground Stabilised Selecting this enables to display a ground stabilised To enable: Select.
Vector vector. To disable: Clear. 9
Sea Stabilised
Vector
Selecting this enables to display a sea stabilised vector. To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
10
Time Enter the own ship's vector length in the box. 0 to 120 11
(Length of own
ship's vector) 12
Stabilization Selecting this enables to display the stabilization To enable: Select.
Indicator indicator. To disable: Clear. 13
Note 14
When both the Ground Stabilised Vector and the Sea
Stabilised Vector are effective, this automatically takes
effect.
15
Vector Time Mark Selecting this enables the interval of the vector time To enable: Select. 17
mark. To disable: Clear.
Interval (vector Select a vector time mark interval from the pull-down 1 to 6 min 18
time mark menu when Vector Time Mark is valid.
interval) 19
POS2 Symbol Selecting this enables to display the POS2 symbol. To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear. 20
Note
This item may not be displayed depending on the 21
equipment setting.
22
Shortcuts 23
Click on any of available shortcuts to display the related dialog box.
24
Shortcut Setup Dialog
Setting of AIS Filter [AIS Filter Setting] dialog box 25
Settings of AZ [AZ Setting] dialog box
26
Settings of Anti-Grounding Look-ahead [Anti-Grounding Look-ahead Setting] dialog box
27
付録

14-7 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.2 Setting up the display own ship’s track
When you select [Own Track] in the classification pane, the [Own Track] dialog is displayed in the edit
pane.
Configure the settings for own tracks.
Information of own tracks is recorded in the SSD at every second. Information of a maximum of 24
hours is displayed on a chart as own tracks.

10
Time Label
1400

Past Position

Past Track

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-8

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Past Track Selecting this enables to display the past To enable: Select. 3
track. To disable: Clear.
Plot Color (plot When Past Track is enabled, select a White (Black), Gray, Pink, Magenta, 4
color of track) plot color of the track from the list Blue, Cyan, Green, Yellow, Orange,
(preview not supported). Dark Red 5
Note 6
When the background of the screen
is being set to Day1 or Day2, Black 7
can be selected instead of White.
Track Period When Past Track is enabled, select a 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24 h 8
track period from the list (preview not
supported). 9
Time Label Selecting this enables to display the time To enable: Select.
label interval. To disable: Clear. 10
Interval (time label
interval)
When Time Label is enabled, select a
time label interval from the list (preview
1, 3, 5, 10, 30, 60, 120 min
11
not supported).
Past Position Selecting this enables to display the past To enable: Select.
12
position. To disable: Clear.
13
Interval When Past Position is enabled, select an 0.5 min, 1 min, 2 min, 4 min, 0.1
(past position interval of track points from the list NM, 0.2 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM 14
interval) (preview not supported).
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-9 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.3 Setting up the display of Route Monitoring
When you select [Route] in the classification pane, the [Route] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
Configure the settings for route monitoring.

W003 Comment
06:12U

XTD Limit Line

W002 Comment Comment
04:24U

W001 Comment ETA

02:54U

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-10

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Show ETA Selecting this enables to display the ETA To enable: Select. 3
(estimated time of arrival at WPT) while To disable: Clear.
route monitoring. 4
Format When ETA is enabled, select a display
format of the ETA while route monitoring
UTC/LMT
5
by clicking on the corresponding button.
: UTC
6
: LMT 7
XTD Limit Line Selecting this enables to display XTD limit To enable: Select.
lines. To disable: Clear. 8
Color When XTD Limit Line is enabled, select a
display color of XTD limit lines by clicking
IALA-A, IALA-B 9
on the corresponding button.
IALA-A: Starboard - green, port - red
10
IALA-B: Starboard - red, port - green 11
Show WPT Name Selecting this enables to display a To enable: Select.
(Comment display) comment on the vicinity of the target. To disable: Clear. 12
WPT Name Font Size When Show WPT Name is enabled, select Standard, Small 13
(Comment font size) a font size of comments by clicking on the
corresponding button (preview not 14
supported).
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-11 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.4 Changing the color of the alternative route
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the Left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [View] - [Options] from the menu.

The [View-Options] dialog box is displayed.

3 Select [Route] (ship track) in the category pain.

The [Route] dialog box is displayed.

4 Select a color in [Alternate Route].

Blue : Displays Alternate Route in blue.
Orange : Displays Alternate Route in orange.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-12

 1
14.2.5 Setting up the display of User Chart
2
When you select [User Chart] in the classification pane, the [User Chart] dialog is displayed in the edit
pane.
3
Set up the display of User Chart.
4
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button. 5
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-13 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Area Description of Setting Setting Value

Object Type Click on the button to specify All On/Individual
(Object display condition) whether to display or hide the
Types of selectable marks
object mark, and select the mark
Symbol: , , , , ×
to be displayed.
Area: Polygon, Circle, Ellipse, Fan
All On: Displays all marks.
Line: Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Individual: Displays selected
Dashed Line, Circle, Ellipse, Arc,
marks.
Arrow
Text: Text
Area Fill Set the fill color display to Off/On
(Fill) On/Off. Check the mark to be
set to On.
Symbol/Simple Line Color Set to On/Off the display of the Off/On
(Symbol and simple line color that targets the symbol
color) and simple line. Check the color
to be set to On.
Mark Size Set the mark display size. 1 (Minimum) /2/3/4/5 (Maximum)
(Mark size)
Comment Font Size Set the font size of the Standard/Small
(Comment font size) comment.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-14

 1
14.2.6 Setting up the display of Mariner's Mark Line
2
When you select [Mariner’s Mark/Line] in the classification pane, the [Mariner’s Mark/Line] dialog is
displayed in the edit pane.
3
Select mariner’s marks and lines you want to display on the user map by selecting the corresponding
4
check boxes.
You can select the following marks and lines. 5
• Clearing Line 6
• Tidal Stream
• Information Mark 7
• Highlighting
• Event Mark
8
• Plotted Position
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-15 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.7 Setting up Radar Overlay and Transparency of
Echo/Trails
Note
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction. Therefore the
setup is not available.

When you select [RADAR] in the classification pane, the [RADAR] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

RADAR Overlay The radar overlay display turns ON by Without interswitch setting
selecting the [RADAR Overlay] RADAR1/RADAR2
Select the required radar system from
the pull-down menu. With interswitch setting
RADAR1 to 8
Note
• When this item is turned OFF, even the
alerts related to the radar will not be
displayed.
• This item is displayed on the ECDIS
screen if RADAR interface is available.
Transparency of Click on the control on the slider and set 0 to 15
Echo/Trails up the transparency of echoes/trails. 0 = Opaque (Nontransparent)
15 = Transparent (Completely
transparent)

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-16

 1
14.2.8 Setting up the display of TT/AIS Target
2
When you select [Target] in the classification pane, the [Target] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
Configure the settings for TT/AIS targets.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
TT Vector TT2 Symbol 18
19
TT1 Symbol
TT1 TT2 AIS
AIS Symbol
20
10 20 100
21
TT Target ID TT Target ID AIS Target ID
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-17 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

AIS Symbol Selecting this enables to display the AIS To enable: Select.
symbol. To disable: Clear.

Sleeping Class A, Class Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
B sleeping AIS of class A, ClassB. To disable: Clear.
Physical AtoN Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
Physical AIS AtoN when the AIS Symbol is To disable: Clear.
selected.
Virtual AtoN Selecting this enables to display the Virtual To enable: Select.
AIS AtoN when the AIS Symbol is selected. To disable: Clear.
TT1 Symbol Select this item to enable the TT symbol. To enable: Select.
(TT1 Symbol) Select the TT Symbol to be used from the To disable: Clear.
TT2 Symbol combo box.
(TT2 Symbol) TT1 Symbol indicates the tracked target
information that is received from RADAR1
and the TT Target ID is displayed as "T1-***"
(*** indicates the target number or ship
name).
TT2 Symbol indicates the tracked target
information that is received from RADAR2
and the TT Target ID is displayed as "T2-***"
(*** indicates the target number or ship
name).
TT Vector Selecting this enables to display the TT To enable: Select.
vector. To disable: Clear.
GPS Buoy Selecting this enables to display the GPS To enable: Select.
Buoy symbol. To disable: Clear.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-18

 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
TT Target ID Select a display mode of the tracked target Off, On, TT Track
2
ID from the combo box.
(Tracked target ID)
Off: Hide
3
On: Show
TT Track: Displays only the target that
4
shows other ship's track.
5
Display
Ship's Name: When the ship’s name has 6
been input in the [TT Target INFO] (property
of tracked target) dialog, that ship name is 7
displayed. If the ship’s name has not been
input, the identification number is displayed. 8
Display
9
10
11
12
13
14
AIS Target ID Select a display mode of the AIS target ID Off, On, AIS Track, Ship's
from the combo box. Name 15
Off: Hide
On: Show 17
AIS Track: Displays only the target that
shows other ship's track (target track). 18
Ship's Name: When a ship‘s name is input
in the [AIS Target INFO] (property of AIS 19
target) dialog, the ship’s name is displayed.
When no ship’s name is input, the ID is 20
displayed.
21
Display
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-19 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.9 Setting up the display of other ship’s track
When you select [Target Track] in the classification pane, the [Target Track] dialog is displayed in the
edit pane.
The [Target Track] dialog consists of the [Display], [Plot] and [Clear] tabs.

[Display] tab
On the [Display] tab, set up the display of other ship’s tracks.

10(10) 15(5)

Target Track

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-20

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below. 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 2
Target Track Display Select to show/hide target tracks by clicking on All On, All Off
(display of other the corresponding buttons and then specify the When Individual is 3
ship’s tracks) target tracks you want to display by checking selected:
them. Select from Tracks 1 to 10 4
All On: Shows all of target tracks. and from Tracks 11 to 20.
All Off: Hides all of target tracks. 5
Individual: Shows selected target tracks.
6
Shortcut 7
Click on any of available shortcuts to display the related dialog box. 8
Shortcut Setup Dialog Box
9
File Load/Save [File Load/Save] dialog box in File Manager
10
[Plot] tab 11
The edit pane of the [Plot] tab is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
12
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button. 13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-21 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
Setting Item Description of Setting
For All Target Track Click on the check box and select a
plot color of target tracks from the
list.
For Individual Target Track Click on the check box and select
plot colors of individual target
tracks (Tracks 1 to 10 and Tracks
11 to 20) from the list.
Plot Interval Select a plot interval of target
tracks from the combo box.
* White/Black interchanges under the following conditions.
Black at Day1/Day2 (or Day), white at Day3/Dusk/Night
Shortcut
Click on any of available shortcuts to display the related dialog box.
Shortcut
File Load/Save [File Load/Save] dialog box in File Manager
Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-22
Setting Value
White (Black), Gray, Amber,
Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green,
Yellow, Orange and Dark Red
White (Black), Gray, Amber,
Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green,
Yellow, Orange and Dark Red
Off, 3s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1 min, 3
min, 5 min,
10 min, 30 min, 60 min, 1 NM,
3 NM, 5 NM, 10 NM, 0.1 NM,
0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM
Setup Dialog Box
 1
[Clear] tab
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
To erase tracks by specifying a color

1 Select the color of other ship’s track to be erased from the [Track Color] combo box.
17
You can select from All, White, Gray, Amber, Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green, Yellow, Orange and 18
Dark Red.
* White/Black interchanges under the following conditions. 19
Black at Day1/Day2 (or Day), white at Day3/Dusk/Night
A message dialog box prompting you to confirm erasing appears.
20
21
Color you selected
22
23
24
2 To execute erasing, click on the [OK] button. To cancel erasing, click on the [Cancel]
25
button or the [X] button.
26
27
付録

14-23 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

To erase tracks by specifying a number

1 Select the number of other ship’s track to be erased from the [Track Number] combo
box.
You can select from All, Track 1, Track 2, Track 3, Track 4, Track 5, Track 6, Track 7, Track 8,
Track 9, Track 10 and Track 11 - 20.
An erase confirmation message dialog is displayed

Selected track number

2 To execute erasing, click on the [OK] button. To cancel erasing, click on the [Cancel]
button or the [X] button.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-24

 1
14.2.10 Setting up the display of Chart Common
2
When you select [Chart Common] in the classification pane, the [Chart Common] dialog is displayed in
the edit pane.
3
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
4
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-25 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Area Boundary Select a display method of area boundary by clicking on the Plane,
corresponding button. Symbolized
Plane: Displays a plane boundary (an area boundary
is indicated by dotted lines).

Area boundary

Symbolized: Displays a symbol boundary (an area

boundary is indicated by symbol lines).

Area boundary

Chart Symbol Select a type of chart symbols you want to use on the chart Paper Chart,
by clicking on the corresponding button. Simplified
Paper Chart: The same symbols on paper charts are used
as symbols for lighthouses, etc.

Simplified: Colored symbols are displayed.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-26

 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Full Light Lines When selected, display of maximum length of full light lines To enable: Select.
2
are enabled. To disable: Clear.
3
4
5
6
7
8
When [Full Light Lines] are enabled
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Light range of lighthouse 17
When [Full Light Lines] are disabled. 18
Scale Minimum When selected, scale display smaller than the minimum To enable: Select.
scale setting value is disabled. To disable: Clear. 19
20
21
22
23
24
When [Scale When [Scale 25
Minimum]is enabled Minimum] is disabled
26
Depth Refer to "Depth."
27
付録

14-27 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Depth Refer to "Depth."
C-MAP Ed.3 Select this to show a chart database chart. Shown: Selected
Database *Only the imported chart databases can be selected. Hidden: Clear
During manual updating of a chart, the C-MAP database list
cannot be changed. Therefore, the following restrictions are
imposed while the Manual Update tool bar is displayed by
selecting [Chart] - [Manual Update] in the menu.
• Chart Type of [View1] / [View2] cannot be changed in the
[View-Options] dialog.
• The C-MAP Ed.3 Database check box cannot be
changed.
The Manual Update tool bar is closed, the restrictions are
released.

Depth
Use [Depth] items to set up the depth.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Shallow Contour The shallow contour displayed on the chart is displayed at 0 to 200
the set depth.
For the display example, refer to "(1) Example of displaying
Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour."
Safety Depth The spot depth that is lower than the set value is highlighted 0 to 200
for display.
Safety Contour The set depth value on the chart (or depth that is lower than 0 to 200
the set value) is highlighted for display.
In the sea area that is shallower than the set value, an alarm
occurs.
*If the safety contour appropriate to the set depth is not
provided on the chart, the safety contour that is deeper than
the set value is displayed.
For the display example, refer to "(1) Example of displaying
Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour."
Deep Contour The deep contour displayed on the chart is displayed at the 0 to 200
set depth.
For the display example, refer to "(1) Example of displaying
Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour."
Four Shades Normally, the sea is displayed on the chart by four colors at To enable: Select.
(Sea area each depth. When [Four Shades] is disabled, the sea is To disable: Clear.
four-color displayed by two colors with [Safety Contour] as a boundary.
display) This item is set to clearly separate the sea into the safe area
and the area where navigation requires caution.
For the display example, refer to "(2) Example of Displaying
Four Shades."

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-28

 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Shallow Pattern Of depth that can be set at 4 levels, a lattice-like line is To enable: Select. 2
added to the shallow sea set in [Shallow Contour] and To disable: Clear.
3
[Safety Contour].
This item is set to display the area where navigation 4
requires caution conspicuously.
For the display example, refer to "(3) Example of Displaying 5
Shallow Pattern."
6
Shallow Water A dangerous route obstacle existing in the sea area that is To enable: Select.
Dangers shallower than safety contour is displayed by mark. To disable: Clear. 7
(Isolated For the display example, refer to "(4) Example of displaying
obstacles in Shallow Water Dangers." 8
shallow water)
9
(1) Example of displaying Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour 10
Shallow Contour Deep Contour
11
12
Shallow
Land
13
Slightly shallow
14
Slightly deep
15
Deep
17
Safety Contour
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-29 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

(2) Example of displaying Four Shades

Land

Shallow Contour

Safety Contour

Safety Depth

Deep Contour

When [Four Shades] is enabled (the sea area is displayed by four colors.)

When [Four Shades] is disabled (the sea area is displayed by two colors.)

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-30

 1
(3) Example of displaying Shallow Pattern
2
3
4
Shallow Pattern
5
6
7
8
When [Shallow Pattern] is enabled (the shallow pattern is displayed)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
When [Shallow Pattern] is disabled (the shallow pattern is not displayed)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-31 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

(4) Example of displaying Shallow Water Dangers

Dangerous course
obstacle

Safety Contour

When Shallow Water Dangers is enabled

Dangerous course
obstacle

Safety Contour

When Shallow Water Dangers is disabled

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-32

 1
Restrictions on [Safety Contour] and [Deep Contour]
1) When entering in [Shallow Contour]
2
If “Safety Contour < Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour”, the Safety Contour value is corrected to the
3
Shallow Contour value.
If “Safety Depth < Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour”, the Safety Contour is corrected to the 4
Shallow Contour value.
If Safety Contour, Safety Depth ≤ Deep Contour < Shallow Contour”, the Safety Contour, Safety
5
Depth, and Deep Contour values are corrected to the Shallow Contour value.
6
2) When entering in [Deep Contour]
If “Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour < Safety Contour”, the Safety Contour value is corrected to the 7
Deep Contour value.
If “Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour < Safety Depth”, the Safety Depth value is corrected to the 8
Deep Contour value.
9
If “Deep Contour < Shallow Contour ≤ Safety Contour, Safety Depth”, the Safety Contour, Safety
Depth, and Shallow Contour values are corrected to the Deep Contour values. 10
3) When entering in [Safety Contour]
If “Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour < Safety Contour”, the Deep Contour value is corrected to the 11
Safety Contour value.
If “Safety Contour < Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour”, the Shallow Contour value is corrected to
12
the Safety Contour value. 13
4) When entering [Safety Depth]
If “Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour < Safety Depth”, the Deep Contour value is corrected to the 14
Safety Depth value.
If “Safety Depth < Shallow Contour ≤ Deep Contour”, the Shallow Contour value is corrected to the
15
Safety Depth value. 17
The compensated setting values are flashed temporarily.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-33 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.11 Setting up the display of Chart
When you select [Chart Display] in the classification pane, the [Chart Display] dialog is displayed in the
edit pane.
The edit pane is divided into three dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
You can set up the same values on both the [View1] and [View2] tabs.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-34

 1
By setting the [Readout undisplayed chart objects] check box to ON or OFF in Page 1/3, it is possible
to select whether the object without Viewing Group setting is displayed on the pick report. 2
When the check box is checked, the object is displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[Readout undisplayed chart objects] check box
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-35 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

Setting a Group Layer
When the [Group Layer] check box is set to ON in Page 2/3, the Viewing Layers are grouped.
The grouped lists are displayed under the main-sub layers.

[Group Layer] check box

Grouped lists

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Chart Type Select a type of charts to be displayed by clicking on the S-57, C-Map 3,
corresponding button. ARCS
S-57: Shows S-57 charts.
C-Map 3: Shows C-Map Ed3 charts.
ARCS: Shows ARCS charts.
Text Size Drag the control on the slider and set up the text size (7 0 to 6
levels).
Clicking on the [Def.] (Factory settings) button resets the text
size to the factory preset value.
For the details of the examples of changing text size, refer to
"Example of changing text size".
Chart Load Select a display switching mode for the S-57 chart by clicking AUTO, Fix
on the button.
[AUTO]: Automatically switches and shows charts.
[Fix]: Fixes and shows the chart being currently displayed.
Layer When showing S-57/C-MAP charts, select the objects you Refer to "Contents
want to display by selecting the check boxes of desired to be displayed as
objects. layers".
Text When showing S-57/C-MAP charts, select the texts you want Refer to "Contents
to display by selecting the check boxes of desired texts. to be displayed as
texts".

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-36

 1
Example of changing text size
2
Standard
3
4
5
Small Large
6
7
8
9
Small Large Large Small
10
11
12
Small Large Large Small
13
Large
14
Small 15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-37 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

Contents to be displayed as layers
Set up the items to be displayed when the chart display category is [Custom].
There are three types of layers: [-], [S] and [A].
[-]: Items whose display categories are none of [BASE], [STD(Standard)] nor [All].
[S]: Items to be displayed when the display category is [STD].
[A]: Items to be displayed when the display category is [All].
The items that are displayed vary according to the setting of Group Layer to ON or OFF.

Type ENC Layer (Group Layer OFF)

[S] Unknown
Generic Object
Chart scale boundary, overscale data
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Lake, Sloping ground, Slope top, Causeway, Dam, Dyke
Radar/Visually conspicuous object, Built up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel on seabed, Mooring cables
Navigation line
Recommended track/traffic lane/route centreline
Ferry route
RADAR line , Limit of shore radar, Radio calling in point
Restricted area
Submarine transit lane, Military practice area, Sea plane landing area,
Offshore production area
Fairway
Caution area
Fishing ground, Marine farm
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Archipelagic sea lane
Buoy, Beacon, Light float, Mooring buoy, Light Vessel
Daymark
Distance mark
Navigational system mark
topmarks
Gridiron
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-38

 1
Type ENC Layer (Group Layer OFF)
[A] Accuracy 2
Nautical publication
3
Highlight info
Highlight document 4
Highlight date dependent
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
5
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
6
Dunes, Hills, Ridge, Clifftop, Contours and elevation
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway 7
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbor facility
8
Berth, Crane, Drydock, Mooring facility, Gate 9
Spot Sounding
Depth contours 10
Contour label
Water turbulence
11
Tide..., Current-non-gravitational 12
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Cable area, Pipeline area 13
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
14
Submarine cable/pipeline
Continental shelf area 15
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
17
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone 18
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Chart boundary 19
ENC edition date
most recent chart update number
20
Grid 21
[-] Updated Review
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-39 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

 Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer OFF)
[S] Generic Object
Chart scale boundary, overscale data
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Lake, Sloping ground, Slope top, Causeway, Dam, Dyke
Radar/Visually conspicuous object, Built up area
Swept area
Sand wave, Tunnel on seabed, Mooring cables
Navigation line
Recommended track/traffic lane/route centreline
Ferry route
RADAR line , Limit of shore radar, Radio calling in point
Restricted area
Submarine transit lane, Military practice area, Sea plane landing area,
Offshore production area
Fairway
Caution area
Fishing ground, Marine farm
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
Archipelagic sea lane
Buoy, Beacon, Light float, Mooring buoy, Light Vessel
Daymark
Distance mark
Navigational system mark
Gridiron
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-40

 1
Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer OFF)
[A] Accuracy 2
Nautical publication
3
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation 4
Dunes, Hills, Ridge, Clifftop, Contours and elevation
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
5
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway 6
Check point, Harbor facility
Berth, Crane, Drydock, Mooring facility, Gate 7
Spot Sounding
Depth counter
8
Counter label 9
Water turbulence
Tide..., Current-non-gravitational 10
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
11
Cable area, Pipeline area
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock 12
Submarine cable/pipeline
Continental shelf area
13
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbor area 14
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone 15
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Cell boundary
17
graticule 18
19
Type ENC Layer (Group Layer ON) 20
[S] Unknown
Drying line 21
Buoys, beacons, aids to navigation
Buoys, beacons, structures
22
Lights 23
Boundaries and limits
Prohibited and restricted areas 24
Chart scale boundaries
25
Cautionary notes
Ships' routeing 1 systems and ferry routes 26
Archipelagic sea lanes
Miscellaneous
27
付録

1
routeing: UK notation
14-41 Section 14 Setting up Screen View
 Type ENC Layer (Group Layer ON)
[A] Accuracy
Highlight date dependent
Highlight info
Highlight document
Contour label
Spot soundings
Submarine cables and pipelines
All isolated dangers
Magnetic variation
Depth contours
Seabed
Tidal
Miscellaneous
Chart boundary
ENC edition date
most recent chart update number
Grid
[-] Update Review

Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer ON)

[S] Unknown
Drying line
Buoys, beacons, aids to navigation
Buoys, beacons, structures
Boundaries and limits
Prohibited and restricted areas
Chart scale boundaries
Cautionary notes
Ships' routeing 2 systems and ferry routes
Archipelagic sea lanes
Miscellaneous

2
routeing: UK notation
Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-42
 1
Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer ON)
[A] Accuracy 2
Highlight date dependent
3
Highlight info
Highlight document 4
Contour label
Spot soundings
5
Submarine cables and pipelines 6
All isolated dangers
Magnetic variation 7
Depth contours
Seabed
8
Tidal 9
Miscellaneous
Grid 10
［-］ Update Review
11
12
Contents to be displayed as texts
13
ENC Text （Group Layer OFF）
Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
14
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on 15
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication 17
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
18
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth 19
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number 20
Current velocity
National language
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-43 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

 C-MAP Ed.3 Text （Group Layer OFF）
Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
Current velocity
National language

ENC Text （Group Layer ON）

Important text
Other text
Names
Light description
All other
National language

C-MAP Ed.3 Text （Group Layer ON）

Important text
Other text
Names
Light description
All other
National language

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-44

 1
14.2.12 Setting up AIO/T&P display
2
When you select [AIO/T&P] in the classification pane, the [AIO/T&P] dialog box appears in the edit
pane.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below. 15
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 17
All AIO Objects Select and enable the display of all AIO objects. To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
18
Temporary Notice (T) Select and enable the display associated with To enable: Select. 19
Temporary Notice (T). To disable: Clear.
Preliminary Notice (P) Select and enable the display associated with To enable: Select. 20
Preliminary Notice (P). To disable: Clear.
ENC Preliminary Notice Select and enable the display associated with ENC To enable: Select.
21
(EP) Preliminary Notice (EP). To disable: Clear.
22
No Information Objects Select and enable the display associated with No To enable: Select.
Information Objects. To disable: Clear.
23
All T&P Objects Select and enable the display of all T&P objects To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear. 24
Temporary Notice (T) Select and enable the display associated with To enable: Select.
Temporary Notice (T). To disable: Clear. 25
Preliminary Notice (P) Select and enable the display associated with
Preliminary Notice (P).
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
26
27
Note
T&P will not be displayed if the display scale is a small scale of more than 1 / 20,000,000. 付録

14-45 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.13 Set display of danger detection highlight
When you select [Graphical Indication] in the classification pane, the [Graphical Indication] dialog box
appears in the edit pane.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-46

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 3
Graphical Indication for
the Charted Feature
Select and enable the highlighting function of the
detection object on the chart
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear. 4
object
Crossing Safety Activate the partial highlight display function of the To enable: Select.
5
Contour object where the execution result of Safety Check
becomes Crossing Safety Contour error.
To disable: Clear.
6
Navigational Hazards Activate the partial highlight display function of the
object where the execution result of Safety Check
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
7
becomes Navigational Hazards error.
8
Prohibited Areas and Prohibited Area or Areas with Special Condition To enable: Select.
Areas with Special
Conditions
activates the partial highlighting function of the error
part.
To disable: Clear. 9
Settings for Click to open the Depth / Safety Contour screen of the 10
Depth/Safety Contour Alert setting.
Settings for Click to open the Look-ahead screen of the Alert 11
Look-ahead setting.
Settings for Special Click to open the Special Condition Area screen of the
12
Condition Area Alert setting.
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-47 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.14 Setting up the display of Range/Bearing
Measurement Function
When you select [Tools] in the classification pane, the [Tools] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-48

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Range Rings Selecting this enables to display range To enable: Select. 3
rings. To disable: Clear.
Bearing Scale Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select. 4
bearing scale. To disable: Clear.
Note
5
This item is displayed on the ECDIS 6
screen only. This item is enabled only
when overlay is set to On. 7
EBL1/EBL2 Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
EBL1/EBL2 markers. To disable: Clear. 8
VRM1/VRM2 Selecting this enables to display the
VRM1/VRM2 markers.
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
9
PI (parallel line cursor) Select this to enable to display the PI To enable: Select. 10
cursors, and then select the PI cursors To disable: Clear.
you want to display by selecting them. 11
PI cursor selections
Index Line 1 to Index Line 8
12
Node Fixed EBL/VRM Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
node fixed EBL/VRM. To disable: Clear. 13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-49 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.15 Setting up the display of unit of setting value
Note
Some items may not be displayed depending on the installation setting.

When you select [Unit] in the classification pane, the [Unit] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-50

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Depth (water depth) Select a unit of water depth from the combo box. m, ft, fm 3
Ship Speed Select a unit of the ship speed from the combo box. kn, m/s, km/h
4
Current Speed Select a unit of the current speed from the combo box. kn, m/s, km/h
Wind Speed Select a unit of the wind speed from the combo box. kn, m/s, km/h 5
Propeller Revolution Select a unit of the propeller's revolution per minute from
the combo box.
rpm, min-1
6
Propeller Pitch Angle Select a unit of the propeller's pitch angle from the combo °, % 7
box.
Thruster Revolution Select the unit of thruster revolution from the combo box. rpm, min-1 8
Thruster Pitch Angle Select a unit of the thruster's pitch angle from the combo
box.
°, %, NOTCH
9
Air TEMP Select a unit of the air temperature from the combo box. °C, °F 10
Water TEMP Select a unit of the water temperature from the combo box. °C, °F
Air Pressure Select a unit of the air pressure from the combo box. hPa, mbar
11
Wind Direction(True) Select a wind direction (true) display method from the 16 points, 12
combo box. Degree
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-51 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.16 Setting up display of Own Ship Track Control,
display format of Own Ship/Cursor Position
and display of Sub-Information dialog
When you select [Control] in the classification pane, the [Control] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Show Sub Information
Window (sub information
dialog box display)
Select this to enable to display the sub To enable: Select.
information dialog box, and then select the To disable: Clear.
tab(s) you want to display.
Tab selections
Note• The [Depth] tab can only be POSN DIFF(Difference
selected when equipped with a water between POSN(Main) and
depth sensor. POSN(Sub)), Depth,
• The [Current] tab can only be selected Current
when equipped with a GPS, a gyro and a
log sensor.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-52

 1
14.2.17 Setting up the Water Depth display
2
When [Depth Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Depth Graph] dialog is shown on the
Edit pain.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
The following table shows the setting details:
15
Setting item Description Setting values 17
Depth Range(Docking) Select a depth range for the docking depth
graph from the combo box.
AUTO, 10 m, 25 m, 50 m
18
Depth Range(Voyage) Select a depth range for the route depth AUTO, 50 m, 100 m, 250 m 19
graph from the combo box.
Time Range Select a time range for the depth graph from 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 20
the combo box. 60 min, 12 hours
Reference Switch the reference of the water depth AUTO, Keel, 21
value. Transducer(When
FURUNO is selected), 22
AUTO: Switch the reference of the water
depth value according to the
Surface(When FURUNO is
selected) 23
received value.
Keel: Set the reference of the water depth 24
to keel.
Transducer: Set the reference of the water 25
depth to transducer. It can be
selected only when FURUNO is 26
selected in [Device Installation] -
[Echo Sounder 1]. 27
Surface: Set the reference of the water depth
to surface. It can be selected only 付録
when FURUNO is selected in
[Device Installation] - [Echo Sounder
1].
14-53 Section 14 Setting up Screen View
14.2.18 Setting up the Rudder graph
When [Rudder Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Rudder Graph] dialog is displayed on
the edit pain.

Note
This dialog may not be displayed depending on the equipment setting.

The following table shows the setting details:

Setting item Setting Setting value

Time Range Select a time range for the Rudder graph from 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min
the combo box.
Rudder Range Select a rudder angle for the Rudder graph from 30°, 40°, 50°, 60°, 70°, 80°
the combo box.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-54

 1
14.2.19 Setting up the Gyro/Rudder graph
2
When [Gyro/Rudder Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Gyro/Rudder Graph] dialog is
displayed on the edit pain.
3
Note
4
This dialog may not be displayed depending on the equipment setting. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
The following table shows the setting details:
20
Setting item Setting Setting value
21
Time Range Select a time range for the Gyro/Rudder graph 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min
from the combo box.
22
Rudder Range Select a rudder angle for the Gyro/Rudder 30°, 40°, 50°, 60°, 70°, 80°
graph from the combo box. 23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-55 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

14.2.20 Setting up the Engine Graph
When [Engine Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Engine Graph] dialog is displayed on
the edit pain.

Note
This dialog may not be displayed depending on the equipment setting.

The following table shows the setting details:

Setting item Setting Setting value

Time Range Select a time range for the engine speed graph 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
form the combo box. 60 min
Maximum rpm Select an engine speed on the Ahead side form AH100, AH200, AH300,
the combo box. AH500, AH1000
Minimum rpm Select an engine speed on the Astern side form 0, AS50, AS100
the combo box.

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-56

 1
14.2.21 Setting up the graph range of the ROT slide 2
bar
3
When [ROT] is selected on the classification pain, the [ROT] dialog is displayed on the edit pain.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
Setting item Setting Setting value
18
ROT Scale Select a graph range for the ROT slide bar from 30-0-30, 60-0-60,
the combo box. 90-0-90, 120-0-120,
150-0-150, 300-0-300
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録

14-57 Section 14 Setting up Screen View

Section 14 Setting up Screen View 14-58
 １
Section 15 Setting up Alerts 2
By setting this equipment to generate an alert when the own ship’s position or the condition meets the 3
specific condition or any other ship or obstacle approaches to a specific range, preliminary measures
4
can be taken, avoiding collisions, grounding, and deviation from the route can be avoided.
This section explains the method of setting conditions (threshold values) for generating alerts, alert 5
processing operations, and alert timer setting using the [Alert] menu.
6
7
15.1 Selecting Setting Items
8
When the [Alert] menu is opened, the [Alert] dialog box appears.
By selecting a setting item in the [Alert] dialog box, the setting dialog of the selected item can be 9
displayed.
10
11
15.1.1 Displaying the [Alert] dialog box
12
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 13
2 Click on the [Alert] button on the menu. 14
The [Alert] dialog box appears.
Disclosure button
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

Classification pane Edit pane

15-1 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

15.1.2 Selecting a setting item
1 Click the alert classification you want to set up in the classification pane.
The setting dialog of the selected item is displayed in the edit pane.

2 Set up in the edit pane.

The following items can be set in the [Alert] dialog box.

Setting item Setting contents

New Target Warning Set the following conditions to automatically activate the target.
(No alert will be generated even if the target is automatically
activated.)
• Area (AZ) for tracked target automatic activation
• Enable/disable AZ
Refer to "15.2 Target Automatic Activation Conditions".
Depth/Safety Contour Set the following conditions to generate a grounding avoidance
alert.
• Safety contour line approach alarm
Refer to "15.3 Depth/Safety Contour Alert Generation
Conditions".
Look-ahead (Forward forecast Set a forward forecast monitoring.
monitoring) Refer to "15.4 Setting up Look-ahead".
Special Condition Area Set the conditions for generating a warning by detecting a
danger detection vector.
Refer to "15.5 Special Condition Area Generation Conditions".
Track Control Set the conditions for generating an automatic route retention
alert.
Refer to "15.6 Track Control Alert Generation Conditions".
Position Integrity Set the conditions for generating POSN(Deviation) warning,
(Position sensor integrity) POSN(Jump) caution and HDOP exceeded Maintenance
Information.
Refer to "15.7 Position Integrity Alert Generation Conditions".
AMS Set the actions to be taken at the next stage for an
(Alert Management System) unacknowledged alert.
Refer to "15.8 Setting up Alert Processing".

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-2

 １
15.2 Target Alarm Activation Conditions 2
When you select [New Target Warning] in the classification pane, the [New Target warning] dialog is 3
displayed in the edit pane.
In this dialog, it is possible to set the AZ (automatic/activation zone) and switch the AZ to 4
enable/disable.
5
For the details of the setting of the AZ, refer to "5.2.4 Setting up the automatic/activation zone (AZ)".
6
7
When one of these is 8
selected, AZ1 or AZ2 takes
effect.
When this is clicked on, the
9
cursor mode is set to a Make
AZ mode. 10
Enter the start angle.
Enter the end angle. 11
Enter the start distance.
Enter the end distance.
12
13
14
Settings of AZ1
(Automatic/Activation Area 1)
Settings of AZ2
(Automatic/Activation Area 2)
15
16
18
AZ1 AZ2
19
20
Start angle
End angle 21
22
End distance 23
Start distance
24
25
APP A
APP B

15-3 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

15.2.1 Switching AZ1/AZ2 to enable/disable

15.2.1.1 Enabling AZ1 or AZ2

Select the [Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2] check box.
The AIS target in the AZ will be automatically activated and become a target of collision detection.
The vector is displayed after the AIS target's activation.

15.2.1.2 Disabling AZ1 or AZ2

Clear the [Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2] check box.
The activation area disappears from the screen. However, the AIS target is still activated.

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-4

 １
15.3 Depth/Safety Contour Alert Generation 2
Conditions 3
When [Depth/Safety Contour] is selected in the classification pane, the [Depth/Safety Contour] dialog 4
is displayed in the edit pane.
In this dialog, the threshold values for generating "Crossing safety contour alarm" can be set up. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
Each threshold value can be set in a range between 0 and 200 m. 19
In the [Shallow contour], [Safety depth] and [Deep contour] input boxes, the values set in [Options] -
[Chart Common] of the View menu are displayed. 20
When [View Settings for Chart Common] is clicked, the [Chart Common] dialog box of the View menu
appears.
21
For the details of each setting item, refer to "14.2.9 Setting up the Display of Chart Common". 22
• Shallow Contour
• Safety Depth 23
• Safety Contour
• Deep Contour
24
25
APP A
APP B

15-5 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

Automatic compensation of entered values
The threshold values must satisfy the following conditions.
• Shallow Contour ≤ Safety Contour ≤ Deep Contour
• Shallow Contour ≤ Safety Depth ≤ Deep Contour
Safety Contour and Safety Depth are not related.
If there is any contradiction in the entered values, the following automatic compensations will be
performed.

Condition Compensation
Safety contour value (or Safety Depth value) < Replace the Shallow contour value with the Safety
Shallow contour value contour value (or Safety Depth value)
Deep contour value < Safety contour value (or Replace the Deep contour value with the Safety
Safety Depth value) contour value (or Safety Depth value)

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-6

 １
15.4 Setting up Look-ahead 2
When [Look-ahead] is selected in the classification pane, the [Look-ahead] dialog is displayed in the 3
edit pane.
In this dialog, the selection of the sizes of both a danger detection vector/sector and the switching to 4
enable/disable of them are possible. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
This unit can monitor when own ship tries to cross over the preset safety contour or danger area, or 16
when dangerous objects enter the sector specified around own ship. For this monitoring, danger
18
detection vectors and sectors can be displayed. As for danger detection vectors, detection ranges for
crossover of safety contours and danger areas can be specified in units of minutes or nautical miles, 19
and notches on vectors and tips of vectors indicate predicted positions if navigated at the current
speed. Also, the radius of a sector can be set up in units of miles or minutes. 20
Radius of a danger detection sector Length of a dangerous detection vector
21
(1.0 min to 30.0 min/0.1 NM to 5.0 NM) (1.0 min to 30.0 min/0.1 NM to 5.0 NM)
22
23
24
25
APP A
Angle of a danger detection sector Width of a dangerous detection vector
APP B
(0.1 degrees to 360.0 degrees) (Width of own ship to 25.0 m)
Dangerous Detection Vector and Sector

15-7 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

15.4.1 Switching to enable/disable a danger
detection vector/sector
To enable a danger detection vector/sector, select [Use Area(Rectangle)] and/or [Use Area(Sector)]
check box.
A danger detection vector and a danger detection sector appear on the chart.
To disable a danger detection vector/sector, clear [Use Area(Rectangle)] and/or [Use Area(Sector)]
check box.
A danger detection vector and a danger detection sector disappear from the chart.

15.4.2 Setting up the size of a danger detection

vector
1 Enter a value in [Length].
Specify it in a range between 1.0 and 30.0 min or between 0.1 and 5.0 NM.
The unit of the vector length can be switched between min and NM by clicking on the Change
Unit button,

2 Enter a value in [Width].

Specify the vector width in a range between own ship's beam +15 m to 250.0 m.

15.4.3 Setting up the size of a danger detection

sector
3 Enter a value in [Radius].
Specify it in a range between 1 and 30 min or between 0.1 and 5.0 NM.
The unit of the sector radius can be switched between min and NM by clicking on the Change
Unit button,

4 Enter a value in [Width].

Specify the sector width in a range between 0.1 and 360.0°.

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-8

 １
15.5 Special Condition Area Generation 2
Conditions 3
When [Special Condition Area] is selected in the classification pane, the [Special Condition Area] 4
dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, set an area for generating an alert when the symbol on the chart touches the danger 5
detection vector.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

15-9 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

Select the check box of the area that is targeted for the alert.
Clear the check box of the area not to be targeted for the alert.

When you select Warning or Caution in the Alert Priority combo box, the alert priority is set at once.
If priority is changed during alert occurrence, it will be regenerated.

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-10

 １
15.6 Track Control Alert Generation 2
Conditions 3
Note 4
In case of JAN-5203, automatic sailing function is not available by function restriction.
Therefore the setup is not available. 5
When [Track Control] is selected in the classification pane, the [Track Control] dialog is displayed.
6
In this dialog, the conditions for generating warnings regarding Course Difference Limit, End of Track
Limit, and ECC Limit can be set up. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
Enter a threshold value for generating each warning.
19
Course difference limit:
20
Specify the difference between the planned course and own ship's bearing in angle, within a range 21
between 0.5 and 45.0°.
22
End of track limit:
Specify the time remaining to reach the destination so as to generate an alert for approaching to the 23
proximity of the final destination in a range between 3.0 to 6.0 min.
Memo 24
If “End Of Track” warning is not acknowledged for 30 seconds, the warning escalates to “Arrived
at LAST WPT” alarm.
25
ECC limit: APP A
Specify the time remaining to reach the wheel over point so as to generate an early course change
warning in a range between 3.0 and 6.0 min.
APP B
Memo
If “Early course change” warning is not acknowledged for 30 seconds, the warning escalates to
“Early course change” alarm.

15-11 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

15.7 Position Integrity Alert Generation
Conditions
When [Position Integrity] is selected in the classification pane, the [Position] dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, the generation condition of POSN(Deviation) warning, POSN(Jump) caution and HDOP
exceeded Maintenance Information can be set up.

15.7.1 Setting up the generation condition of the

POSN(Deviation) warning
Enter the following threshold values for generating the POSN(Deviation) warning.

Position Discrepancy Limit:

The difference in distances when two GPS positions are compared at every second is used as a
threshold value. Specify the difference in a range between 0.010 and 9.990 NM.

Note
Position Discrepancy Limit takes effect when two GPSs are installed.

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-12

 １
15.7.2 Setting up the generation condition of the 2
POSN(Jump) caution
3
Radius Limit (GPS):
The radius of a monitoring circle having the predicted position of a GPS 1 sec later at the center is 4
used as a threshold value. If the position actually measured is not within the time monitoring circle
5
specified in [Time Limit], it will be subjected to an alert. Specify the radius limit in a range between 10
and 100 m. 6
Radius Limit (DGPS):
7
The radius of a monitoring circle having the predicted position of DGPS 1 sec later at the center is used
as a threshold value. If the position actually measured is not within the time monitoring circle specified 8
in [Time Limit], it will be subjected to an alert. Specify the radius limit in a range between 10 and 100 m.

Time Limit:
9
The time during which the position actually measured by a GPS/DGPS deviates from the monitoring 10
circle is used as a threshold value. The time limit can be specified in a range between 1 and 29s.
11
12
15.7.3 Setting up the generation condition the HDOP 13
exceeded Maintenance Information
14
In the [HDOP Limit] combo box, select a threshold limit of HDOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision).
Select either one of [4], [10] and [20]. 15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

15-13 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

15.8 Setting up Alert Processing
When [AMS] is selected in the classification pane, the [AMS] dialog is displayed on the edit pane.
In this dialog, the time to activate the action at the next stage when acknowledge is not performed for
an alert can be set up.

Enter the wait time until an alert at the next stage is generated in [Time Limit].

Reactivation of Silenced Alert:

Category A/B Time Limit: 30 seconds.
Category C Time Limit: Set, within the range from 0 to 300s, the time required to reactivate the alert
sound that was silenced temporarily.

Transfer to BNWAS:
When a BNWAS (Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System) is connected, specify the time to transfer
an unacknowledged alert to the BNWAS in a range between 0 and 30s.

Repetition of UNACK Warning:

Specify the time to regenerate an unacknowledged alert as an audible warning in a range between 0
and 300s. A warning will be generated repeatedly until it is acknowledged. The default value is 60 s.

Note
This is not applicable to the following warnings according to the Standard (operation that is defined
in the IEC62065 (TCS) or IEC61174 (ECDIS) Standard). Warning are escalated to alarm, if warning
was not acknowledged for the following times.
- Early Course Change Warning, Actual Course Change Warning, End Of Track Warning and
Track Control Stopped Warning: 30 seconds (fixed)
- Outside Anchor Watch Area Warning: 120 seconds. (fixed)

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-14

 １
Responsibility Transfer:
When click the check box, display of responsibility transferred alert is switched to ON or OFF. 2
3
Display of Responsibility transferred alert: ON Display of Responsibility transferred alert: OFF 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

15-15 Section 15 Setting up Alerts

Section 15 Setting up Alerts 15-16
 １
Section 16 Setting up the Operation 2
Mode 3
4
16.1 Basic Operation of the [Settings] 5
Dialog Box
6
You can set up the operation mode in the [Settings] dialog box.
7
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 8
2 Click on the [Settings] button. 9
The [Settings] dialog box appears.
The [Settings] dialog box consists of the classification pane and the Edit pane. 10
Click on the Disclosure button (>>) to hide the classification pane. To show the classification
pane again, click on the Disclosure button (<<).
11
Title bar Scroll bar Disclosure button [X] (Close) button
12
13
Edit pane title 14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
Classification pane Edit pane

Display Example for the ECDIS

16-1 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 3 When all the classification panes are not displayed, drag the scroll bar upwards and
downwards.

Scroll bar

4 Click on the item you want to set up in the classification pane.

The setup dialog of the item you selected is displayed.

5 Set up in the Edit pane.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-2

 １
Classification pane display targets
The table below provides the descriptions of the classification panes that are displayed by 2
RADAR and ECDIS and the related sections.
Classification pane Related section
3
Signal Process (Basic) *1 16.2 Basic Settings for Radar Signal Processing 4
Signal Process *1 16.3 Settings of radar signal processing
5
Association 16.4 Setting up Association
Ship’s Dynamic Trait 16.5 Setting up Own Ship's Dynamic Trait 6
Filter 16.6 Setting up an AIS Filter
7
Target Track 16.7 Setting up Other Ship's Track Function to ON/OFF
Route 16.8 Setting up Parameter Values at Route Planning Creation 8
Autosail *2 16.9 Setting up Parameter Values for Automatic Sailing
9
Temporary Route 16.10 Setting up Parameter Values for Predicted Route
Chart 16.11 Setting Chart Operation 10
Logbook 16.12 Setting up Logbook 11
NAVTEX 16.13 Setting NAVTEX
General 16.14 Setting up Navigation Equipment
12
Color and Brightness 16.15 Setting up Color and Brightness 13
Sounds 16.16 Setting Sounds
Key Assignment 16.17 Setting up Key Assignment
14
Preferences 16.18 Setting Preferences Information 16
Screen capture 16.19 Setting up Screen Capture
16
*1 In case of JAN-5203, Radar option is not available by function restriction.
*2 In case of JAN-5203, automatic sailing option is not available by function restriction. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-3 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.2 Basic Settings for Radar Signal
Processing
Note
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction. Therefore the
setup is not available.

Select [Signal Process (Basic)] in the classification pane.

Set a basic processing method of radar signals in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Gain Rotate the dial to set the mode to the 0 to 100
receiving sensitivity adjustment
mode.
Sea (sea clutter Rotate the dial to set the mode to the 0 to 100
adjustment) sea clutter adjustment mode. MAN: Manually removes sea clutters.
By clicking on the dial in adjustment AUTO: Automatically removes sea
mode or clicking on the button next to clutters.
the slider, the mode can be switched
between manual (MAN) and
automatic (AUTO).

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-4

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Rain (rain/snow Rotate the dial to set the mode to the 0 to 100
2
clutter rain/snow clutter adjustment mode.
adjustment) By clicking on the dial in adjustment
MAN: Manually removes rain/snow
clutters.
3
mode or clicking on the button next to
the slider, the mode can be switched
AUTO: Automatically removes
rain/snow clutters.
4
between manual (MAN) and
automatic (AUTO). 5
IR Set up the IR (Interference Removal) Off
function. IR Low
6
IR Middle
7
IR High
Target Enhance Set up the Target Enhance function. ENH Off 8
ENH Level1
ENH Level2 9
ENH Level3
10
Echo Process Set up the Echo Process function. PROC Off
If the ship's heading cannot be 3 Scan CORREL 11
acquired, [PROC Off] is set. 4 Scan CORREL
5 Scan CORREL 12
Remain
Peak Hold 13
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-5 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.3 Settings of radar signal processing
Note
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction. Therefore the
setup is not available.

Note
Displayed when the radar display option is attached.

Select [Signal Process] in the classification pane.

Set various processing methods of radar signals in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Video Latitude Set up the gradation of the radar video. Narrow
Normal
Wide
Super Wide
Video Noise Set up to remove noise and signals which are Off
Rejection considered to be clutters of radar video. Level1(Low)
Level2(High)
Auto Dynamic Range When this is selected, the dynamic range is To enable: Select.
Control automatically adjusted. To disable: Clear.
Process Switch Specify a particular area and set up a mode for Off
performing video processing on the inside and Range Fix
outside of the particular area. AUTO

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-6

 2nd Process Mode Set up a processing mode used in the outside of the
particular area. This is enabled when other than [Off]
PROC Off
3Scan CORREL
１
is being selected in the Process Switch combo box. 4Scan CORREL
5Scan CORREL 2
Remain
Peak Hold 3
Process Switch Set up the boundary range of a particular area. 0.1 to 25.5 NM
Range Enabled when [Range Fix] is selected in the Process 4
Switch combo box.
Fast Target Detection When this item is enabled, high-speed moving targets To enable: Select. 5
that are suppressed by the scan correlation To disable: Clear.
processing can be detected more easily. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-7 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.4 Setting up Association
Select [Association] in the classification pane.
Set up TT/AIS in the setup dialog of the edit pane.
Make judgement on whether the AIS target and the tracked target are the same (identical target
judgement); if they are deemed the same target, an association symbol is displayed on them. At this
time, the symbol on the AIS target is automatically activated.

Note
If you don't want to perform an identical target judgement, or if you want to display hidden
symbols, turn the association setting to Off.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Association Turn On/Off the association setting. To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
TT/AIS Priority Select priority of association target AIS
display. TT
TT1/TT2 Priority Select priority of association target TT1
display. TT2

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-8

 １
16.5 Setting up Own Ship's Dynamic Trait 2
Select [Ship's Dynamic Trait] in the classification pane.
3
Set up own ship's dynamic trait in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 19
Reach Set up the distance to reach the turn. 0 to 2000 m
Turn Mode Set up the Turn mode. Radius
20
Rate
21
Radius Enter the radius of the turn rate. 0.10 to 2.00 NM
This is displayed when [Radius] is selected in 22
the [Turn Mode] box.
Rate Enter the speed of the turn rate. 20 to 720°/min 23
This is displayed when [Rate] is selected in
the [Turn Mode] box. 24
Acceleration Enter the rate of change of speed
(acceleration) of own ship's dynamic trait.
0.0 to 100.0 kn/mir 25
Deceleration Enter the rate of change of speed 0.0 to 100.0 kn/mir APP A
(deceleration) of own ship's dynamic trait.
APP B

16-9 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.6 Setting up an AIS/TT Filter
Select [Filter] in the classification pane.
Set up AIS/TT filter in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
When an AIS/TT filter is specified, targets in that area can be displayed with highest priority or only
targets in that area can be displayed.

Current display

Input boxes
(display when
created)

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

AIS When this is selected, filtering AIS target is To enable: Select.
performed in the operation mode being selected in To disable: Clear.
Filtering mode.
TT When this is selected, filtering external target is To enable: Select.
performed in the operation mode being selected in To disable: Clear.
Filtering mode.
Sector Filter When this is selected, the Sector Filter is displayed To enable: Select.
on the screen and filtering is performed in the To disable: Clear.
operation mode being selected in Filtering mode.
Start Angle Set up the starting angle of the Sector Filter. The 0.0 to 359.9°
angle value indicates the relative bearing based on
the ship’s heading as the reference. When entry is
confirmed, the entered value takes effect
immediately.
End Angle Set up the end angle of the Sector Filter. The angle 0.0 to 359.9°
value indicates the relative bearing based on the
ship’s heading as the reference. When entry is
confirmed, the entered value takes effect
immediately.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-10

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Ring Filter When this is selected, the Ring Filter is displayed on To enable: Select.
2
the dialog box and filtering is performed in the
operation mode being selected in Filtering mode.
To disable: Clear. 3
Distance Set up the distance of the Ring Filter. When entry is
confirmed, the entered value takes effect
0.0 to 120.0 NM 4
immediately.
5
Filtering Mode Select an operation mode of the AIS/TT filter. Display
Display: Targets cannot be displayed outside of the Priority 6
AIS/TT filter range.
Priority: Priority is determined within the range of 7
the AIS/TT filter and targets are displayed based on
the priority. 8
Creating a filter in the dialog 9
10
Creating a Sector Filter
11
6 Click on the [Sector] tab.

7 Click on [Make Target Filter].

12
The button is highlighted and the cursor mode is set to the Make Target Filter mode. 13
8 Move the cursor, place it on the starting angle of the Sector filter you want to set up,
14
and then click on it.

9 Move the cursor, place it on the end angle of the Sector filter you want to set up, and
16
then click on it. 16
Creating a Ring Filter 19
10 Click on the [Ring] tab. 20
11 Click on [Make Target Filter]. 21
The button is highlighted and the cursor mode is set to the Make Target Filter mode.
22
12 Move the cursor, place it on the distance of the Ring filter you want to set up, and then
click on it. 23
Note 24
When the AZ function is ON, a distance smaller than the outer arc of AZ cannot be set for the Ring
filter.
25
APP A
Memo
<Priority setting> APP B
• The sleeping target in the AIS/TT filter has a higher priority than the sleeping target outside of
the AIS/TT filter (preferentially displayed).
<AIS/TT Filter OFF>
• The sleeping target in the AIS/TT filter has the same prioirty as the sleeping target outside of
the filter.

16-11 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.7 Setting up Other Ship's Track Function
to ON/OFF
Select [Target Track] in the classification pane.
Set up other ship's track function to ON/OFF in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Target Track Function Turn On/Off the target track To enable: Select.
function. To disable: Clear.

Shortcuts
Click on any of the following shortcuts to display the related dialog box.

Shortcut Settings Dialog Box

View for Target Track [Target Track] dialog box
File Load/Save [File Manager] dialog box

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-12

 １
16.8 Setting up Parameter Values at Route 2
Planning Creation 3
Select [Route] in the classification pane.
Set up various settings at route planning creation in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
19
Set up the default values for routes to be created during route planning. 20
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 21
Route Mode Set up the route display mode.
Standard:The ordinary ECDIS route will be
Standard
NMEA
22
used.
NMEA:NMEA destination will be used.
23
XTD (PORT) Set up the cross track limit of the port side. 0.01 to 9.99 NM 24
XTD (STBD) Set up the cross track limit of the starboard 0.01 to 9.99 NM
side. 25
Arrival radius Set up the radius of the WPT (waypoint)
arrival circle.
0.01 to 9.99 NM
APP A
Speed Set up the planned speed. 1.0 to 99.9 kn APP B
Sail Set up sailing (RL (Rhumb Line) or GC (Great RL
Circle)). GC
Turning Radius Set up the turn radius. 0.10 to 9.99 NM
Time Zone Set up the time zone. -13:30 to +13:30

16-13 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Distance Calculation Set up the calculation method of the distance Straight
Mode between WPTs. with Turn

Straight: Calculates the distance between

WPTs linearly (red line).

WPT 3

WPT 1 WPT 2

With Turn: Calculates the distance between

WPTs using a predicted route (red
line).

WPT 3

WPT 1 WPT 2

Monitoring Set up the route monitoring method. Wheel-over Line, Arrival

Wheel-over Line: monitored by using Circle
Wheel-over line (WOL) along each WPT.
Arrival Circle: monitored by using the arrival
circle along each WPT.
The setting will be changed according to the
type of auto pilot during automatic sailing.
MAX Latitude Because a WPT cannot be entered at a 30°00.000' to 85°00.000'
latitude higher than the latitude you set up
when planning a route, this threshold is used
to check the latitude of the destination during
active route reception. If the threshold value
is abnormal, an active route will not be loaded
even if it is received.
When creating a GC leg, if a leg is positioned
over the latitude you set up, the composite
sailing will take effect automatically and the
leg will be divided into three segments.
(GC-RL-GC)
Minimum Leg Length Select a multiplier for determining the 1, 2, 4, 6, 8
for Limit Check "Minimum Leg Length" which will be used for
limit check.
Minimum leg length =
(Ship length) × Multiplier (τ multiplier)

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-14

 １
16.9 Setting up Parameter Values for 2
Automatic Sailing 3
Note 4
In case of JAN-5203, automatic sailing function is not available by function restriction. Therefore the
setup is not available. 5
6
Select [Autosail] in the classification pane.
Set up various settings of automatic sailing in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
7
8
Note
• Displayed when the automatic sailing option is attached. 9
• When PT900 is installed as auto pilot, [Autosail] is not displayed.
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Example of screen display under the following Example of screen display under the following
conditions: conditions: APP A
• Tokyo Keiki TCS Category C • Tokyo Keiki TCS Category B (old system)
• Tokyo Keiki TCS Category B (new system) • YDK TCS Category C APP B

16-15 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Tracking Gain Set up the tracking gain. This can be set up even during Low
automatic sailing. Middle
The tracking gain value specifies how quickly the ship High
will return to the original course when it has deviated
from the course.
You can select from three tracking gain settings of
[High], [Middle] and [Low].
For example, assume that the target gain value is being
set to "16 deg./NM" and the own ship is positioned at 1
NM right of the tracking gain.
In this case, specify the distance for the own ship to
approach the target at an angle of 16°.
If the distance between the own ship and the target
course is shortened, this angle will also be reduced.
When the own ship has reached the target course, the
angle will be the same as WP1 viewed from 0 of a
WPT, and the more the LD will be, the larger this angle
will get.
Note that you may lose the control of the helm
depending on the tracking gain value, so be careful with
the setting.
Drift Correction Set up the drift correction. This can be set up even None
during automatic sailing. High
When this is set to On (High/Middle/Low), control is Middle
performed considering the tide if the own ship's speed
Low
is 5 knots or faster.

Commanded
bearing Drift

Expected actual route

None: Off (Drift correction will not be performed.)

High: Drift correction will be performed. The drift
correction value is equivalent to the tidal vector
(100%).
Middle: Drift correction will be performed. The drift
correction value is 2/3 of the tidal vector.
Low: Drift correction will be performed. The drift
correction value is 1/3 of the tidal vector.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-16

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Dead Band (On/Off) Set up On/Off of the dead band. This can be set up To enable: Select.
2
even during automatic sailing.
To prevent yawing while navigation, it is necessary to
To disable: Clear. 3
provide dead bands at both sides of the current
course. 4
If the own ship is positioned within the dead band
course, the course will be fixed at [Track Course]. For 5
more details, see the following drawing.
6
Next WPT
7
Dead bands 8
Previous WPT Set heading
(parallel to the route) 9
Dead Band (setting Specify the dead band value. This can be set up even 0.001 to 0.999 NM
10
value) during automatic sailing.
11
Turning Gain Set up the turning gain. This can be set up even 0 to 4
during automatic sailing. 12
Display when the The turning gain represents how much the turning
TCS is radius will be changed according to the XTD when 13
changing the course.
• Tokyo Keiki TCS
Category C You can select the turning gain in a range from 0 to 4. 14
• Tokyo Keiki TCS • 0: Changes the course using the planned
Category B (new radius without depending on the XTD during 16
system) course change.
• 1 to 4: Changes the turning radius according to the 16
XTD during course change. (1 is the
weakest gain and 4 is the strongest gain.)
19
Shortcut 20
Click on the following shortcut to display the related dialog box. 21
Shortcut Settings Dialog Box
22
Alert for Track Control [Track Control] dialog box
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-17 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.10 Setting up Parameter Values for
Predicted Route
Select [Temporary Route] in the classification pane.
Set up various settings of predicted route in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Before starting automatic sailing, move own ship along the leg.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Pre Run Speed Set a planned ship speed of the temporary route to 0.0 to 99.9 kn
calculate the minimum leg length.
Pre Run Time Set a planned time of the temporary route to 1.0 to 30.0 min
calculate the minimum leg length.
Pre Run Distance Set a planned distance of the temporary route. 0.10 to 9.99 NM
Enter Angle Set an entrance angle of the temporary route. 30.0 to 90.0°
Turning Radius Set an initial turn radius of the temporary route. 0.10 to 1.00 NM
Planned ROT Set the predicted value of ROT(Rate of Turn). 9.5°/min～95.5°/min
Calculated from Pre Run Speed and Turning
Radius, when entering the value of Planned ROT,
the value of Turning Radius is calculated and
fluctuates.
XTD MAX Set the maximum XTD of the temporary route. 0.0 to 1.0 NM
Course Difference Set the difference of the leg bearing of the 0.5 ~ 45.0°
Limit predicted course and ship’s heading.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-18

 １
Memo
The minimum leg length is expressed in the following formula. 2
Minimum leg length = (planned ship speed of the temporary route × planned time of the temporary
route) + planned distance of the temporary route + reach
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-19 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.11 Setting Chart Operation
Select [Chart] in the classification pane.
Set chart operation in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-20

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Border Range Set up the range for the own ship in order to move the chart. 30 to 80 %
2
This is displayed only on the ECDIS screen.
3
• When the own ship is sailing in the direction of the arrow
in the figure below. 4
5
6
7
• If the border range you set up is 50%,
the screen display switches when the own ship reaches a 8
50% area from an edge of the screen.
9
10
11
• If the border range you set up is 70%,
12
the screen display switches when own ship reaches the
border range. 13
14
16
16
While the ECDIS screen is displayed, the own ship display 19
position is reset by switching RADAR Overlay from ON to
OFF under the following conditions: 20
• RADAR Overlay: ON
21
•
•
Motion mode: TM
Own ship position: Own ship is moving.
22
• Own ship display position: Edge of the chart display area 23
(position beyond the [Settings] – [Chart-Border Range]
setting) 24
This is because when RADAR Overlay is ON, the limit defined
in the Radar standards is prioritized over the ECDIS display 25
area limit.

Margin (Chart When head-up, if own ship turns at the angle specified here, 0 to 90°
APP A
Rotation) the chart will also turn. For example, if the margin is set to 10˚,
the chart will turn when own ship turns 10˚ or more. APP B
AUTO Set whether the chart is accepted automatically at completion Accepted
Accepting of chart import. automatically:
S-57 Updated Check
Chart Not accepted
automatically: Not
check

16-21 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Deletion Set the operation mode of the Delete button on the status Only S-63 Cell
Mode(Chart screen in Chart Maintenance. Permit
Maintenance) Only S-63 Cell Permit: When the Delete button is pressed, S-63 Cell Permit
only the license is deleted. and Chart
S-63 Cell Permit and Chart: When the Delete button is
pressed, the licence or chart is deleted.

Memo
The setting of Deletion Mode(Chart Maintenance) is valid only under S-63 (ENC that requires
Permit). Under S-57 (ENC that does not require Permit), the chart is also deleted regardless of this
setting.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-22

 １
16.12 Setting up Logbook 2
Select [Logbook] in the classification pane.
3
Set up various settings of logbook in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
[Logging Events] tab 16
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
19
At Noon When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved at 12:00 (LMT). To disable: Clear. 20
Every ([Logging Events]
tab)
When this is selected, log data is
saved at the interval specified in
<Check box>
To enable: Select.
21
the combo box.
To disable: Clear. 22
<Selections in the combo box>
1/3/5/10/15/30/60 min 23
Event Mark When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the EVENT button is To disable: Clear.
24
pressed.
Manual Position Fix When this is selected, the time, To enable: Select.
25
bearing, position, objects used
during manual position fixing in
To disable: Clear.
APP A
cross bearing or running fix are
saved. APP B

16-23 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Chart Manual Updating When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the chart is manually To disable: Clear.
updated.
Reference Point When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when a reference point is To disable: Clear.
set up.
System Start When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the system is started. To disable: Clear.
System Exit When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the system is shut To disable: Clear.
down.
Route Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when a route-related alert is To disable: Clear.
generated.
Chart Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when a chart-related alert is To disable: Clear.
generated.
AUTO Sail Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when an auto sail-related To disable: Clear.
alert is generated.
System Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when a system-related alert To disable: Clear.
is generated.
MOB Start/Stop When this item is enabled, MOB Enable: Check.
start and MOB stop are recorded. Disable: Uncheck.

[View Filter] tab

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
At noon When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved at 12:00 (LMT) are To disable: Clear.
displayed in the list.
Specified Period When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved at the interval specified in To disable: Clear.
[Logging] are displayed in the list.
Event Mark When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when the EVENT button To disable: Clear.
was pressed are displayed in the
list.
Manual Position Fix When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved during manual position To disable: Clear.
fixing in cross bearing or running
fix are displayed in the list.
Chart Manual Updating When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when the chart was To disable: Clear.
manually updated are displayed in
the list.
System Start When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when the system was To disable: Clear.
started are displayed in the list.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-24

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
System Exit When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
2
saved when the system was shut
down are displayed in the list.
To disable: Clear.
3
Route Alert When this is selected, the events
saved when a route-related alert
To enable: Select.
4
To disable: Clear.
was generated are displayed in
the list. 5
Chart Alert When this is selected, the events
saved when a chart-related alert
To enable: Select.
6
To disable: Clear.
was generated are displayed in
the list. 7
AUTO Sail Alert When this is selected, the events
saved when an auto sail-related
To enable: Select. 8
To disable: Clear.
alert was generated are displayed
in the list. 9
System Alert When this is selected, the events
saved when a system-related alert
To enable: Select. 10
To disable: Clear.
was generated are displayed in
the list.
11
Latest Display Days The days on which the items
saved in the Other event were
1 to 90 12
specified are displayed in a range
between 1 and 90.
13
MOB Start/Stop When this item is enabled, MOB Enable: Check. 14
start and MOB stop are displayed. Disable: Uncheck.
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-25 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.13 Setting NAVTEX
Select [NAVTEX] in the classification pane.
Set the display method for the NATVEX message that is displayed by clicking on the [NAVTEX] button
on the information reference window in the editing pane setting dialog.

Setting item Setting contents Setting value

Navigational Alarm Set highlighted display of the navigation Enable: Check
alarm. Disable: Uncheck
When the item is enabled, the message
is displayed with black characters on the
white background.
Weather Alarm Set highlighted display of the weather Enable: Check
alarm. Disable: Uncheck
When the item is enabled, the message
is displayed with black characters on the
white background.
Ice Warning Set highlighted display of the Ice Enable: Check
Warning. Disable: Uncheck
When the item is enabled, the message
is displayed with black characters on the
white background.
Search and Rescue Set highlighted display of the search and Enable: Check
Information rescue information. Disable: Uncheck
When the item is enabled, the message
is displayed with black characters on the
white background.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-26

 １
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Extended Navigational Set highlighted display of the navigation Enable: Check
2
Information alarm supplementary information.
When the item is enabled, the message
Disable: Uncheck 3
is displayed with black characters on the
white background. 4
[Display Filtering for
NAVTEX Messages]
When this button is clicked on, the
[Display Filtering for NAVTEX Messages]
- 5
button dialog is opened.
For details, refer to “Displaying only the
6
NAVTEX messages that satisfy a specific
condition”.
7
Display Filtering for
NAVTEX Receiver］
When this button is clicked on, the
[Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver]
8
button dialog is opened.
9
For details, refer to “Receiving only the
NAVTEX messages that satisfy a specific
condition”.
10
11
Displaying only the NAVTEX messages that satisfy a specific condition
When the [Display Filtering for NAVTEX Messages] button is clicked on, the [Display Filtering for
12
NAVTEX Messages] dialog is displayed. 13
In this dialog, NAVTEX messages to be displayed can be filtered.
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-27 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Station – Display Select a base station from which Enable: Check
Filtering messages are to be displayed. Disable: Uncheck
By checking the Display Filtering check
box, the check box of each base station
can be checked.
Select a required base station by
checking the check box.
Month/Year Only the messages that are received on Enable: Check
the selected month/year are displayed. Disable: Uncheck
Select a required month/year by checking
the check box.
Message – Display Select a type of the messages to be Enable: Check
Filtering displayed. Disable: Uncheck
By checking the Display Filtering check
box, the check boxes of message types
can be checked.
Select a required message type by
checking the check box.
Message – Filtering Whether to perform display filtering by Enable: Check
Depend on Position position is selected. Disable: Uncheck
By checking the Filtering Depend on
Position check box, you can select
detailed filtering conditions.
Message – Filtering Choose whether to perform display Enable: Check
Depend on Position – filtering by the distance from the ship's Disable: Uncheck
Range from Own Ship position.
When checked, filtering is performed by
the distance from the ship's position to
the set value of the Radius input box.
Message – Filtering Enter the distance of the filter from your 0.1~300 NM
Depend on Position – ship. 1.0~30.0 min
Radius Click the NM / min button to switch the
unit.
Message – Filtering Choose whether to perform display Enable: Check
Depend on Position – filtering by route selected during route
Disable: Uncheck
Crossing Monitoring monitoring.
Route When checked, filtering is carried out by
the route monitoring range.
Message – Filtering Choose whether to perform display Enable: Check
Depend on Position – filtering by route selected during route Disable: Uncheck
Crossing Planning planning.
Route When checked, filtering is carried out by
the route planning range.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-28

 １
Receiving only the NAVTEX messages that satisfy a specific condition
Click the Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver button to open the "Display Filtering for NAVTEX 2
Receiver" (NAVTEX Message Receive Filtering) dialog.
3
In this dialog, you can filter (narrow down) the displayed NAVTEX message.
4
1 Click the Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver button. 5
A dialog box labeled "Waiting for a response from the NAVTEX receiver" is displayed.
6
7
8
9
10
11
2 When the NAVTEX receiver is connected, open the "Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver"
dialog (NAVTEX Message Receive Filtering) dialog. 12
If there is no response from the NAVTEX receiver, a popup with "No response from NAVTEX 13
receiver" is displayed. When this popup is displayed, check the connection with the NAVTEX
receiver.
14
16
16
19
20
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
FREQUENCY Displaing NAVTEX frequency. RX(518 KHz) 21
Setting Type Select the setting type of the NAVTEX
receiver.
RX Station / Message Type
Setting
22
Printer Message Output Setting 23
INS Message Output Setting
Station – Display Choose from which base station to Enable: Check 24
Filtering receive and output messages. Disable: Uncheck
If you check the Display Filtering check 25
box, you can check the check box of
each base station. APP A
Next, check the check box of the desired
base station and select it. APP B

16-29 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Month/Year Only messages received at the selected Enable: Check
year / month are displayed. Disable: Uncheck
Check the check box of the desired year
and month and select it.
Message – Display Choose which type of message you want Enable: Check
Filtering to display. Disable: Uncheck
If you check the Display Filtering
checkbox, you can check the checkbox
of message type.
Next, select the check box of the kind of
the desired message and select it.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-30

 １
16.14 Setting up Navigation Equipment 2
Select [General] in the classification pane.
3
Set up various settings of navigation equipment in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
16
GYRO Setting Enter the initial value of the gyro. 0.0 to 359.9° 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-31 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.15 Setting up Color and Brightness
Select [Color and Brightness] in the classification pane.
Set the color and the brightness of the display contents in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
(1) (1) (1)

(2)

[1] [Def.] (default value) button

When this button is clicked on, all the setting items of the mode that is selected on the [Day/Night]
combo box are reset to the default values.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Day/Night Set up the color of the dialog box itself. Day1 [default]
Select the chart display colors from the Day2
three types of Day1, Day3 and Night when Day3
the ARCS is used. Dusk
Night
[Display Color] tab
Dialog Set up the color of the dialog. Dark [default]
Black
Character Set up the text color. White [default]
Green

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-32

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
[Display Color] tab
2
RADAR Video Set up the color of radar video. Yellow [default] 3
Displays the color of radar video only if it Green
has a RADAR display function. Orange 4
Purple
Dark Red
5
Target Symbol Set up the color of the target symbol. White/Black*1 6
Cyan
Green [default] 7
Orange
Range Rings Set up the color of range rings. White/Black*1
8
Cyan [default]
9
Green
Orange 10
EBL1/VRM1/PI Set up the color of EBL1, VRM1 and White/Gray*1
parallel index lines. Cyan 11
Green
Orange [default]
12
EBL2/VRM2 Set up the color of EBL2 and VRM2. White/Gray*1 [default] 13
Cyan
Green 14
Orange
Own Set up the color of own ship symbol, White/Black*1 [default]
16
Symbol/HL/Vector heading line and vector. Cyan 16
Green
Orange 19
ALL GPS Buoy Set up the color of all GPS Buoy symbols. White/Black*1 [default]
Set up the same color for all GPS buoy Gray /Amber /Magenta /Blue
20
symbols. /Cyan /Green /Yellow /Orange
/Dark Red 21
Individual Select a color for each GPS buoy. White/Black/Gray /Amber 22
Set up the GPS Buoy 1 to 10, Other /Magenta /Blue /Cyan /Green
respectively. /Yellow /Orange /Dark Red 23
[Brightness] tab
Level1(Dark) [default of Day 3]
24
Character Set up the text brilliance.
Level2 [default of Day 2, Dusk] 25
Level3 [default of Day 1]
Level4(Light) [default of Night] APP A
RADAR Video Set up the brilliance of radar video. Level1(Dark)
Level2
APP B
Level3
Level4(Light) [default]

16-33 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
[Brightness] tab
Target Symbol Set up the brilliance of the target symbol. Level0(Dark)
Level1
Level2
Level3
[default of DAY3/Dusk/Night]
Level4(Light)
[default of Day1/2]
Range Rings Set up the brilliance of range rings. Level1(Dark)
Level2 [default of Night]
Level3 [default of DAY3/Dusk]
Level4(Light) [default of
Day1/2]
EBL/VRM/PI Set up the brilliance of EBL, VRM and Level1(Dark)
parallel index lines. Level2
Level3 [default of
DAY3/Dusk/Night]
Level4(Light) [default of
Day1/2]
Own Set up the brilliance of own ship symbol, Level1(Dark)
Symbol/HL/Vector heading line and vector. Level2
Level3 [default of
DAY3/Dusk/Night]
Level4(Light) [default of
Day1/2]
Panel Set the brightness of the operation unit. Off
Level1(Dark)
[Default value of Dusk/Night]
Level2
[Default value of Day3]
Level3
[Default value of Day2]
Level4(Light)
[Default value of Day1]
Display Set the value that is input in the box for the 0 to 100*2
brightness of the display unit.
*1: Under either of the following conditions, Black or Gray can be selected instead of White.
- ENC is displayed while [Day/Night] is set to Day1 or Day2.
- ARCS is displayed while [Day/Night] is set to Day.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-34

 １
*2: The brightness default values are as follows
2
26inch screen 19inch screen
Day1/Day2/Day3: 67 Day1/Day2/Day3: 42 3
Dusk: 60 Dusk: 20
Night: 11 Night: 4
4
5
(2) Next botton
It is displayed when the GPS buoy is available. 6
When you click the second page is displayed, you can set the color of the GPS buoy.
If it is disabled, it will be hidden.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-35 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.16 Setting Sounds
Select [Sounds] in the classification pane.
Set up the volumes of the operation sounds and error sounds and alarm melody in the setting dialog of
the edit pane.
When the volume or melody is to be changed, the volume can be set while listening to the sound since
the selected volume or melody is played back.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-36

 １
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
[Volume] tab
2
Key ACK Set the volume of the sound emitted when
the key is pressed.
Off 3
Level1(Soft)
Level2 4
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud) 5
Misoperation Set the volume of the operation error sound. Off
Level1(Soft)
6
Level2 7
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud) 8
Response/Notification Set the volume of the control response sound Off
to external equipment and control completion Level1(Soft)
9
notification sound (including the interswitch
control) from external equipment.
Level2
10
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud) 11
Message Notification Set the volume of the message notification Off
sound. Level1(Soft) 12
Level2
Level3 [Default]
13
Level4(Loud)
14
Alert Setting Set the volume of the sound notifying that the Off
Reminder alarm condition has not been set. Level1(Soft) 16
Level2
Level3 [Default] 16
Level4(Loud)
19
Alarm Set the volume of the alarm sound.*1 Level4(Loud)
Warning Set the volume of the warning sound.*1 Level4(Loud) 20
[Melody] tab
21
Alarm Set the melody of the alarm. Sound1
Sound2[Default] 22
Sound3
Sound4 23
Warning Set up the melody of Warning. Sound1 24
Sound2[Default]
Sound3 25
Sound4
*1 For these volumes, only Level 4 (Loud) is able to be selected.
APP A
APP B

16-37 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.17 Setting up Key Assignment
Select [Key Assignment] in the classification pane.
Set the keys in the operation unit and the function assigned to the [MULTI] dial in the setting dialog of
the edit pane.
Only those items of the functions that can be specified in the task dialog are displayed.

The [User Keys] and [AZ Key] tabs are displayed only when the optional operation unit is installed.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

[User Keys] tab
DISP Off Key Select a function to assign to the DISP Off key on -
the operation unit.
[DISP Off Key] is displayed only when the
optional operation unit is installed.
It will be not displayed on the AMS screen.
User Key 1 Select a function to assign to the USER1 key on Show Preset Menu
the operation unit. Capture Screen
[User Key 1] is displayed only when the optional
Change Active Panel (ARCS)
operation unit is installed.
Load Low Resoluion (ARCS)
User Key 2 Select a function to assign to the USER2 key on Show Preset Menu
the operation unit. Capture Screen
[User Key 2] is displayed only when the optional
Change Active Panel (ARCS)
operation unit is installed.
Load Low Resoluion (ARCS)

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-38

 １
Below is a list of functions that can be assigned to User Keys.
2
Function name Function description 3
Show Preset Menu The screen registered separately is displayed.
Capture Screen Get screen capture. 4
Change Active Panel Displays the boundary of the chart.
5
It can be set only when ARCS is used.
Load Low Resolution Change to low resolution. 6
It can be set only when ARCS is used.
7
8
Below is a list of screens that can be assigned to Show Preset Menu.
9
Screen name 10
Route Planning
Route Monitoring 11
Anchor Watch
Manual Position Fix
12
Cursor Readout 13
View - Option
Alert 14
Settings
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-39 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
[Multi Dial] tab
Vector Time When this is selected, the vector length setup To enable: Select.
function will be manipulated with the [MULTI] To disable: Clear.
control.
C UP Angle When this is selected, the course adjustment To enable: Select.
function in the course-up mode will be To disable: Clear.
manipulated with the [MULTI] control.
Own Track Color When this is selected, the own ship track color To enable: Select.
switch function will be manipulated with the To disable: Clear.
[MULTI] control.
Display When this is selected, the display brightness Always enabled.
Brightness adjustment function will be manipulated with the
[MULTI] control.
It cannot be changed since power is always on.
Panel When this is selected, the operation unit To enable: Select.
Brightness brightness adjustment function will be To disable: Clear.
manipulated with the [MULTI] control. This item
is always displayed.
Gain When this is selected, the gain adjustment To enable: Select.
function will be manipulated with the [MULTI] To disable: Clear.
control
When the RADAR function can be used, the item
will be displayed.
Sea When this is selected, the sea adjustment To enable: Select.
function will be manipulated with the [MULTI] To disable: Clear.
control
When the RADAR function can be used, the item
will be displayed.
Rain When this is selected, the rain adjustment To enable: Select.
function will be manipulated with the [MULTI] To disable: Clear.
control
When the RADAR function can be used, the item
will be displayed.
[AZ Key] tab
AZ 1 When this is selected, AZ1 can be turned On/Off To enable: Select.
by pressing the AZ key. To disable: Clear.
All checked items can be turned On/Off at once
by pressing the AZ key.
AZ 2 When this is selected, AZ2 can be turned On/Off To enable: Select.
by pressing the AZ key. To disable: Clear.
All checked items can be turned On/Off at once
by pressing the AZ key.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-40

 １
16.18 Setting Preferences Information 2
Select [Preferences] in the classification pane.
3
The main operation/setting information relating to each task of RADAR and ECDIS can be stored and
called collectively. 4
5
6
Mark to show loaded
preferences
7
Preferences Name list
8
9
10
11
Load the selected
preferences.
12
Save the current preferences. Delete button
Reset the displayed 13
preferences to the default
values.
14
16
16
A maximum of 10 preferences names are displayed in the Preferences Name list. If all the file name
19
characters do not fit in the display area, the remaining file name characters will be displayed with an
abbreviation symbol (...). 20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-41 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

To save a preferences

1 Click on the [Save] button.

The confirmation dialog box appears.

2 Enter a preferences name, and then click on the [OK] button.

The current preferences are saved.
A maximum of 64 characters can be entered for a file name. If all the file name characters do
not fit in the display area, the remaining file name characters will be displayed with an
abbreviation symbol (...).
To cancel saving, click on the [Cancel] button.

When saving is completed, an item is added to a blank line in the Preferences Name list.

To load preferences

1 Select the name of the preferences you want to load, and then click on the [Load]
button.
The confirmation dialog box appears.

2 Click on the [OK] button.

The selected preferences are loaded.
A maximum of 64 characters can be entered for a file name. If all the file name characters do
not fit in the display area, the remaining file name characters will be displayed with an
abbreviation symbol (...).
To cancel loading, click on the [Cancel] button.

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-42

 １
To delete preferences
2
1 Select the name of the preferences you want to delete, and then click on the [Delete]
button. 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The confirmation dialog box appears. A maximum of 64 characters can be entered for a file
name. If all the file name characters do not fit in the display area, the remaining file name
10
characters will be displayed with an abbreviation symbol (...).
11
2 Click on the [OK] button.
The selected preferences are deleted.
12
To cancel deleting, click on the [Cancel] button. 13
14
To set up default display

1 Click on the [Default Setting] button.

16
The confirmation dialog box appears. 16
19
20
21
2 Click on the [OK] button. 22
The display configurations are changed to the default values.
23
To cancel changing, click on the [Cancel] button.
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-43 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

Items of preferences and default display configurations
The items of preferences and default display configurations are shown in the tables below.

Task "Route monitoring"

Preferences save target Factory setting value, value

Item saved and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed
Display Chart Information Area Display category Standard Display
category
Range Chart Information Area Either selection scale or Range 3 NM
selection range
Orientation ECDIS screen • Motion mode True motion
- Chart Information Area • Bearing mode North-up
TM reset value
position Common screen Position source Continuation
sensor - Own Ship Information
or
Maintenance screen
- Sensor Selection
Past track View Past Track display Past Track display On/Off:
- Options - Own Track On/Off On
Plot Color Plot Color: White (Black) *1
Track Period Track Period: 12h
Time Label display Time Label display On/Off:
On/Off On
Time Label Interval Time Label Interval: 30min
Past Position display Past Position display
On/Off On/Off: Off
Past Position Interval Past Position Interval:
0.5min
Look-ahead Alert Area(Rectangle) Area(Rectangle) function
time - Look-ahead function On/Off On/Off: On
Rectangle Length value Rectangle Length value:
6min
Rectangle Length unit Rectangle Length unit:
min
Rectangle Width value Rectangle Width value:
65.6m
Area(Sector) function Area(Sector) function
On/Off On/Off: On
Sector Width value Sector Width value: 45.0º
Specail Alert Priority Priority: Caution
Condition －Specail Condition Area
Area
Repetition of Alert Repetition of UNACK Time Limit: 60s
UNACK －AMS Warning
Warning
Area View Area boundary Plain
Boundary - Options - Chart Common

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-44

 １
Preferences save target Factory setting value, value
Item saved
Location Item
and action when Set 2
Default button is pressed
Depth View • Safety Depth • Safety Depth: 3
- Options - Chart Common

• Safety Contour *2
Continuation
• Safety Contour:
4
Continuation 5
• Four shades • Four shades: Off
• Shallow Pattern • Shallow Pattern: Off 6
• Shallow Water • Shallow Water Dangers:
Dangers On
7
Chart
Symbol
View
- Options - Chart Common
• Chart Symbol • Chart Symbol: Paper 8
Chart
• Full Light Line • Full Light Line: Off 9
• Consider Scale • Consider Scale Minimum:
Minimum Off
10
Redraw Setting • Border Range • Border Range:80 11
－Chart
Display of View View1 View1 12
charts - Options - Chart Display
(ECDIS)
• Chart Type • Remain
13
• Text Size • Text Size: 5
• Group Layer • Group Layer: On 14
• Layer (Each item) • Layer: [S]unknown is ON.
Objects below are all
16
OFF: 16
[A]Accuracy
[A]Contour label 19
[A]Highlight date
dependent 20
[A]Highlight info
21
[A]Highlight document
[-]Update Review 22
[A]Nautical publication
information 23
• Text: National Language
• Text (Each item)
is remain、Important text 24
is On、another objects are
Off 25
View2 View2
• Text Size • Each item: same setting APP A
• Group Layer as View 1
APP B
• Layer (Each item)
• Text (Each item)

16-45 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Preferences save target Factory setting value,
Item saved value and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed
Unit View • Current Speed • Current Speed: Kn
－OptionsーUnit • Wind Speed • Wind Speed: Kn
• Depth • Depth: m

Own Ship View • Sea stabilized vector • Sea stabilized vector:

－OptionsーOwn Ship On
• Type • Type: Simplified Symbol
• Time • Time: 6min
Sub Information View • Show Sub • Show Sub Information
Area －Options－Control Information Window Window: Off
AIO / T&P View • All AIO Object • All AIO Object: Off
－Options－AIO / T&P • All T&P Object • All T&P Object: Off
Chart Chart • Enable Date • Enable Date Dependent
－Date Dependent View Dependent View View: Off
Dangerous View • Graphical Indication • Graphical Indication for
objects highlight －OptionsーGraphical for the Charted the Charted Feature
Indication Feature object object:On
• Crossing Safety • Crossing Safety
Contour Contour:On
• Navigational Hazards • Navigational
Hazards:On
• Prohibited Areas and • Prohibited Areas and
Areas with Special Areas with Special
Conditions Conditions:On
Target past View • Other shipping routes • Other shipping routes:
position －Options－Own Track Off
Settings for Settings－Route • XTD(PORT) • XTD(PORT): Remain
Route Edit • XTD(STBD) • XTD(STBD): Remain
• Max Latitude • Max Latitude: 85°
Brightness Settings－General－ • Display • Day1/2/3: 67
Color and Broghtness－ • Dusk: 60
Brightness
• Night: 11
Chart Auto Settings－Chart • AUTO Accepting S-57 • Off
Acception Updated Chart
Vector(T) length ECDIS－Bottom bar • Vector(T) • 6min
input box
Cursor ECDIS－Cursor Readout • Distance unit • Distance unit: NM
MOB ECDIS • Distance unit • Distance unit: NM
－Right Toolbar
－MOB

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-46

 １
Preferences save target Factory setting value,
Item saved
Location Item
value and action when Set 2
Default button is pressed
NAVTEX filter Settings－NAVTEX－ • Station－Display • Station－Display 3
Display Filtering for
NAVTEX Messages
Filtering
• Station ID
Filtering: Off
• Station ID:Remain
4
• Month/Year • Month/Year:All On 5
• Message－Display • Message－Display
Filtering Filtering: Off 6
• Message ID • Message ID: Remain
Filtering Depend on Filtering Depend on
7
Position Position: Off 8
*1 White/Black interchanges under the following conditions. 9
In Day1/Day2 (or Day), Black, in Day3/Dusk/Night, White
10
*2 When the preferences is loaded and the value of the Safety Contour that is less than the MIN 11
Safety Contour, the value of the MIN Safety Contour is used as the Safety Contour.
Also, the value of the Safety Contour saved for the preferences is not overwrite. 12
For details about how to set the Own ship's parameters, refer to "17.3.4 Setting own ship's
parameters".
13
14
16
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

16-47 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Task "Collision avoidance"

Preferences save target Factory setting value, value

Item saved and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed
Automatic Alert • AZ1 function On/Off • AZ1 function On/Off: Off
radar target - New Target Alarm • AZ1 Start Angle value • AZ1 Start Angle value:
acquisition
315.0º
• AZ1 End Angle value • AZ1 End Angle value:
045.0º
• AZ1 Start Distance • AZ1 Start Distance value:
value 3.00NM
• AZ1 End Distance • AZ1 End Distance value:
value 3.50NM
• AZ2 function On/Off • AZ2 function On/Off: Off
• AZ2 Start Angle value • AZ2 Start Angle value:
135.0º
• AZ2 End Angle value • AZ2 End Angle value:
225.0º
• AZ2 Start Distance • AZ2 Start Distance value:
value 3.00NM
• AZ2 End Distance • AZ2 End Distance value:
value 3.50NM
Graphical View • AIS Symbol display • AIS Symbol display
AIS reported - Options - Target On/Off On/Off: On
target display
Radar and Settings • Association function On
AIS Target - TT/AIS - Association On/Off
fusion
AIS Filter Settings－TT/AIS • Sector Filter • Off
Common－Filter • Ring Filter • On
• Ring Filter－Distance • 6.00NM

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-48

 １
Another default settings (excepts preference) are below.
Default Setting target Factory setting value, 2
Default Setting
value and action when Set
Item Location Item Default button is pressed 3
Radar image
Overlay
ECDIS－Bottom bar • Radar Echo Image Radar echo image: Off
4
AIS function
button
ECDIS－Bottom bar • AIS display On/Off • AIS display: Off 5
TT1/TT2 function ECDIS－Bottom bar • TT1/TT2 display • TT1/TT2 display: On 6
button On/Off
Multi View View • Multi view window • Multi view window other 7
－Multiview other than Single than Single View
8
View window window:
• Single View 9
Edit User Chart User Chart Editor • Edit dialog • Edit dialog: Exit
Edit Manual Manual Update Editor • Edit dialog • Edit dialog: Exit
10
Update
11
Route planning Route planning dialog • Edit dialog • Edit dialog: Exit
Route monitoring Route monitoring dialog • Route monitoring • Re-Load latest Route 12
start File
• Route monitoring • Route monitoring dialog:
13
dialog Close 14
• Voyage Information • Voyage Information:
Move to bottom-right 16
Cursor Readout Cursor Readout • Cursor Readout • Move to bottom-right
• Open
16
MOB MOB • Cursor Readout • Move to bottom-right 19
Display of charts View • Chart Load • AUTO
－Options－Chart 20
Display
21
Chart Chart Maintenance • Chart Maintenance • Chart Maintenance
Maintenance dialog dialog: Exit 22
Selftest Maintenance • Diagnosis dialog • Diagnosis dialog: Exit
－Diagnosis 23
CONNING block Common Information • CONNING block • CONNING block
24
Window overlay overlay: Exit
Chart 1 ECDIS display • Chart drawing • Chart drawing 25
(Chart 1 chart) (Chart 1 chart): Exit
APP A
APP B

16-49 Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode

16.19 Setting up Screen Capture
Select [Screen Capture] in the classification pane.
Set up the various settings of the screen captures in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

AUTO Capture Set up the interval at which the Screen 0 to 999 min
Interval Capture dialog box is automatically
saved. If this is set to 0, the Screen
Capture dialog box will not automatically
be saved.
AUTO File Erase Specify whether or not to delete the To enable: Select.
screen shot file automatically. To disable: Clear.

Shortcut Settings Dialog Box

File Management [File Management] dialog box

Section 16 Setting up the Operation Mode 16-50

 １
Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up 2
Equipment (for Services) 3
This section describes the methods for radar adjustment, installation verification, and maintenance that
4
are conducted by the service staff by using the Service menu at installation construction of this 5
equipment.
6
7
8
Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel.
9
Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation, and this may lead to
accidents or equipment failure. 10
Do not make any adjustments during navigation. 11
Failure may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may
lead to accidents or equipment failure.
12
13
14
17.1 Service Menu 15
The Service menu consists of three submenus of Adjustment, Installation and Maintenance. To display
the Service menu, a password is required. 16
17
17.1.1 To display the Service menu: 18
1 Click on the [MENU] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-1 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

 2 Change over to the second page using the page switching button, and click the [Code
Input] button.
The password input dialog is displayed.

3 Enter 0 in Password.

4 Click on the [MENU] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

5 Change to the 2nd page by using the page change button.

The [Service] button is added.

6 Click on the [Service] button.

The submenu is displayed.

7 Display a submenu dialog box by clicking on one of the [Adjustment], [Installation],

and [Maintenance] buttons.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-2

 １
17.2 Radar Adjustment 2
Note
3
In case of JAN-5203, overlay function is not available by function restriction. Therefore the 4
setup is not available.
5
6
Use the [Adjustment] dialog box to adjust the radar of this equipment.
7
17.2.1 Displaying the [Adjustment] dialog box 8
Clicking the [Adjustment] button in the submenu displays the [Adjustment] dialog box.
9
The [Adjustment] dialog box consists of the classification pane and the edit pane.
By clicking the Disclosure button (>>), you can hide the edit pane. To show the edit pane again, click 10
the Disclosure button (<<).
11
Disclosure button
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
Classification pane Edit pane
22
[Adjustment] dialog box 23
24
1 Click the item you want to set up in the classification pane.
The setup dialog of the item you selected appears in the edit pane. 25
2 Set up in the edit pane. APP A
APP B

17-3 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.2.2 Performing basic adjustments on the radar
Perform basic adjustments on the radar by using the [Basic Adjustment] dialog.

17.2.2.1 Displaying the [Basic Adjustment] dialog

When you select [Basic Adjustment] in the classification pane, the [Basic Adjustment] dialog is
displayed in the edit pane.

17.2.2.2 Adjusting the bearing

Adjust the bearing so that the bearing of the target measured by the compass on the ship and the
bearing of the image that is displayed on the radar match.

Note
This function is disabled when the radar interswitch is set to the Slave mode.

1 Set the bearing mode to [H UP] and set the image processing mode to [Process Off].
For the bearing mode setting method, refer to "6.6.2 Setting Bearing mode (S-57/C-MAP only)".

2 Measure a bearing in the ship's heading direction of a suitable target (for instance,
halted ship, breakwater, and buoy) by using the compass on the ship.

3 Click on the [Bearing Adjustment] input box.

A numeric value input keyboard is displayed.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-4

 １
4 Input an adjustment value in the input box so that the bearing of the target that was 2
measured in Step 2 indicates a correct bearing. (0 to 359.9°)
For the method of using the numeric input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of each 3
section of the keyboard".
4
5
17.2.2.3 Adjusting a distance
6
Adjust the distance of the target on the screen so that the correct distance is displayed.
7
1 On the screen, specify a target whose distance is available in advance.

2 Click on the [Range Adjustment] input box.

8
A numeric value input keyboard is displayed. 9
3 Enter an adjustment value in the input box so that the distance of the target specified
10
in Step 1 indicates the correct distance. (128 to 1024)
For the method of using the numeric input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of each 11
section of the keyboard".
12
13
17.2.3 Adjusting Antenna Height
14
Adjust the antenna by using the [TXRX] dialog.
15
When you select [TXRX] in the classification pane, the [TXRX] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-5 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

 1 Measure the height from the sea surface to the radar antenna.

2 In the [Antenna height] combo box, select the setting value corresponding to the
height of the antenna that was measured in step 1.
• Under 5 m
• 5-10 m
• 10-20 m
• 20 m Over

17.2.4 Adjusting MBS

MBS (Main Bang Suppression) adjustment is to adjust a display unit processing circuit in order to
suppress main bang, which is the reflection signal from a microwave transmission circuit of a
waveguide that normally appears as an image of a circle at the center of the radar screen.
Perform MBS adjustment by using the [MBS] dialog.

Do not change Initial Level/Area Offset unless absolutely necessary.

Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and
thus collisions may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

17.2.4.1 Displaying the [MBS] dialog

When you select [MBS] in the classification pane, the [MBS] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-6

 １
17.2.4.2 Performing MBS adjustment
2
1 Click on the [Initial Level] (MBS initial level) input box.
A numeric value input keyboard is displayed. 3
2 Enter an initial level of MBS so that the image of main bang becomes optimum (faint 4
image remains on the screen. (0 to 1023)
For the method of using the numeric input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Names and functions of 5
the sections of the keyboard".
6
17.2.4.3 Adjusting a MBS application range 7
1 Expand the display range up to the range where a main bang can be identified. 8
2 Click the [Area Offset] (MBS application) input box.
9
A numerical value input keyboard is displayed.

3 Adjust the application range so that the main bang adjustment range becomes the
10
optimum (distance where only the main bang section becomes the MBS adjustment 11
range) (-0.200NM ~ 0.200NM).
Adjust the range together with the MBS adjustment to the degree where the nearest target will 12
not be lost.
For the method of using the numerical value input keyboard, refer to “3.16.2 Name and
13
Function of Each Section of the Keyboard”. 14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-7 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3 Verifying Installation and Initial Setting
Use the [Installation] dialog box to verify the installation of this equipment and perform initial setting.

17.3.1 Displaying the [Installation] dialog box

Clicking on the [Installation] in the submenu, the [Installation] dialog box appears.
The [Installation] dialog box consists of the classification pane and the edit/result pane. The
classification pane consists of two-level layers of the first classification pane and the second
classification pane.

First classification
pane

Edit/Result pane

Second classification pane

1 Click the item you want to set up in the classification pane.

The setup dialog of the item you selected is displayed in the edit/result pane.

2 Set up in the edit/result pane or check the setup result.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-8

 １
17.3.2 Verifying/Setting CCRP (Consistent Common
2
Reference Point)
3
Set a measurement reference position (CCRP) on own ship by using the [CCRP] dialog.
4
17.3.2.1 Displaying the [CCRP] dialog
5
When you select [System Configuration] in the first classification pane and [CCRP] in the second
classification pane, the [CCRP] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Note 18
Set up the GPS radar antenna correctly. The latitude and longitude data received from the GPS is
compensated and then displayed as own ship's latitude and longitude. If the GPS radar antenna is 20
not set up correctly, an AIS symbol and a radar echo may deviate when displayed.
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-9 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.2.2 Setting CCRP
Set the following items in the [CCRP] dialog.
Setting Item
Length (of ship)
Beam (ship's width)
GPSx
(When two or more
GPS units are present,
"x" indicates the unit
number.)
Radar Antennas1 to 8
(equipment positions of
radar antennas1 to 8)
CCRP1/2/3/4
Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)
Description of Setting Setting Value
Enter the ship's length in the box. 1.0 to 1022.0m
Enter the ship's width in the box. 1.0 to 126.0m
Enter the equipment positions of GPSx in the Changes depending on the
boxes. value of [Length] and [Beam].
X: Horizontal axis position on the ship of the If Length=a and Beam=b:
applicable GPS (Center: 0) X -b/2 to b/2
Y: Front-back axis position on the ship of the Y 0.0 to a
applicable GPS (Stern: 0) For example,
• if Length=1.0 and Beam=1.0:
Note
X -0.5 to 0.5
• This item may not be displayed depending on the
Y 0.0 to 1.0
equipment setting. • if Length=700.0 and
• When the input range is changed by modifying Beam=70.0:
[Length] and [Beam], if a value exceeding the X -35.0 to 35.0
input range after modifying has already been Y 0.0 to 700.0
entered, the value will be corrected to the
maximum or minimum value.
Enter the equipment positions of Radar Antennas1
to 8 in the boxes.
X: Horizontal axis position of radar antennas 1 to 8
on the ship (Center: 0)
Y: Front-back axis position of radar antennas 1 to 8
on the ship (Stern: 0)
Note
• If "No Equipment" is specified in the [DipSW]
settings of the interswitch unit, this is not
displayed.
• When the input range is changed by modifying
[Length] and [Beam], if a value exceeding the
input range after modifying has already been
entered, the value will be corrected to the
maximum or minimum value.
Enter the positions of CCRP1 to CCRP4 of the
ship in the boxes.
X: Horizontal axis position of CCRP1/2/3/4 on the
ship (Center: 0)
Y: Front-back axis position of CCRP1/2/3/4 on the
ship (Stern: 0)
Note
When the input range is changed by modifying
[Length] and [Beam], if a value exceeding the input
range after modifying has already been entered,
the value will be corrected to the maximum or
minimum value.
17-10
 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Radio button on the left Select the position to be used as the ship's CCRP CCRP1 2
side of each CCRP by clicking the applicable button. CCRP2
CCRP3 3
CCRP4
Anchor1 An anchor position can be set as an offset from the If Length=a and Beam=b: 4
stern center. X -b/2 to b/2
It can not be set outside the boat. Y 0.0 to a 5
6
X: The horizontal axis position on the shipboard of
Anchor 1 (center is 0)
Y: Front-rear axis position on the shipboard of
Anchor 1 (stern is 0)
7
Anchor2 An anchor position can be set as an offset from the
stern center.
If Length=a and Beam=b:
X -b/2 to b/2
8
It can not be set outside the boat.
X: The horizontal axis position on the shipboard of
Y 0.0 to a
9
Anchor 2(center is 0)
10
Y: Front-rear axis position on the shipboard of
Anchor 2 (stern is 0) 11
Speed Position Bow Enter the distance to the bow starboard/port speed 0.0 to Ship’s length m
display point. 12
Speed Position Stern Enter the distance to the stern starboard/port 0.0 to Ship’s length m
speed display point. 13
Synchronizing setting 14
The [CCRP] dialog enables common setting items and individual setting items for RADAR, ECDIS, and
15
Conning (called a task station individually). Once common items are set in any of the task stations,
RADAR, ECDIS, and Conning, the settings are reflected (synchronized) in other task stations. 16
By setting common items in the state where all the task stations are active, the common setting items
are synchronized in all the task stations. 17
18
17.3.3 Setting a Serial Port 20
Verify the setting of the serial port of this equipment and perform initial setting by using the [Serial Port] 21
dialog.
22
Synchronizing setting 23
The [Serial Port] dialog enables common setting items and individual setting items for RADAR, ECDIS,
and Conning (called a task station individually). Once common items are set in any of the task stations, 24
RADAR, ECDIS, and Conning, the settings are reflected (synchronized) in other task stations.
By setting common items in the state where all the task stations are active, the common setting items
25
are synchronized in all the task stations. APP A
APP B

17-11 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.3.1 Displaying the [Serial Port] dialog
When you select [System Configuration] in the first classification pane and [Serial Port] in the second
classification pane, the [Serial Port] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.

Tab name
display

17.3.3.2 [Diagnosis] lamp light colors

The [Diagnosis] lamp indicates the diagnosis result on whether or not the sentence of the sensor
specified for each serial port has been received successfully and the status of ISW/MTR/Serial OPU.
Lit in red: Data not received.
Lit in green: Data is receiving.
Lit in orange: In diagnosis (before decision).
No color: Serial port is disabled.

17.3.3.3 Setting a serial port

In the [Serial Port] dialog, allocate the sensors to be connected for the serial port on CCU (Central
Control Unit) and the serial port on SLC/ALC.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-12

 １
Setting a serial port on the CCU
Set each item as follows. 2
"Table A: Sensors that can be selected by serial ports on CCU" shows selectable sensors.
However, the sensors that actually can be selected vary depending on the equipment setting.
3
For the sensor communication speed, refer to "Selectable baud rates". 4
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 5
Gyro 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the
Gyro.
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
6
2. Select a sensor to be connected to the serial port for
7
Gyro from the [Sensor] combo box. When not
selecting a sensor, set [ - ]. 8
LOG 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the To enable: Select.
LOG. To disable: Clear. 9
2. Select a sensor to be connected to the serial port for
LOG from the [Sensor] combo box. When not 10
GPS
selecting a sensor, set [ - ].
1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the To enable: Select.
11
GPS. To disable: Clear. 12
2. Select a sensor to be connected to the serial port for
the GPS from the [Sensor] combo box. When not 13
selecting a sensor, set [ - ].
AIS 1. Select the check box and enable the serial port for the To enable: Select. 14
AIS. To disable: Clear.
2. Select a sensor to be connected to the serial port for
15
the AIS from the [Sensor] combo box.
selecting a sensor, set [ - ].
When not
16
17
Table A: Sensors that can be selected by serial ports on CCU 18
Serial port Sensor name 20
Gyro Heading Sensor(NMEA), Heading Sensor1(NMEA)*1, Heading Sensor2(NMEA)*1
Heading Sensor(Gyro I/F), Heading Sensor1(Gyro I/F)*1, Heading Sensor2(Gyro I/F)*1 21
LOG Log(NMEA), Log1(NMEA)*2, Log2(NMEA)*2
Log(Gyro I/F)*3
22
Selector 23
GPS GPS 1
GPS 2*4 24
GPS 3*4
GPS 4*4
25
Selector
APP A
AIS AIS
*1: Only when two heading sensors are available. APP B
*2 : Only when two logs are available
*3 : Only when Heading Sensor(Gyro I/F) is selected for Gyro of CCU
*4 : May not be displayed depending on the number of GPS units

17-13 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

Setting serial ports on SLC/ALC
Set the serial ports on SLC/ALC that is installed as follows.

Setting item Setting contents Setting value

CH1 to CH8 1. Click on any of the tabs, SLC1(M) to Enable: Selected

(RS-422) SLC4(M)/SLC1(S) to SLC4(S)/ALC1 to ALC4. Disable: Clear
2. Enable the serial port of the channel by selecting the
check box.
3. Select a sensor*1 to be connected to the channel on
the [Sensor] combo box. When not selecting a
sensor, select [ - ].
CH9/CH10 1. Click on any of the tabs, SLC1(M) to Enable: Selected
(RS-422/RS485) SLC4(M)/SLC1(S) to SLC4(S)/ALC1 to ALC4. Disable: Clear
2. Enable the serial port of the channel by selecting the
check box.
3. Select a sensor*1 to be connected to the channel on
the [Sensor] combo box. When not selecting a
sensor, select [ - ].
*1: The sensors that can be selected on SLC/ALC are indicated below.
However, the sensors that can be actually selected vary depending on the equipment setting.
Heading Sensor 1, Heading Sensor 2, Log 1, Log 2, GPS 1, GPS 2, GPS 3, GPS 4, Ship’s Clock, Echo
Sounder(Depth), Echo Sounder2(Depth), AIS, NAVTEX, Anemometer(Wind), Water Temperature
Meter, Current Meter, Climate Meter, TRI, Autopilot, Rudder, Engine/Propeller, Engine Telegraph,
Thruster, Azimuth Thruster, Generator, Fin Stabilizer, YEOMAN Digitizer, RADAR1(TT RX), Gyro
Switch, RADAR2(TT RX), Alert(to CAM), Alert(from Subsystem), Alert(to BNWAS), DSC,
IAS(MODBUS), IAS(NMEA), NAV/Alert, GPS Buoy

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-14

 １
17.3.3.4 To change the communication settings of the Serial Port
2
Click the [Detail] button of the enabled serial port and display the [Detail] dialog.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When selecting CH1 to CH7 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
When selecting CH8 to CH10
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-15 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

The setting target can be checked with [Source Device] display, [Terminal] display and [Sensor]
display.
Perform the settings shown in the following table and then click on the [Set] button.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Baud Rate Select the baud rate of the serial port on the Selectable baud rates vary
combo box. depending on the serial port
In the [Detail] dialog of any of CH8 to CH10, the (refer to "Selectable baud
[Baud Rate] addition ratio combo box is rates").
displayed on the right side of the [Baud Rate]
combo box.
[Baud Rate] addition ratio Displayed in the [Detail] dialog of CH8 to CH10. 0.0% to 3.0% (can be set in
combo box By using this combo box, the addition ratio (%) the unit of 0.5%)
for adjusting the baud rate can be changed. The
baud rate is determined by adding the additional
ratio to the value that is set in the [Baud Rate]
combo box.
Example)4800 × (1 + 1.5 / 100) = 4872
Additional ratio
Data Length Select the data length of the corresponding serial 5/6/7/8
port from the combo box.
Parity Select the parity of the corresponding serial port None/Odd/Even
from the combo box.
Stop Bits (Stop Bit Length) Select the stop bit length of the corresponding 1/2
serial port from the combo box.
Buffer Size Enter the buffer size of the corresponding serial 0 to 10240 byte
port from the list.
Time Out Enter the time-out duration of the corresponding 0 to 999s
serial port from the list.
Checksum Select the check box and enable the checksum To enable: Select.
of the sentence of the corresponding serial port. To disable: Clear.
Subsystem Set the equipment to be connected for Alert "Alert (from Subsystem)":
Handling. Equipment that is set as
Displayed only when the sensor is "Alert (from -/installed (Task Station and
Subsystem)" or "Alert (to CAM)". sensor)
The selection is also allowed for the subsystem "Alert(to CAM)":
that has already been used in the channel of Equipment that is set as
some other serial port. -/installed (Task Station)
Primary/Secondary Select Primary or Secondary for IAS (MODBUS) Primary: Primary system
input. Secondary: Secondary
Displayed only when the sensor is system
"IAS(MODBUS)".
Sentence Select the sentence of Alert Handling. Normal sensor such as GPS
Displayed when the sensor is other than "Alert and Log:
(BNWAS), "IAS(MODBUS)", or "DSC" or -/ALR/ALF
"NAV/Alert". "Alert (from Subsystem/to
CAM)":
ALR/ALF

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-16

 １
Selectable baud rates
Serial port Baud rate 2
Serial point on CCU
Gyro (at selection of Heading Sensor(NMEA)) 4800/38400
3
Gyro (at selection of Heading Sensor(Gyro I/F)) Fixed to 38400 4
Log (at selection of Log(NMEA)) Fixed to 4800
Log (at selection of Log(Gyro I/F)) Fixed to 38400 5
GPS Fixed to 4800
AIS Fixed to 38400
6
Serial port on SLC/ALC
CH1-8 2400/4800/9600
7
CH9/10 2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 8
Gyro I/F Fixed to 38400
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-17 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.4 Setting a System Function
Verify the setting of the system function of this equipment and perform initial setting by using the
[System Function] dialog.

17.3.4.1 Displaying a [System Function] dialog

When you select [System Configuration] in the first classification pane and [System Function] in the
second classification pane, the [System Function] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.

17.3.4.2 Lamp light colors

 The lamp of control indicates the Diagnosis result on whether or not the data of control of the
specified for each equipment has been received successfully.
 The lamp of alert indicates the Diagnosis result on whether or not the data of Alert of the specified
for each equipment has been received successfully.

Lit in red: Data not received.

Lit in green: Data is receiving.
Lit in orange: In Diagnosis (before decision).
No color: System function is disabled.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-18

 １
17.3.4.3 Setting a system function
2
In the [System Function] dialog, allocate the system functions to be connected for LAN.
Add a system function (New equipment)
3
Click the [Add] button and display the [System Function (Add)] dialog. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Perform the settings shown in the following table and then click on the [Set] button. 14
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Equipment Select an Equipment*1 on the combo box.
In the case of "Add a system function (Existing
The Equipment that can be actually
selected vary depending on the
15
equipment)", equipment can not be changed. installation setting.
Talker ID*6 Mnemonic Select the Mnemonic*2 of Talker ID on the The Mnemonic of Talker ID vary 16
combo box. depending on the equipment.
Instance
No
Enter the Instance No of Talker ID. 0001 to 9999
The Instance No of Talker ID vary
17
depending on the equipment.
Cluster ID Enter the Cluster ID*3. Nav/Com/Aut/Cgo/Htl/ICT/SSe/Pos/ 18
It can also be set by selecting Equipment .ROV
on the Reserved combo box.
In the case of "Edit a system function", Cluster 20
ID can not be changed.
Transmission Group*6
(Control/Data)
Select the Transmission Group*4 for
Control/Data.
The Transmission Group
(Control/Data) vary depending on
21
the equipment.
Transmission Transmit*6 Select the Transmission Group*4 of The Transmission Group (Alert) 22
Group (Alert) Transmit for Alert. vary depending on the equipment. *5
Receive*6 Select the Transmission Group*4 of
Receive for Alert.
CAM1*5
23
Timeout Enter the time-out duration. 0 to 120s (Default: 60s)
Use Wildcard for Alert Select the check box and enable the Use To enable: Select (Default) 24
Command Wildcard for Alert Command.
To disable: Clear
25
*1: The Equipment that can be selected are indicated below.
APP A
However, the equipment that can be actually selected vary depending on the installation setting.

Heading Sensor 1, Heading Sensor 2, Gyro Switch, Log 1, Log 2, GPS 1, GPS 2, GPS 3, GPS 4, Ship's Clock, APP B
Echo Sounder1(T/D 1, T/D2), Echo Sounder2(T/D 3), AIS, NAVTEX, Anemometer 1, Water TEMP Meter, Current
Meter, Climate Meter, ROT Indicator, Autopilot, Rudder, Engine/Propeller, Engine Telegraph, Thruster, Azimuth

17-19 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

Thruster, Generator, S-JOY/Joystick 1～5, BNWAS, General Equipment(Alert)1～10, GPS Buoy, Plotter, DSC,
IAS, CAM, NAV/Alert, RADAR1,RADAR2, VDR
Note:

IAS and NAVTEX: Only NMEA is supported.

CAM is settings for connecting to an external CAM by LAN.

*2: The Mnemonic of Talker ID that can be selected are indicated below.
AG, AI, BN, CA, CR, EI, ER, GP, HC, HE, II, JA, JB, JC, JD, JE, JF, JG, JH, RA, SD, SG, SI, SS, TC, TI, U0, U1,

U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, U7, U8, U9, VD, VR, WI, ZA

*3: Clusters are groups of functionalities aimed at a responsible operator, which can be distributed over
systems. Cluster ID is the identifier of the Cluster.
Set the Cluster ID to “Nav” for equipment in the navigation-bridge cluster. If CAM need category C
alert from another cluster group, set the Cluster ID according to the transmission specifications of
the equipment. Cluster ID can be set any string of a maximum of 15 characters. Cluster ID that
equipment is task station is Nav and cannot be changed.
The cluster ID that can be selected are indicated below.
Cluster ID Cluster group
Nav Navigation
Com Communication
Aut Automation
Cgo Cargo
Htl Hotel
ICT ICT
SSe Safety/Security
Pos Position control
ROV Remote operated vehicle

*4: The Transmission Group that can be selected are indicated below.
Transmission Group IP Address Port number
MISC 239.192.0.1 60001
TGTD 239.192.0.2 60002
SATD 239.192.0.3 60003
NAVD 239.192.0.4 60004
VDRD 239.192.0.5 60005
RCOM 239.192.0.6 60006
TIME 239.192.0.7 60007
PROP 239.192.0.8 60008
USR1 239.192.0.9 60009
USR2 239.192.0.10 60010
USR3 239.192.0.11 60011
USR4 239.192.0.12 60012
USR5 239.192.0.13 60013
USR6 239.192.0.14 60014
USR7 239.192.0.15 60015
USR8 239.192.0.16 60016
BAM1 239.192.0.17 60017
BAM2 239.192.0.18 60018
CAM1 239.192.0.19 60019
CAM2 239.192.0.20 60020
NETA 239.192.0.56 60056

*5: BAM1/BAM2 and CAM1/CAM2 are available for system integrators to balance the traffic, for
example higher volume radar in BAM1/CAM1 and low volume sensor, for example gyro, in
BAM2/CAM2.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-20

 １
*6: Talker ID Mnemonic, Talker ID Instance No, Transmission Group (Control/Data), Transmission
Group (Alert) Transmit and Transmission Group (Alert) Receive can also be set by selecting Equipment
2
on the preset combo box. The following default values will be set. 3
Equipment System TalkerID TalkerID Transmission Transmission Transmission 4
Function Mnemonic Instance Group Group (Alert) Group (Alert)
No (Control/Data) Transmit Receive 5
RADAR RADAR RA (TaskStatio TGTD TGTD CAM1
nNo.) 6
ECDIS ECDIS EI (TaskStatio NAVD NAVD CAM1

CONNING CONNIN II
nNo.)
(TaskStatio MISC MISC CAM1
7
AMS
G
CAM CA
nNo.)
(TaskStatio CAM1 CAM1 CAM1
8
9
nNo.)
TCS TrackCo TC (TaskStatio NAVD NAVD CAM1
ntrol nNo.)
Heading Sensor 1 Heading HE 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1 10
Heading Sensor 2 Heading HE 0002 NAVD NAVD CAM1
Gyro Switch Heading HE 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1 11
Log 1 Log VD 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
Log 2 Log VD 0002 NAVD NAVD CAM1 12
GPS 1 GPS GP 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
GPS 2
GPS 3
GPS
GPS
GP
GP
0002
0003
NAVD
NAVD
NAVD
NAVD
CAM1
CAM1
13
GPS 4
Ship's Clock
GPS
Clock
GP
ZA
0004
0001
NAVD
TIME
NAVD
TIME
CAM1
CAM1
14
Echo Sounder1(T/D 1,
T/D2)
Depth SD 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
15
Echo Sounder2(T/D 3) Depth SD 0002 NAVD NAVD CAM1
AIS AIS AI 0001 TGTD TGTD CAM1 16
NAVTEX NAVTEX CR 0001 RCOM RCOM CAM1
Anemometer 1 Weather WI 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1 17
Water TEMP Meter Weather WI 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
Current Meter Weather WI 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1 18
Climate Meter Weather WI 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
ROT Indicator
Autopilot
TRI
Auto Pilot
TI
AG
0001
0001
SATD
NAVD
SATD
NAVD
CAM1
CAM1
20
Rudder
Engine/Propeller
Rudder
Engine/P
SG
ER
0001
0001
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
CAM1
CAM1
21
Engine Telegraph
ropeller
Engine ER 0001 MISC MISC CAM1 22
Telegrap
h 23
Thruster Thruster ER 0001 MISC MISC CAM1
Azimuth Thruster Azimuth ER 0001 MISC MISC CAM1 24
Thruster
Generator Generato
r
ER 0001 MISC MISC CAM1 25
S-JOY/Joystick S-JOY/J
oystick
SG 0001 MISC - -
APP A
BNWAS
General
BNWAS
General
BN
U0
0001
0001
-
-
VDRD
MISC
CAM1
CAM1 APP B
Equipment(Alert) 1 1
General General U0 0002 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 2 2
General General U0 0003 - MISC CAM1

17-21 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

Equipment System TalkerID TalkerID Transmission Transmission Transmission
Function Mnemonic Instance Group Group (Alert) Group (Alert)
No (Control/Data) Transmit Receive
Equipment(Alert) 3 3
General General U0 0004 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 4 4
General General U0 0005 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 5 5
General General U0 0006 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 6 6
General General U0 0007 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 7 7
General General U0 0008 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 8 8
General General U0 0009 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 9 9
General General U0 0010 - MISC CAM1
Equipment(Alert) 10 10
GPS Buoy GPS GP 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
Plotter GPS GP 0001 NAVD NAVD CAM1
DSC DSC U1 0001 - MISC CAM1
IAS IAS JE 0001 MISC MISC CAM1
CAM CAM CA 0001 CAM1 CAM1 CAM1
NAV/Alert NAV/Aler ER 0001 MISC - -
t
RADAR1 RADAR RA 0001 TGTD - -
RADAR2 RADAR RA 0002 TGTD - -
VDR VDR VR 0001 MISC MISC CAM1
SLC 1(Main) SNGF SI 0013 MISC - -
SLC 2(Main) SNGF SI 0113 MISC - -
SLC 3(Main) SNGF SI 0213 MISC - -
SLC 4(Main) SNGF SI 0313 MISC - -
SLC 1(Sub) SNGF SI 0063 MISC - -
SLC 2(Sub) SNGF SI 0163 MISC - -
SLC 3(Sub) SNGF SI 0263 MISC - -
SLC 4(Sub) SNGF SI 0363 MISC - -
ALC 1 SNGF SI 1213 MISC - -
ALC 2 SNGF SI 1313 MISC - -
ALC 3 SNGF SI 1413 MISC - -
ALC 4 SNGF SI 1513 MISC - -

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-22

 １
Add a system function (Existing equipment)
Select the check box and Click the [Add] button and display the [System Function (Add)] dialog. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Perform the settings referring to Add a system function (New equipment). Equipment can not be 12
changed on the [System Function (Add)] dialog. 13
14
Edit a system function 15
Select the check box and click the [Edit] button and display the [System Function (Edit)] dialog.
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
Perform the settings referring to Add a system function (New equipment). Cluster ID can not be
changed on the [System Function (Edit)] dialog.
APP B

17-23 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

Delete a system function
Select the check box and click the [Delete] button. Selected a system function is deleted.

Note:

- Set the each setting according to the transmission specifications of the equipment connected to the LAN.

- Equipment connected to the SLC / ALC serial port or CCU cannot add or edit or delete system functions. System

function of Equipment connected to the SLC / ALC serial port or CCU are registered automatically by serial port

setting on [Serial Port] dialog.

- The native system function of VDR, No.x RADAR, ECDIS, CON, MFD, RPS can not delete on [System Function]

dialog.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-24

 １
17.3.5 Setting Ship's Parameters
2
Set parameter values of own ship by using the [Ship’s Parameters] dialog.
3
17.3.5.1 Displaying the [Ship’s Parameters] dialog 4
When you select [Ship's Parameters] in the classification pane, the [Ship’s Parameters] dialog is
5
displayed in the edit/result pane.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-25 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.5.2 Setting own ship's parameters
Set the following items in the [Ship’s Parameters] dialog.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Ship's Name Enter own ship's name in the box. Max. 20 characters
Length (of ship) Enter own ship's length in the box. 1.0 to 1022.0 m
Beam (ship's width) Enter own ship's beam in the box. 1.0 to 126.0 m
Height from keel to MAX point Enter the height of the ship from the keel to the 1.0 to 126.0 m
maximum point in the box.
Keel-Trans Enter the distance between the transducer of the 0.0 to 20.0 m
(distance between the transducer depth sounder and the keel. (Required when
and the keel) displaying the water depth with the keel fixed)
MAX Course Change Enter the limit value of the course change angle 20.0 to 359.9°
(limit value of course change of the planned route in the box.
angle)
MAX Speed Limit Enter the ship's maximum speed in the box. 10.0 to 99.9 kn
MIN Speed Limit Enter the ship's minimum speed in the box. 0.0 to 89.9 kn
MAX ROT Enter the maximum rate of turn in the box. 1.0 to 1200.0°/min
MIN ROT Enter the minimum rate of turn in the box. 0.0 to 570.0°/min
MIN Turn Radius Enter the minimum turn radius in the box. 0.00 to 9.99 NM
MIN Safety Contour Enter the minimiu value of SafetyContour in the 0 to 200 m
(Minimum value of SafetyContour box.
that can be set)

Note
When the MIN Safety Contour is set greater than the value of the Safety Contour already set, the
value of the MIN Safety Contour is used for the Safety Contour.When it set the MIN Safety
Contour, please confarm the setting of the Safety Contour.The Safety Contour can be set from
Page2 of [Menu]-[View]-[Options]-[Chart Common].

Synchronizing setting
The [Ship's Parameters] dialog enables common setting items and individual setting items for RADAR,
ECDIS, and Conning (called a task station individually). Once common items are set in any of the task
stations, RADAR, ECDIS, and Conning, the settings are reflected (synchronized) in other task stations.
By setting common items in the state where all the task stations are active, the common setting items
are synchronized in all the task stations.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-26

 １
17.3.6 Setting the automatic sailing system
2
Note 3
In case of JAN-7201S/9201S, automatic sailing function is not available by function restriction.
Therefore the setup is not available. 4
5
By using the [Autosail] dialog, verify and initialize the automatic sailing system that is installed in this
equipment. 6
17.3.6.1 Displaying the [Autosail] dialog
7
When you select [Settings] in the first classification pane and [Autosail] in the second classification 8
pane, the [Autosail] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
17.3.6.2 Setting the automatic sailing system 23
Set the following items in the [Autosail] dialog.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Reach Offset
Time/Distance to WPT
24
Enter the reach offset in the box. -9.999 to 9.999 NM
25
Select this to select a parameter for • From center point of WOL
calculating the time and distance from own • From cross point of WOL and APP A
ship to the WPT. Leg
From center point of WOL: Center point APP B
between own ship and the WOL
From cross point of WOL and Leg: Center
point of own ship's heading and the WOL

17-27 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.7 Setting the AIS password
Set the AIS password by using the [AIS] dialog.

17.3.7.1 Displaying the [AIS] dialog

When [Settings] is selected in the 1st classification pane and [AIS] is selected in the 2nd classification
pane, the [AIS] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.

17.3.7.2 Setting the AIS password

Set the following item on the [AIS] dialog.

Setting item Description of setting Setting value

Setting Password To change Voyage data from the external Up to 32 characters (numeric
device, JHS-183 requires the password. value only)
When the AIS password is changed,
change this setting value.
When the password is not required, this
setting value is ignored in (JHS-182).

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-28

 １
17.3.8 Setting Sensor 2
The alert set point (Alarm Limit) display and GPS switching interlocking function can be set for depth
display on the “Sensor” dialog.
3
4
17.3.8.1 Displaying the [Sensor] dialog
5
When [Settings] is selected in the 1st classification pane and [Sensor] is selected in the 2nd
classification pane, the [Sensor] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
17.3.8.2 Displaying an alert set point
21
Check the [Synchronise depth alarm limit] check box.
The depth that is set in [Depth below keel Alarm] of the [Depth/Safety Contour] dialog of the “Alert” 22
menu is displayed as the alarm set point (Alarm Limit). Subsequently, the setting value of [Depth below
keel Alarm] is fixed and the value can no longer be changed.
23
24
To reset the alarm set point display, uncheck the [Synchronise depth alarm limit] check box.
25
APP A
APP B

17-29 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.8.3 Setting the GPS switching linkage function
Check the [Synchronise position sensor selected Master] check box.
A badge is displayed on the Top screen (own ship’s position) of the equipment with the GPS Selector
control authorization.
When the GPS switching linkage function is enabled, the GPS sensor source with other equipment is
linked.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-30

 １
17.3.9 Setting Route Sharing
2
In the "Route Sharing" dialog, change the route sharing method used for route sharing.
3
17.3.9.1 Displaying the [Route Sharing] dialog 4
When [Settings] is selected in the 1st classification pane and [Route Sharing] is selected in the 2nd 5
classification pane, the [Route Sharing] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
17.3.9.2 Selecting a route sharing method
20
From the combo box, select the route sharing method to use.
GPS Shared Route
21
Route Plan Exchange 22
When selected, the selected item is added to the left pane 23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-31 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.10 Setting the GPS Shared Route
This function enables the switching between new route sharing and old route sharing and the setting of
data route transmission/reception to ON/OFF.

17.3.10.1 Displaying the [GPS Shared Route] dialog

When [Settings] is selected in the 1st classification pane and [GPS Shared Route] is selected in the
2nd classification pane, the [GPS Shared Route] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.

17.3.10.2 Setting the GPS Shared Route

You can switch various settings on and off by checking as shown in the table below.
For the INS configuration, the New and Old check boxes are hidden.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-32

 １
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
New Sharing of a new route can be set to On/Off. On: Default 2
Off

Old Sharing of an old route can be set to On/Off. On

3
Off: Default 4
Data Route Send Data route transmission can be set to On/Off. On: Default
On: Off 5
[Send to GPS] of [Route Planning]-[▼] is enabled.
Transmission log is displayed in the Status Log column of
6
the Send to GPS screen.
7
Off:
[Send to GPS] of [Route Planning]-[▼] is disabled. 8
9
10
Data Route Receive Data route reception can be set to On/Off. On: Default
On: Off 11
Reception log is displayed in the Status Log column of the
Send to GPS screen. 12
Off:
Reception log is not displayed in the Status Log column of
13
the Send to GPS screen.
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-33 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.3.11 Setting the Route Plan Exchange
You can switch the enable / disable of route plan exchange and make various settings.

17.3.11.1 Displaying the [Route Plan Exchange] dialog

When [Settings] is selected in the 1st classification pane and [Route Plan Exchange] is selected in the
2nd classification pane, the [Route Plan Exchange] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.

17.3.11.2 Setting the Route Plan Exchange

When the Enable Route Plan Exchange check box is set to On, the route plan exchange function is
enabled.
In the Address combo box, you can select the multicast address to be used for route plan exchanges
from the following five.
・239.192.0.21 ・239.192.0.22 ・239.192.0.23 ・239.192.0.24 ・239.192.0.25
In the Timeout input box, you can set the response waiting timeout judgment value in the route plan
exchange.
In the SFI combo box, you can set two prefix characters that form SFI.
In the Transmission Groupe combo box, you can set the transmission group to be specified when
sending and receiving.
In SFI display box of Own Task Station, its own SFI is displayed.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-34

 １
17.4 Maintenance 2
Use the [Maintenance] dialog box for maintenance operation of this equipment.
3
17.4.1 Displaying the [Maintenance] dialog box 4
Clicking the [Maintenance] button in the submenu displays the [Maintenance] dialog box. 5
The [Maintenance] dialog box in the submenu consists of the classification pane and the edit/result
pane. The classification pane consists of two-level layers of the first classification pane and the second 6
classification pane.
7
First classification pane 8
Second classification pane
9
10
11
12
Edit/Result pane 13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-35 Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services)

17.4.2 Managing storage
When you select [Storage] in the first classification pane and [Management] in the second
classification pane, the [Management] dialog is displayed in the edit/result pane.

The total storage capacity and free space on each of the drives (C and D) are displayed in the [Drive
Information] list. The capacity of each of the files stored on the drives is displayed in the [File
Information] list. The files managed by File Manager are applicable.

Section 17 Adjusting and Setting up Equipment (for Services) 17-36

 １
Section 18 Playing Back Data 2
Recorded During 3
Navigation 4
5
The following information recorded during navigation can be played back on the screen.
• Own ship's information 6
• Other ship's information
• Route information 7
• Alarm information
8
Click on the [Playback] button on the Task Menu. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-1 Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation

The following screen appears and the playback controller is displayed. (Playback mode)

Playback controller

The playback controller can move to any position on the screen; however, it cannot be minimized.

Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation 18-2

 １
18.1 Playback Controller 2
The view of the playback controller can be switched between simplified display and full display by
clicking the View Change button ( or ).
3
4
Simplified Display
5
[1] [3] [2]
6
7
8
[4]
9
10
11
Full Display 12
[Control] section
13
14
15
[7]
16
[5]
17
[8]
[6]
[12]

[13]
18
[11]

[9]
19
[14]
21
[10]
22
23
24
25
APP A
[Detail Log] Section APP B

18-3 Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation

Upper Part of the Playback Controller

Number Name Function

1 Playback time
2 [X] (Close) button
3 Playback slider
4 View switch buttons
The playback time is displayed.
Exits playback.
The progress of playback is displayed. The playback position
can be changed by moving the slider control.
• During playback, the pointer of the playback slider cannot be
dragged.
• During halt/temporary halt, the pointer of the playback slider
can be dragged to any position.
Switches between full display/simple display of the control
section and the playback information section.

[Control] Section

Number Name Function

5 Playback speed Select the playback speed from the list. (x1, x2, x4, x10, x30,
selection box x60)
6 Playback button Executes playback. When this button is clicked during playback,
the playback speed changes in the following order: x1 ⇒ x2 ⇒
x4 ⇒ x10 ⇒ x30 ⇒ x60 ⇒ x1 ⇒ .....
7 Pause button Pauses playback. To resume, click the Playback button again.
8 Stop button Stops playback. When playback is stopped, the playback time
returns to the playback start time and the playback slider control
returns to the playback start time position.
9 Drive selection box Select a data drive storing navigation record data from the list.
10 Folder tree Folders storing navigation record data are displayed in tree view.
11 Playback start time The playback start time is displayed. By clicking the calendar
icon, you can display the calendar picker and change the
playback start time.
Specify the playback time range concurrently with the playback
end time. The range can be specified within the range from the
start to the end of the recording of log data.
12 Playback segment The playback segment is displayed. (When a playback list has
not been selected, this box is blank.)
13 Playback end time The playback end time is displayed. (When a playback list has
not been selected, this box is blank.) By clicking the calendar
icon, you can display the calendar picker and change the
playback end time.
Specify the playback time range concurrently with the playback
start time. The range can be specified within the range from the
start to the end of the recording of log data.
14 Playback list Each record data is displayed in the order of the oldest time to
the latest time. When [Oldest Date] or [Latest Date] on the title
bar are clicked on, the data is sorted in the order of the oldest
data or latest data.

Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation 18-4

 １
[Detail Log] Section
Information of each record data is displayed. 2
Name Function 3
Chart The cell having the cell name of the chart being displayed when recorded is
shown. 4
Scale The scale of the chart being displayed when recorded is shown.
5
Edition The version of the cell having the cell name of the chart being displayed
when recorded is shown. 6
Edition Date (UTC) The issue date of the chart being displayed when recorded is shown.
ARCS Datum Offset The offset value of the ARCS chart when recorded is shown.
7
Ship’s Position Offset The offset value of own ship's position when recorded is shown. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-5 Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation

18.2 Selecting Playback Data
Select the navigation record data you want to play back.

1 Click on the Drive Selection box to open the list, and then select a data drive storing
navigation record data.

Folders saved on the selected data drive are displayed in tree view.

2 Select a folder storing the navigation record data you want to play back (ex. Playback
folder).
Each navigation record data is displayed in the order of the oldest time to the latest time.

3 Select the navigation record data you want to play back.

The oldest time and latest time of the selected navigation record data are reset to their initial
values and then displayed in the playback list.
When navigation record data is selected, a chart is displayed in such a way that the position of
own ship when recording has started is at the center of the dialog box. When display setting is
executed, own ship’s track is displayed on the chart.

18.2.1 Sorting the Playback List

Sort the logbook data display sequence in the ascending/descending sequence based on the oldest
time/latest time.

1 Click the title bar on the control section.

To sort navigation record data by the oldest time, click on [Oldest Date(UTC)]; to sort it by the
latest time, click on [Latest Date(UTC)].

Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation 18-6

 １
18.3 Playing Back Logbook Data 2
Play back the selected logbook data.
3
To Start Playback 4
1 Click on the Playback button. 5
Playback of navigation record data starts.
The Playback button is highlighted during playback, and the playback time indicator and the
6
playback slider control are also linked with the playback. 7
8
To Pause Playback
9
1 Click on the Pause button.
Playback of navigation record data pauses. 10
The Pause button is highlighted while pausing, and the playback time indicator and the
playback slider control also pause. 11
To resume, click on the Playback button. 12
13
To Stop Playback
14
1 Click on the Stop button.
Playback of navigation record data stops. 15
The Stop button is highlighted while stopping, and the playback time is reset to the playback
start time and the playback slider control returns to the starting point at the left edge.
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-7 Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation

18.3.1 Changing the playback speed
Change the playback speed of logbook data.

1 Select a playback speed from the list in the playback speed selection box.

Navigation record data is played back at the selected playback speed.

The time shown on the playback time indicator and the progress shown on the playback slider
control change according to the playback speed.

The playback speed can be changed by clicking on the Playback button repeatedly.
Each time the Playback button is clicked, the playback speed changes in the following order: x1
⇒ x2 ⇒ x4 ⇒ x10 ⇒ x30 ⇒ x60 ⇒ x1 ⇒ .....

Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation 18-8

 １
18.4 Exiting the Playback Mode 2
Other tasks cannot be executed while the Playback dialog box is being displayed (during the Playback
mode).
3
To execute other tasks, exit the Playback mode. 4
1 Click on the [X] (Close) button on the playback controller. 5
6
7
8
9
The Exit Confirmation dialog box appears. 10
11
12
13
14
2 Click on the [OK] button.
The playback controller closes and the Playback mode ends.
15
To cancel exiting the Playback mode, click on the [Cancel] button. 16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-9 Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation

18.5 Outputting Navigation Record Data
Select navigation record data from the File Manager submenu of the Tools menu, and then copy it to
the output destination you specify.

1 Open the File Manager submenu of the Tools menu.

File type [Copy>>] Drive selection box

selection box button (output destination)

Drive selection box

(output source)
Output data interval
selection boxes

Calendar icon

2 Select [Voyage Log] from the File type selection box, and then select [Local Disk] from
the Drive at the output source selection box.
Below the Drive at the output source selection box, the output data interval selection boxes and
the calendar icon appear.

Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation 18-10

 １
3 By clicking on the Calendar icon, specify the duration of the logbook data to be output.
2
The selected dates appear in the output data interval selection boxes.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4 Specify the drive of the output destination from the output destination drive selection 11
box and the output destination folder from the folder tree.
The [Copy>>] button takes effect. 12
5 Click on the [Copy>>] button. 13
The following folder is created in the output destination path, and the navigation record data
having the specified interval is copied to this folder.
14
Folder name: Playback_120108_120109 15
Output data start time Output data end time 16
[yymmdd] [yymmdd]
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-11 Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation

18.6 Functional Restrictions When in the
Playback Mode
Some functions are restricted in playback mode. The restricted functions are disabled.

Section 18 Playing Back Data Recorded During Navigation 18-12

 1
Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 2
3
19.1 Maintenance Functions Executed from
4
Menu
5
This section explains maintenance functions that are executed from the menu.
6
19.1.1 Starting maintenance functions 7
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.
8
2 Click on the [Maintenance] button on the menu.
9
The submenu is displayed.
10
3 Click on a button on the submenu.
The dialog box of the selected maintenance function is displayed.
11
12
19.1.2 Setting Date/Time/Time Zone 13
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar. 14
The menu is displayed.
15
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Date/Time/Time Zone] button on the menu.
The [Date/Time/Time Zone] dialog box appears.
16
17
[1]
18
[3]
19
19
[4] 21
[2] 23
24
24
26
[5] 27
[6]
[7]

19-1 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

[1] [X] button
Click on this button to close the [Date/Time/Time Zone] dialog box.

[2] [Date]
Set the year, month and day on the calendar.
For the details of how to use the calendar, refer to "3.17 Setting a Date and a Time [Calendar
Operation)".

[3] [Time(LMT)]
Enter the time in the input box. The time entered will be reflected on the clock.

[4] [Time Zone]

Enter the time zone in the time zone input box.
A time zone can be selected between -13:30 and +13:30 from UTC.

[5] [Display Style]

From the list, select the style to display the date.
• YYYY-MM-DD (Japanese style)
• MMM DD,YYYY (North American style)
• DD MMM,YYYY (European style)

[6] [Synchronise with Time Source (Date/Time) ](synchronization of time with GPS)
When this item is checked, date and time are synchronized by using the time information (ZDA
sentence) from GPS.

[7] [Synchronise with Time Source (Time Zone) ](synchronization of time difference with GPS)
When this item is checked, time difference is synchronized by using the time information (ZDA
sentence) from GPS.

Note
When [Synchronize with Time Source (Date/Time)] is not checked, the time is reset to the initial
value at the start of power supply. Therefore, set a correct time manually.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-2

 1
19.1.3 Confirming System Information 2
System information can be confirmed.
3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed. 4
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. 5
The [System Information] dialog box appears.
The contents of the dialog will be switched by clicking on the selection tabs provided in the
6
dialog box.
7
8
Selection
tabs 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-3 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.1.3.1 Confirming Software Information

When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in
advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the
indicator is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result
that a trouble will occur.

Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash
memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash
memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur.

Software information can be confirmed.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu.

The [System Information] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the [Software] tab.

The software information is displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

[1] [X] button

Click on this button to close the [System Information] dialog box.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-4

 1
[2] Software information
2
Item Displayed information
Jxx-xxxx Type and model name of the system 3
Application Version of the application software
4
Maintenance No. 7-digit maintenance number
TXRX Version of the software used for the radar transmitter-receiver unit 5
* This information is displayed when the system is equipped with the
RADAR function. 6
TCS Version of the software used for TCS
* This information is displayed when the system is equipped with the
7
TCS function.
8
Presentation Library Edition of S52 Presentation Library
9
[3] [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button
Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format.
10
11
19.1.3.2 Confirming H/W Key Information 12
13
14
15
When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in
advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the 16
indicator is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result
that a trouble will occur.
17
Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash 18
memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash
memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur.
19
19
Hardware key information can be confirmed.
21
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed. 23
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu. 24
The [System Information] dialog box appears.
24
3 Click on the [H/W Key] tab.
The hardware key information is displayed. 26
27

19-5 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 [1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1] [X]
Click on this button to close the [System Information] dialog box.

[2] [ARCS Information]

The ARCS PIN number and User Permit are displayed.

[3] [S-63 Information]

The S-63 User Permit is displayed.

[4] [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button

Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-6

 1
19.1.3.3 Confirming the compliant standards for the equipment
2
3
4
When you want to use a USB flash memory to read or write a file, make sure in 5
advance that the USB flash memory is not affected by a computer virus. If the
indicator is infected with a virus, other equipment will also be infected, with the result 6
that a trouble will occur.
7
Before removing the USB flash memory, check for the access lamp of the USB flash
memory and make sure that it is not being accessed. If you remove the USB flash 8
memory when it is accessed, data may be destroyed and a trouble may occur.
9
The standards related to the equipment are displayed 10
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar. 11
The menu is displayed.
12
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [System Information] button on the menu.
The [System Information] dialog box appears. 13
3 Click on the [Specification] tab. 14
The equipment License standard specification information is displayed.
15
[1] 16
17
18
19
19
[2]

21
23
[3]
24
24
[1] [X] button 26
Closes the [System Information] dialog box.
27
[2] Equipment License information
The equipment License standard specification information is displayed.

19-7 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

[3] [Save to USB Device] (Saving to USB flash memory) button
Click on this button to save the displayed information in a USB flash memory in the text format.

19.1.4 Confirming Operating Time

Confirm the operating time of this system.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Operating Time] button on the menu.

The [Operating Time] dialog box appears.

[1]

[2]

[1] [X] button

Click on this button to close the [Operating Time] dialog box.

[2] [Operating Time Of Work Station]

The operating time of this equipment is displayed.
[Total]: Total operating time of this equipment
[SSD1]: Total operating time of SSD1. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).
[SSD2]: Total operating time of SSD2. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).
[LCD]: Total operating time of LCD. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).
[LCD FAN]: Total operating time of LCD FAN. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).
[CCU FAN]: Total operating time of CCU FAN. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).
[PSU FAN]: Total operating time of PSU FAN. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).
[UPS]: Total operating time of UPS. The estimated replacement time is indicated in ( ).

Memo
[UPS] is displayed only when UPS is installed as an option.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-8

 1
19.1.5 Displaying and Resetting the Current Voyage 2
Distance
3
This equipment displays the current voyage distance (estimated voyage distance) that is calculated
from the speed over the ground and the speed through the water. 4
The voyage distance can also be reset.
5
Note
While the ship is anchored or sailing at low speed, it takes up to around 2 minutes to reset the
6
current voyage distance. 7
8
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the Left Tool Bar.
A menu is displayed. 9
2 Click on [Maintenance] - [Voyage Distance] on the menu. 10
The [Voyage Distance] dialog is displayed.
11
[1]
12
[2] 13
14
[3]
15
16
[1] [X] button
The [Voyage Distance] dialog is closed. 17
[2] [Current Voyage Distance]
18
The current voyage distance is displayed.
19
[Ground]: Indicates the current voyage distance that is calculated from the speed over the ground.
[Water]: Indicates the current sea distance that is calculated from the speed through the water. 19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-9 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

[3] [Clear] button
The voyage distance is reset.
When this button is clicked on, a confirmation dialog is displayed.

To reset the voyage distance, click on the [Yes] button. When not resetting the voyage distance, click
on the [No] button.

Memo
When the voyage distance is reset in the [Voyage Distance] dialog, the voyage distance in the
event detailed information in the logbook is also reset. The [Voyage distance (ground)] and
[Voyage distance (water)] in the event detailed information are reset.
For the details of the event detailed information in the logbook, refer to “13.1.1 Event detailed
information”.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-10

 1
19.1.6 Setting and confirming the Sensor Source 2
Set and confirm the sensor source.
3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed. 4
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Sensor Selection/Status] button on the menu. 5
The [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog box appears.
6
[3] [1]
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
[2] 15
[1] [X] button
16
Closes [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog box. 17
[2] [Sensor Selection] 18
Enables selection of a sensor source.
19
Setting item Setting contents Setting value 19
POSN(Main) Select a Primary Position sensor source from the GPS x
combo box. ("x" indicates the unit 21
number)
POSN(Sub) Select a Secondary Position sensor source from the None, GPS x
23
combo box. ("x" indicates the unit
number)
24
24
26
27

19-11 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Heading Select a heading sensor source from the combo box. MAN, Gyro x, MAG,
* The sources that can be selected vary according to G/C
the installation.
("x" indicates the unit
* When GyroSW is enabled, only Gryo and MAN can
number)
be selected.
When the Gyro Compass system that is used has the
automatic switching function, the sensor source display
is switched automatically according to the switching
condition.
When the sensor source is set to [MAN], the ship’s
heading value can also be input in the input box.
Ship’s heading value input range: 0.0-359.9°
STW (Speed Select a Speed Through Water sensor source from the MAN, Logx
Through Water) combo box. ("x" indicates the unit
* The source that can be selected varies depending on number)
the installation
* When 1AX is installed in Log, Log cannot be selected
from the sensor source.
When the sensor source is set to [Manual], a Speed
Through Water can also be input in the input box.
Speed Through Water value input range: -99.9-99.9kn
COG/SOG Select Course Over the Ground/Speed Over the Log x, GPS
(Course Over the Ground sensor source from the combo box. ("x" indicates the unit
Ground/Speed *The source that can be selected varies depending on number)
Over the Ground) the installation
When GPS is selected for Position, the same GPS is
selected automatically.
Time (Time Select a sensor source to be used for time correction of GPS, Ship Clock
correction) this equipment from the combo box.
*The source that can be selected varies depending on
the installation
Depth (Water Select a water depth sensor source from the combo FWD, AFT, MID,
depth) box. AUTO*1
*The selectable sources vary depending on the
installation. When FURUNO is selected in [Device
Installation] - [Echo Sounder 1], it is fixed to AUTO.
*1: When Echo Sounder 1 and Echo Sounder 2 are installed as depth sensor sources, E/S1 (AUTO)
and E/S2 (AUTO) are displayed instead of AUTO.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-12

 1
[3] Disclosure button
When clicked, the left pane is hidden. 2
Memo 3
When Log Selector is installed and the Log (speed) sensor is switched automatically, a popup
4
window is displayed, notifying the effect.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-13 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.1.7 Checking the Route Plan Exchange Log
Checking the Route Plan Exchange Log.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Route Plan Exchange Log] button on the menu.
The [Route Plan Exchange Log] dialog box appears.

Setting item Setting contents Setting value

Event Specify reception or transmission. Recv/Send/Timeout/Check
Time(UTC) Displays the time of reception or
or Time(LMT) transmission.
SFI When receiving: SFI of the transmission
source device
When transmitting: SFI of destination
device
Message Displays the transmission / reception Query/Route Data/Route Plan/
contents. Monitored Route/Alternate Route/
Response(Error)/Response(Accepted)/
Response(Reject)/Response(Pending)/
No Response(Query)/
No Response(Route)/No Data/
No Report/Correct/Incorrect
Detail View Detailed display of error content etc.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-14

 1
19.2 General Maintenance 2
3

DANGER 4
5
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
6
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request
7
servicing. 8
Never remove the cover of this equipment. 9
Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.
10
11
Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.
Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur. 12
13
When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off. 14
Failure may result in electric shock.
15
Turn off all the main powers before cleaning the equipment. Especially when 16
an UPS is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from
the UPS even after the indicator and the ECDIS are turned off. Failure may 17
result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock.
18
For operating this equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the maintenance work as 19
described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will reduce. It is recommended to make
regular maintenance work. 19
The general maintenance work common among each equipment is as follows.
21
Clean the equipment. 23
Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation. 24
24
26
27

19-15 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.3 Maintenance on Unit
19.3.1 Display unit

When cleaning the screen, do not wipe hard with a dry cloth. Also, do not
use glass cleaner, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner to clean the screen. Also
avoid wiping with water. Failure to do so may damage the screen
surface.
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn off the power so
that the power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the
power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work may result
in electric shock, equipment failure, or accidents.

19.3.1.1 The Screen

Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video.
Use a soft cloth such as flannel and cotton to clean the screen to prevent damage or degradation of the
screen coating.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-16

 1
19.3.1.2 The Trackball
2
Clean carefully the trackball operation unit in accordance with this procedure in order not to scratch the
lens. The tools shown in the following table are required in this work. 3
4
Required tools
1 Dry/Moist soft cloth (Lint-free) 5
2 Swab
6
Note
7
If you do not have the swab, please use lint-free cloth, moistened with water, instead.
8
1 Turn stopper ring in the direction of the triangle marks (counterclockwise), then
remove the stopper ring together with the ball. 9
10
11
12
13
14
2 Clean the ball with a moist lint-free cloth, then wipe the ball with a dry soft cloth 15
carefully.
16
3 Clean the inside of the stopper ring and the trackball housing, and the lends with a
swab, moistened with water. Change the swab regularly so that dirt and dust build-up 17
is easily removed. Wipe away moisture with a dry swab.
18
19
Swab 19
21
Lens

Stopper ring Trackball housing

23
24
4 After cleaning them, reinstall the ball and the stopper ring. Don’t forget to tighten the
stopper ring. 24
26
27

19-17 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.4 Performance Check
Make performance check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it
immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in inspection and take full care that no
trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of inspection,
which can be used effectively in the next inspection work.
Carry out performance check on the items listed in the check list below.
Check List

Equipment Item to be checked Criteria

Display unit Screen image Can be correctly controlled
Screen operation
Cleaning the DVD drive 19.4.8 Cleaning the lens of the DVD
drive

19.4.1 Starting Selftest functions

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Selftest] button on the menu.

The [Selftest] dialog box appears.
Disclosure button

Selftest
functions

The Selftest functions are displayed in the left pane.

Click on the disclosure button to hide the left pain.

3 Click on a Selftest function to be executed.

The execution dialog of the selected Selftest function is displayed.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-18

 1
19.4.2 Confirming the screen status [Monitor Test] 2
Confirm the screen status.
3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.
4
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Selftest] - [Monitor Test] button on the menu. 5
When the color or pattern of the dialog is clicked on, the color or pattern is displayed on the
screen.
6
Check the screen status with the display status. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
To reset the display, click the button again.
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-19 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

Pattern list
Pattern button name Display
All Red

The entire screen is displayed in red.

All Green

The entire screen is displayed in green.

All Blue

The entire screen is displayed in blue.

All White

The entire screen is displayed in white.

Pattern4

Displays the pattern for checking the communication quality for VDR.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-20

 1
Pattern button name Display
Pattern5
2
3
4
5
6
Displays the pattern for checking the communication quality for VDR. 7
Pattern6
8
9
10
11
Displays the pattern for checking the communication quality for VDR.
12
Gray Scale 13
14
15
16
17
Displays the grey scale pattern for checking the monitor brightness
adjustment.
18
Grey scale patterns can be identified with brightness in day/night mode. By 19
adjusting the monitor brightness to facilitate identification of grey scale
patterns, the optimum brightness can be set. The brightness in night mode 19
can also be adjusted in the same way.
Use the Day/Night button on the right Tool Bar for switching between the day
21
and night mode. 23
For the details of the Day/Night button, refer to "2.2.2 Right toolbar".
24
24
26
27

19-21 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

Pattern button name Display
S-57 Color Pattern

A color test pattern of the S57 chart is displayed.

By identifying the color pattern, the S57 chart display status can be verified.
A color pattern can be displayed in Day/Night mode.
Use the Day/Night button on the right Tool Bar for switching between the day
and night mode.
For the details of the Day/Night button, refer to "2.2.2 Right toolbar"
ARCS Color Pattern The [ARCS Color Pattern] dialog is displayed.

A color test pattern of the ARCS chart is displayed.

By identifying the color pattern, the ARCS chart display status can be verified.
A color pattern can be displayed in Day/Night mode.
Use the Day/Night button on the right Tool Bar for switching between the day
and night mode.
For the details of the Day/Night button, refer to "2.2.2 Right toolbar ".

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-22

 1
19.4.3 Confirming the operation of the operation unit 2
[Key Test]
3
Note
In JAN-5203, this operation is not available due to function restriction. 4
Confirm the operation of the keys of the operation unit. 5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
6
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Selftest] - [Key Test] button on the menu.

7
3 Click on the [Key Test Start] button. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Key Test window is displayed.
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-23 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 4 Operate the keys, buttons and dials in the operation unit.
If the performance of the operation unit is normal, the colors of the keys, buttons and dials are
changed.

5 Click on the [Key Test Stop] button after the operation check.
Returns to the [Selftest] dialog box.

19.4.4 Confirming the alert sound [Sound Test]

Note
In JAN-5203, this operation is not available due to function restriction.

Confirm the alert sound.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Selftest] - [Sound Test] button on the menu.

3 Click on the [Sound Test Start] button.

A sound test starts. All the available beep sound volumes can be tested by increasing the level
from 0.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-24

 1
19.4.5 Testing the brightness of LED [Light Test] 2
Note
3
In JAN-5203, this operation is not available due to function restriction. 4
Test the brightness of the LED of the operation unit.
5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
6
The menu is displayed. 7
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Selftest] - [Light Test] button on the menu.
8
3 Click on the [Light Test Start] button.
A LED brightness test starts. All the available brightness levels can be tested by increasing the
9
level from 0. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-25 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.4.6 Checking the memory [Memory Check]
Check the memory.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Selftest] - [Memory Check] button on the menu.

3 Click on the [Memory Check Start] button.

Memory checking starts and the checking result is displayed on the [Result] list.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-26

 1
19.4.7 Cleaning the lens of the DVD drive 2
1 Insert the supplied lens cleaner CD into the DVD drive.
3
2 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.
4
3 Click [Maintenance] - [Selftest] - [DVD Drive Cleaning] from the menu. 5
Cleaning automatically starts.
The following dialog box appears during cleaning:
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4 When the cleaning completion dialog box appears, click on the [OK] button.
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
Remove the supplied lens cleaner CD.
24
24
26
27

19-27 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 Note
It is recommended that the DVD drive is cleaned at least once a month. If the lens becomes dirty, it
may not be possible to read data from a CD/DVD, or else it may not be possible to install a chart or
an update.
When reading the lens cleaner CD fails, an error dialog box appears.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-28

 1
19.5 Replacement of Major Parts 2
The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be replaced as scheduled.
3
Use of parts over their service life can cause a system failure.
4
5
6
Turn off the main power source before inspecting and replacing parts. 7
Otherwise, an electric shock or trouble may be caused.
8
The liquid crystal monitor shall be replaced by two more persons. If only
9
one person does this work, he may drop the LCD, resulting in injury. 10
11
12
19.5.1 Parts required for periodic replacement
Here are parts required for periodic replacement.
13
Replacement 14
Part type Name Part name Interval
kit type
NWZ-207 19inch monitor FAN 40,000 hours 7ZYNA4004
15
NWZ-214 19inch monitor FAN 60,000 hours 7BFRD0008 16
NWZ-208 26inch monitor FAN 40,000 hours 7ZYNA4005
NDC-2000-M2 Processing unit HDD 2 years CDD-789
17
NDC-2000-M2 Processing unit Battery 5 years CBD-1948 18
NDC-2000-M2 Processing unit CPU fan 5 years 7ZZNA4103
19
It becomes a

NDC-2000-M2 Processing unit Power source fan 3 years

complete set
exchange in
19
the power
supply part. 21
23
24
24
26
27

19-29 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.6 Software Update
This section describes software update of this equipment.

Note
When software update starts, the tasks that are active are automatically terminated. Complete the
necessary operation such as saving of settings prior to the start of update.

19.6.1 Local Update

1 Set the CD/DVD or USB flash memory containing the update data.

2 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.

The menu is displayed.

3 Change over to the second page using the page switching button, and click
[Maintenance] - [Software Update].

The [Software Update] dialog box appears.

4 Click on the [Software Update] button.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-30

 1
A file selection dialog box appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
5 From the "Drive" combo box, select the drive where the updating data is stored. 14
6 From the file list, select the file MFD_xx.xx.xxx.exe. 15
MFD_xx.xx.xxx.exe is displayed in [File name].
16
7 Click the [OK] button.
The update content confirmation dialog box appears. 17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-31 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 8 Confirm the contents and click "OK".
The following screen may be displayed.

Note
When this popup message is displayed, the chart data is deleted after completion of
sofware update. Re-import the chart after completion of software update.

9 Confirm the contents and click "OK".

Installation of the update is started and the following screen is displayed.

Wait for some time until the installation is completed.

Note
This equipment may restart during installation.

At completion of installation, the following screen is displayed.

10 Switch OFF the power supply of this equipment.

11 Restart this equipment.

12 Start ECDIS, and confirm that the software version number has been updated in the
"Software" tab by selecting [Maintenance] - [System Information].

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-32

 1
19.6.2 Remote Update 2
When Enable RMS of the menu ［service］－［Installation］－［Settings］－［RMS］ is valid, if you need
3
to update the software, the installer will be downloaded automatically from the RMS server.
You can use this installer to update the software. 4
Memo
5
Once a day, at 12:00 automatically check the version of the updater on the RMS server to see if 6
software update is necessary, and if it needs updating, download it.
The completion of the download will be notified in the next popup. 7
8
9
10
11
12
Note 13
Please do not perform remote update work while navigating.
During the update, you can not observe using ECDIS. 14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-33 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Change over to the second page using the page switching button, and click
[Maintenance] - [Software Update].

The [Software Update] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the [Software Update] button.

A file selection dialog box appears.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-34

 1
4 Check "Use the file from the RMS server.". 2
5 Click the [OK] button.
3
The update content confirmation dialog box appears.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
6 Confirm the contents and click "OK".
12
The following screen may be displayed. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Note 19
When this popup message is displayed, the chart data is deleted after completion of
sofware update. Re-import the chart after completion of software update. 21
23
24
24
26
27

19-35 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 7 Check the contents and click on [OK].
Installation of the update is started and the following screen is displayed.

Wait for some time until the installation is completed.

Note
This equipment may restart during installation.

At completion of installation, the following screen is displayed.

8 Switch OFF the power supply of this equipment.

9 Restart this equipment.

10 Start ECDIS, and confirm that the software version number has been updated in the
"Software" tab by selecting [Maintenance] - [System Information].

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-36

 1
19.7 Firmware Update 2
3
Note
In JAN-5203, this operation is not available due to function restriction. 4
5
Explain firmware update of this product.
6
Note
7
When the firmware update is started, the active task is automatically terminated.
Please complete necessary operations, such as saving settings, before updating starts. 8
9
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar. 10
The menu is displayed.
11
2 Change over to the second page using the page switching button, and click
[Maintenance] - [Software Update]. 12
13
14
15
16
The [Software Update] dialog box appears.
17
18
3 Click on the [Software Update] button.
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-37 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 A file selection dialog box appears.

USB Operation Unit

Select this when updating the firmware of the USB operation unit.
Carrier Board
Select this when updating the companion's firmware.

4 Click the [OK] button.

Firmware update is started and a popup is displayed.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-38

 1
When the update is completed, the following screen will be displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
5 Switch OFF the power supply of this equipment.
7
6 Restart this equipment.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-39 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.8 Updating Help Data
Note
JAN-5203 does not support the Help function.
Therefore, updating help data is unnecessary in JAN-5203.

This section describes updating of help data of this product.

Note
• Help data is classified to the data for RADAR, data for ECDIS, and data for Conning Display. To
display help information on each of the RADAR screen, ECDIS screen, and Conning Display
screen, install the help data for each display.
• When Help update starts, currently active tasks are terminated automatically. Complete the
necessary operations, such as saving the settings, before the start of update.

1 Set the CD/DVD or USB memory where update data is stored.

2 Click the [Menu] button on the Left Tool Bar.

A menu is displayed.

3 Switch the page to the 2nd page by using the page switching button and click
[Maintenance] - [Software Update].

The [Software Update] dialog is displayed.

4 Click the[Help Install] button.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-40

 1
A file selection dialog is displayed.
2
[Drive] combo box
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Folder tree File list
13
5 Select the drive containing update data from the [Drive] combo box.
14
6 Select the folder containing update data from the folder tree and check the file to be
updated from the file list. 15
7 Click the [Install] button. 16
Installation starts and the following screen is displayed.
17
18
19
19
21
23
Wait until installation is completed. 24
24
26
27

19-41 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 When installation is completed, the following screen is displayed.

8 Click the [OK] button.

Memo
• When the [Cancel] button is clicked during installation, installation of subsequent files is
cancelled after the installation of the file that is currently being installed is completed.
• When the selected update file already exists, the following screen is displayed.

End the operation by clicking on the [Cancel] button.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-42

 1
19.9 Confirming Maintenance INFO 2
19.9.1 Screen items/fields and their function 3
Maintenance INFO can be confirmed. 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left Tool Bar. 5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [Maintenance] - [Maintenance INFO] button on the menu.
7
(1) (2)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
21
(3) (4) (5)
23
The screen can be switched to either the standard window or the expanded window.
An example of an expanded window is shown above. 24
For the screen switching method, refer to "19.9.2 Switching to the standard window or the expanded
24
window."
26
27

19-43 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

(1) Number of pieces of maintenance information
The number of pieces of maintenance information being generated is displayed.

(2) Active page information

Up to twenty pieces of maintenance information can be displayed on a page. If maintenance
information exceeds 20 pieces and is displayed over multiple pages, the pages are switched by
operating the page change buttons.

Moves to the last page.

Moves to the top page.

Moves to the previous page. Moves to the next page.

(3) Maintenance information list

Maintenance information being generated is displayed. Clicking any information selects the
information.
• Details of the selected information are displayed in "(4) Detailed maintenance information."
• New maintenance information generated during screen display is added to the top of the list.
• Up to 1000 pieces of information can be displayed. When 1000 pieces are exceeded,
information is sequentially deleted from the oldest information.
• Either of the following icons is displayed in the [Status] column.
: Generated
: Resolved
Blank: Maintenance information which had been generated before the MFD was restarted
• The [Cause] column shows the names of maintenance information.
• The [Raised(UTC)] column shows the generation time and date (UTC) of maintenance
information.
• Clicking any item in the title line rearranges the list with reference to the clicked item.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-44

 1
(4) Detailed maintenance information
Details of the currently selected maintenance information are displayed.
2
 button  button 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Description 11
Cause The cause of the maintenance information is displayed.
Raised(UTC) The generation time and date (UTC) of the maintenance
information is displayed.
12
Rectified(UTC) The resolution time and date (UTC) of the maintenance
information is displayed.
13
Details Detailed information is displayed.
14
15
[] button
Clicking this button displays the details of the information with higher priority than currently displayed 16
information.
17
[] button 18
Clicking this button displays the details of the information with lower priority than currently displayed
information. 19
(5) [Export] button
19
Use this button to export maintenance information. 21
Refer to "19.9.3 Exporting maintenance information."
23
24
24
26
27

19-45 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.9.2 Switching to the standard window or the
expanded window
The Maintenance INFO screen can be switched to either the standard window or the expanded
window.
To switch to the expanded window, click the list expansion button.
To switch to the standard window, click the list standard button.

List standard button

List expansion button

[Example of expanded window]

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-46

 1
[Example of standard window]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Scroll bar
12
13
[Detail] button
14
15
The standard window includes the list screen and the details screen.
To switch to the details screen, click the [Detail] button. Then, the [Detail] button turns into the [List] 16
button.
To switch to the list screen, click the [List] button.
17
18
If the screen contents do not fit in the screen width, the scroll bar is displayed.
Dragging the scroll bar displays the contents not currently shown. 19
Memo
19
The initial display is shown in the expanded window. 21
23
24
24
26
27

19-47 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

19.9.3 Exporting maintenance information
Maintenance information can be exported as a CSV file to USB memory.
Information to be exported is that in the Cause, Raised (UTC), Rectified (UTC), and Detail fields.

1 Click the [Export] button on the Maintenance INFO screen.

The "Export" dialog box will appear.

2 Specify the Drive (name of the drive for the USB memory) to which information is
exported, Folder, and File Name.
Only [CSV File(*.csv)] can be selected for File Type.

3 Click the [OK] button.

To cancel information export, click the [x] button.

If a file with the same name exists:

The following pop-up window will appear.

To cancel the export, click the [No] button.

To overwrite the existing file with the same file name, click the [Yes] button.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-48

 1
19.10 Data Backup/Restore 2
3
4
5
Do not turn off the power supply during backup/restore. 6
Otherwise, a function fault occurs, leading to the possibility of an accident.
7
Do not back up data during sailing.
To start backup data, the ECDIS application must be terminated. Otherwise,
8
observation using the ECDIS is disabled, leading to the possibility of an 9
accident.
10
11
19.10.1 Backing up data
12
To maintain customer data, back up the data regularly by using the following procedure.
Connect an external medium such as USB memory for backup. 13
1 Press the Power supply button of the operation unit. 14
The power supply button is lit. Then, the task menu is displayed.
15
2 Click on the [Data Backup/Restore] button in the task menu.
16
17
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
The [Backup/Restore] dialog is displayed. 27

19-49 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 3 Click on the [Data Backup] tab.

Drive selection combo box

[Data Type] combo box

[Start] button

4 Select a drive of the data backup destination from the drive selection combo box.

5 Select the type of the data to be backed up in the [Data Type] combo box.
All: The entire user data is backed up.
Except Charts: The user data excluding chart data is backed up.

Note
When All is selected and there are many charts, backup operation may require a long
period of time.

6 Click on the [Start] button.

A confirmation dialog is displayed.

7 Click on the [OK] button.

Copying of data to the backup destination that is selected in the drive selection combo box
starts.

Note
Do not perform any other operations until backup is completed. Otherwise, backup may fail.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-50

 1
19.10.2 Restoring backed up data 2
Use the following procedure to restore backed up data into this equipment.
Connect the external medium (USB memory, etc.) in which backup data has been saved.
3
1 Press the power supply button of the operation unit. 4
The power supply button is lit. Then the task menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on the [Data Backup/Restore] button in the task menu.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
The [Backup/Restore] dialog is displayed.
16
3 Click on the [Data Restore] tab. 17
18
19
Drive selection combo box[3] 19
[Data Type] combo box
21
23
24
[Start] button
24
4 Select the drive in which backup data has been saved from the drive selection combo
box. 26
5 Select the type of the data to be restored in the [Data Type] combo box. 27
All: The entire user data is restored.
Except Charts: The user data excluding chart data is restored.

19-51 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

 6 Click on the [Start] button.
A confirmation dialog is displayed.

7 Click on the [OK] button.

Restoration of data from the drive that was selected from the drive selection combo box to the
hard disk of this equipment starts.
If data already exists in the hard disk, an overwriting confirmation dialog is displayed.
To start restoration, click the [OK] button.

Note
• Do not perform any operation until restoration is completed. If some operation is
performed, restoration may fail.
• If backup is executed while enough free space is not available in the USB memory, the
“Error” message is displayed. Secure enough free space before executing backup. For
the size of the data to be backed up, check the “Usage” column in the “File Information”
list in “17.4.2 Managing storage”. (For instance, when the AVCS chart for the entire world
is installed, the size will be about 11GB.)

Memo
If the data to be restored is incompatible with this equipment, the following dialog is
displayed and data is not restored.

Cancel the task by clicking on the [OK] button.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-52

 1
19.11 Recovery of the Images in the C Drive 2
3
4
Execute the system restoration by Recovery Boot CD after understanding working 5
of reading Recovery Boot CD enough well.
When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, it might cause the
6
breakdown. 7
Do not restore the system with tools other than attached Recovery Boot CD. It might
cause the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
8
Use the Recovery Boot CD which is attached each device. 9
When using the Recovery Boot CD which is attached other device, it might cause
10
the trouble and the breakdown of the equipment.
11
The system file is saved on the ATA /SATA flash disk. It becomes impossible to start / NDC-2000-M2 12
normally when the system file on the flash disk is destroyed by some causes.
The following "Deployment procedure of the system image by Recovery Boot CD" is the method of the
13
return to the state when the system file is shipped in the factory was described. 14
The system that was not able to start normally can be restored and be started by this procedure.
PL4.0 software and activate license are necessary beforehand when restoring.
15
16
Note：
・ When the ATA / SATA flash disk is physically out of order, it is not possible to restore it.
17
・ After the system is restored, it is not possible to start normally when the hard disk is out of order. 18
・ When an upgrade of software or an individual sensor setting is changed after the factory is shipped,
all those changes are deleted. 19
The setting of the sensor after the system is restored becomes set when the factory is shipped.
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-53 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

Use of [Recovery Boot CD]
Deployment procedure of system image by Recovery Boot CD

(1) Turn on the power supply of NDC-2000-M2, and turn off the power supply after inserting
the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD] into the DVD drive.
(2) Turn on the power supply of NDC-2000-M2, then start up the boot CD (Recovery Boot
CD).

(3) Confirm Disk information when the power supply of NDC-2000-M2 is turned on, and the following
message is displayed.

Under initialization. Please unit for a while.

The command completed successfully.

Microsoft（R） Windows Script Host Version 5.7

Copyright（C） Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disk Information
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disk0(7685MB). [8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
Disk1(305242MB). [WDC WD3200AVVS-63L2B0 ATA Device]

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
JAN-701B/901B Recover
Ver.2.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-54

 1
Confirm the System disk construction below.
・ Disk0[8GB SATA Flash Drive ATA Device]
2
Type of SATA Flash Disk 3
・ Disk1[WDC WD3200AVVS-63L2B0 ATA Device]
Type of Hard Disk
4
5
The type of disk might be different depending on the shipping time. Confirm the
content of the composition becomes Disk0/1, and the Disk0 is SATA flash disk. 6
Recovery Boot CD deploys [Recovery Image CD] with Disk0.
7
※ The SATA flash disk and the hard disk will be subjected to change in the future.
In that case, the type of different from the above-mentioned is displayed. 8
※ The power supply is turned off pushing the power switch of NDC-2000-M2 long
9
when the composition of Disk0/1 has reversed. Push the Ctrl+C key to the
keyboard again after the power supply is turned on, and the JRC logo is 10
displayed.
11
Execute the following operation after confirming the Disk composition is
restored. 12
※ When either or neither of Disk0/1 is displayed, the breakdown of the drive etc.
13
are thought. In that case, do not execute the following operation until the
breakdown etc. are resolved. 14
※ When abnormality continues operating to the disk configuration, all charts etc.
15
of the import settlement are deleted.

(4) Push the eject button of the DVD drive, and eject the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD].
16
(5) Insert the [Recovery Image CD] into DVD drive. 17
(6) Wait for blinking LED of the DVD drive to stop, and click a left button of the mouse or the track ball.
18
19
19
21
23
24
24
26
27

19-55 Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection

(7) GHOST starts, and the copy of the system from [Recovery Image CD] to ATA Flash Disk is begun
on the automatic operation.

(8) After the copy of the system is complete, the following messages are displayed.
Eject [Recovery Image CD] of the DVD drive, push the POWER switch of NDC-2000-M2
long, and turn off the power supply.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Disk0(7685MB).
Push the eject button [8GB SATAof theFlash
DVDDrive
drive,ATAandDevice]
eject the boot disk [Recovery Boot CD].
Disk1(305242MB). [WDC WD3200AVVS-63L2B0 ATA Device]
(2) Insert the [Recovery Image CD] into DVD drive.
(3) Wait for blinking LED of the DVD drive to stop, and click a left button of the mouse or the track
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ball.
JAN-701B/901B Recovery Boot DVD
Ver.2.0
(4) GHOST starts, and the copy of the system from [Recovery Image CD] to ATA Flash Disk is
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_______________________________________________________________________________
begun on the automatic operation.
.
* Remove DVD-ROM.
* KEEP pressing [POWER] button until power off.
____
I I
--+ +--
¥ /
¥ /
¥ /
¥ /
¥
[ POWER ]
_______________________________________________________________________________

(9) After turning on the power supply again, confirm that the system starts normally, and ends
the system recovery operation.

Section 19 Maintenance & Inspection 19-56

 1
Section 20 Failures and After-Sale 2
Services 3
4
20.1 Failure Detection
5
Semiconductor circuits can be considered to be almost free from defective semiconductors and/or 6
performance deterioration except when there are design and inspection errors, or external and human
induced causes. Generally, the causes of comparably frequent failures include line disconnection due
7
to humidity of the high resistor, failure of the variable resistor as well as contact failures of switches and 8
relays.
In addition to faulty parts, faulty adjustments (especially faulty tuning) or faulty maintenance (especially 9
faulty cable contact) occasionally make up causes of failures; thus, it is effective to reinspect or
readjust these items.
10
11
20.1.1 About alerts 12
Failures can be detected from alerts. 13
For details on alerts, please refer to "Appendix A, Alert List."
14
15
20.1.2 Alert description 16
For a description of alerts to be displayed, please refer to "Appendix A, Alert List."
17
18
20.1.3 S-57/63 chart related error message list
19
For more information about error messages that are displayed when the S-57/63 charts are imported
and updated on the ECDIS, please refer to "Reference Data 1: Notes on Alert Information of the 20
S-57/63 Charts" in the Instruction Manual provided separately from charts.
21
23
20.1.4 ARCS chart related error message list 24
For more information about error messages that are displayed when the ARCS charts are displayed on
the ECDIS, please refer to "Reference Data 2: Notes on Alert Information of the ARCS Charts" in the
25
Instruction Manual provided separately from charts. 26
27

20-1 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

20.1.5 Fuse inspection

JAN-5203 does not use any fuse.

List of Fuses Used

Fuse Name Name of Placement Count Part Spec. Change Kit Model
Model Used Location Name
Blade fuse NBD-913 Power 2 32VDC 15A part 1015(5ZFCK00008)
(Auto fuse) supply unit
Blade (mini) fuse NQE-1143 JB 1 32VDC 15A part 1215(5ZFCK00017)
(Auto fuse)
Blade (mini) fuse 2 32VDC 3A part 1203(5ZFCK00016)
(Auto fuse)
Glass fuse 4 250V 0.5A part MF51NR 250V
0.5(5ZFGD00019)

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-2

 1
20.2 Countermeasures for Failures 2
3
20.2.1 Repair circuit block
4
Repair Block (JAN-5203)

Location Circuit Block Name Model Name Remarks

5
Display unit Display unit NWZ-208 6
Display unit FAN kit for changing the 7ZYNA4005 For NWZ-208
26inch MNU 7
Display unit Display unit NWZ-207
Display unit FAN kit for changing the 7ZYNA4004 For NWZ-207
8
19inch MNU
9
Display unit Display unit NWZ-214
Display unit FAN kit for changing the 7BFRD0008 For NWZ-214 10
19inch MNU
Keyboard operation unit Keyboard operation unit G84-4400 11
Processing unit SSD CDD-788
12
Processing unit HDD CDD-789
Processing unit DVD CDD-747 13
Processing unit Power supply unit CBD-1947
Processing unit Battery CBD-1948
14
Processing unit IF terminal unit CQD-2261 15
Processing unit Front panel CCK-969
Processing unit CPU FAN replacement kit 7ZZNA4103
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27

20-3 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

20.3 Troubleshooting
When this equipment does not operate correctly, check the following points before asking for repairs.
Consult with your nearest subsidiary company, branch office, or sales office if the problem does not get
solved even after checking and correcting these points, or if there are any abnormally locations other
than the following items.

Symptom Cause Action

The power is not
supplied.
Alternatively, the The breaker of the power supply unit
equipment does not start of the equipment body is not turned Set the breaker to ON.
even if the Power button on.
of the operation unit is
pressed.
[POWER FAIL] lamp is
lit.
The power is not
supplied to the monitor.
Although the power is
supplied to the monitor,
the screen is not
displayed.
The brightness of the
monitor cannot be
adjusted.
The trackball or the
option keyboard cannot
be operated.
The AC power supply is not turned
on.
The AC power supply is not input
within the specified range.
The AC power cable is not connected Connect the AC power cable to the
to the equipment body.
The equipment body is faulty.
The DC power is not supplied from
the distribution board.
The AC power supply has dropped.
The equipment body is faulty.
The display unit is not activated.
The internal wiring is faulty.
The display
(NWZ-208/NWZ-207/NWZ-214) is
faulty.
The brightness of the monitor is set
to the minimum level.
The internal wiring is faulty.
The display
(NWZ-208/NWZ-207/NWZ-214) is
faulty.
The display
(NWZ-208/NWZ-207/NWZ-214) is
faulty.
The keyboard operation unit is faulty.
Turn on the AC power supply.
Input the AC power supply within the
specified range.
equipment body.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Supply the DC power from the
distribution board.
Input the AC power supply within the
specified range.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Activate the display unit.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Adjust the brightness of the monitor
to the appropriate level.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-4

 1
Symptom Cause Action
The trackball does
2
cannot be moved The trackball is dirty. Clean the trackball. 3
smoothly.
Although the power is 4
supplied and the screen
is displayed, the display
5
The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
is frozen, disabling
is faulty. repair.
6
processing to advance
up to display of the task 7
menu.
8
Some task menus The device license has not been Install the license of the device to be
cannot be selected. installed. used. 9
The cursor is not The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
displayed correctly. is faulty. repair.
10
Characters/symbols are The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for 11
not displayed correctly. is faulty. repair.
Position information The communication is not set
12
Set the communication correctly.
(GPS) is not displayed. correctly.
13
The power supply for the GPS Turn on the power supply for the
equipment is not turned on. GPS equipment. 14
The GPS equipment does not Check the state of the GPS
15
perform positioning. equipment.
Check the connection with the GPS 16
equipment.
The connection with the GPS When GPS equipment is connected
17
equipment is abnormal. to the serial LAN interface circuit, 18
check if the LED of the corresponding
port is lit at data reception. 19
The power supply for the serial-LAN
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
20
turned on. Turn on the power supply for the 21
(Case where the GPS equipment is serial-LAN interface circuit.
connected to the serial-LAN interface 23
circuit)
24
The serial-LAN interface circuit
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
Make a request to the distributor for
25
(Case where the GPS equipment is
connected to the serial-LAN interface
repair. 26
circuit)
27
Make a request to the distributor for
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair.
The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
is faulty. repair.
20-5 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services
 Symptom Cause Action
AIS information is not The communication is not set
Set the communication correctly.
displayed. correctly.
The power supply for the AIS Turn on the power supply for the AIS
equipment is not turned on. equipment.
The AIS equipment does not perform Check the state of the AIS
positioning. equipment.
Check the connection with the AIS
equipment.
The connection with the AIS When AIS equipment is connected to
equipment is abnormal. the serial LAN interface circuit, check
if the LED of the corresponding port
is lit at data reception.
The power supply for the serial-LAN
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
turned on. Turn on the power supply for the
(Case where the AIS equipment is serial-LAN interface circuit.
connected to the serial-LAN interface
circuit)
The serial-LAN interface circuit
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
Make a request to the distributor for
(Case where the AIS equipment is
repair.
connected to the serial-LAN interface
circuit)
Make a request to the distributor for
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair.
The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
is faulty. repair.

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-6

 1
Symptom Cause Action
The azimuth of the Gyro The communication is not set
2
Set the communication correctly.
compass is not correctly. 3
displayed. The power supply for the Gyro Turn on the power supply for the
Alternatively, the azimuth compass equipment is not turned on. Gyro compass equipment. 4
rotation direction is not
displayed correctly.
Check the connection with the Gyro 5
compass equipment.
When gyro compass equipment is 6
The connection with the Gyro
connected to the serial LAN interface
compass equipment is abnormal.
circuit or gyro interface circuit, check
7
if the corresponding LED is lit at 8
signal reception.

The power supply for the serial-LAN

9
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not 10
turned on. Turn on the power supply for the
(Case where the Gyro compass serial-LAN interface circuit. 11
equipment is connected to the
serial-LAN interface circuit)
12
The serial-LAN interface circuit 13
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
(Case where the Gyro compass
Make a request to the distributor for 14
repair.
equipment is connected to the
15
serial-LAN interface circuit)
The Gyro interface circuit (CMJ-554) 16
is not set correctly Set the Gyro interface circuit
(Case where the Gyro compass correctly according to the Gyro
17
equipment is connected to the Gyro compass equipment. 18
interface circuit)
The fuse of the gyro interface circuit Replace the fuse of the gyro interface 19
(CMJ-554) has blown. circuit.
20
The Gyro interface circuit (CMJ-554)
is faulty.
Make a request to the distributor for
21
(Case where the Gyro compass
equipment is connected to the Gyro
repair. 23
interface circuit)
24
Make a request to the distributor for
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair. 25
The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
26
is faulty. repair.
27

20-7 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

 Symptom
Log is not displayed or
the values are not
displayed correctly.
Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services
Cause Action
The communication is not set
Set the communication correctly.
correctly.
The power supply for the log Turn on the power supply for the log
equipment is not turned on. equipment.
Check the connection with the log
equipment.
When log equipment is connected to
The connection with the log
the serial LAN interface circuit or gyro
equipment is abnormal.
interface circuit, check if the
corresponding LED blinks at signal
reception.
The power supply for the serial-LAN
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
turned on. Turn on the power supply for the
(Case where the log equipment is serial-LAN interface circuit.
connected to the serial-LAN interface
circuit).
The serial-LAN interface circuit
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
Make a request to the distributor for
(Case where the log equipment is
repair.
connected to the serial-LAN interface
circuit).
The Gyro interface circuit (CMJ-554)
is not set correctly. Set the Gyro interface circuit
(Case where the log equipment is correctly according to the log
connected to the Gyro interface equipment.
circuit).
The Gyro interface circuit (CMJ-554) Make a request to the distributor for
is faulty. repair.
(Case where the log equipment is
connected to the Gyro interface
circuit).
Make a request to the distributor for
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair.
The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
is faulty. repair.
20-8
 1
Symptom Cause Action
Rudder angles are not The communication is not set
2
Set the communication correctly.
displayed. correctly. 3
Alternatively, the values The power supply for the rudder Turn on the power supply for the
are not displayed angle indicator is not turned on. rudder angle indicator. 4
correctly.
Check the connection with the rudder
5
angle indicator.

The connection with the rudder angle

When a rudder angle indicator is 6
connected to the serial LAN interface
indicator is abnormal.
circuit, check if the LED of the 7
corresponding port is lit at data
8
reception.
The power supply for the serial-LAN 9
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
turned on.
10
(Case where the rudder angle Turn on the power supply for the 11
indicator is connected to the serial-LAN interface circuit.
serial-LAN interface circuit or the 12
rudder angle indicator is connected
to the analog option circuit)
13
The serial-LAN interface circuit 14
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
(Case where the rudder angle 15
Make a request to the distributor for
indicator is connected to the
serial-LAN interface circuit or the
repair. 16
rudder angle indicator is connected 17
to the analog option circuit)
The analog option circuit (CMJ-560) 18
is not set correctly.
(Case where the rudder angle
Set the analog option circuit correctly
according to the rudder angle
19
indicator is connected to the analog indicator. 20
option circuit)
The analog option circuit (CMJ-560)
21
is faulty.
Make a request to the distributor for 23
(Case where the rudder angle
repair.
indicator is connected to the analog 24
option circuit)
Make a request to the distributor for
25
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair. 26
The processing unit (NDC-2000-M2) Make a request to the distributor for
is faulty. repair. 27

20-9 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

 Symptom
Wind direction/wind speed
(anemoscope/anemometer) correctly.
data is not displayed.
Cause Action
The communication is not set
Set the communication correctly.
The power supply for the
Turn on the power supply for the
anemoscope/anemometer is not
anemoscope/anemometer.
turned on.
Check the connection with the
anemoscope/anemometer.
The connection with the
Check if the LED of the
anemoscope/anemometer is
corresponding port of the serial LAN
abnormal.
interface circuit is lit at data
reception.
The power supply for the serial-LAN
Turn on the power supply for the
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
serial-LAN interface circuit.
turned on.
The serial-LAN interface circuit
Make a request to the distributor for
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
repair.

Make a request to the distributor for

The internal wiring is faulty.
The processing unit
(NDC-2000-M2) is faulty.
Water depth values are not The communication is not set
displayed. correctly.
The power supply for the echo
sounder is not turned on.
The connection with the echo
sounder is abnormal.
The power supply for the serial-LAN
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
turned on.
The serial-LAN interface circuit
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
The internal wiring is faulty.
The processing unit
(NDC-2000-M2) is faulty.
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Set the communication correctly.
Turn on the power supply for the
echo sounder.
Check the connection with the echo
sounder.
Check if the LED of the
corresponding port of the serial LAN
interface circuit is lit at data
reception.
Turn on the power supply for the
serial-LAN interface circuit.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-10

 1
Symptom Cause Action
Sensor signals are not The communication is not set
2
Set the communication correctly.
displayed. correctly. 3
The power supply for the sensor Turn on the power supply for the
equipment is not turned on. sensor equipment. 4
Check the connection with the
sensor equipment.
5
The connection with the sensor Check if the LED of the 6
equipment is faulty. corresponding port of the serial LAN
interface circuit is lit at data 7
reception.
8
The power supply for the serial-LAN
Turn on the power supply for the
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
serial-LAN interface circuit.
9
turned on.
Make a request to the distributor for
10
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair. 11
The indicator such as the
serial-LAN interface circuit 12
Make a request to the distributor for
(CMH-2370), analog option circuit
(CMJ-560), and processing unit
repair. 13
(NDC-2000-M2) is faulty. 14
Autopilot is disabled. The communication is not set
correctly.
Set the communication correctly. 15
The autopilot function is not
Operate autopilot correctly. 16
operated correctly.
The power supply for the autopilot Turn on the power supply for the 17
equipment is not turned on. autopilot equipment.
18
Check the connection with the
autopilot equipment. 19
The connection with the autopilot Check if the LED of the
equipment is faulty. corresponding port of the serial LAN 20
interface circuit is lit at data
21
reception.
The power supply for the serial-LAN 23
Turn on the power supply for the
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
turned on.
serial-LAN interface circuit. 24
The serial-LAN interface circuit Make a request to the distributor for 25
(CMH-2370) is faulty. repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
26
The internal wiring is faulty.
repair. 27
The processing unit Make a request to the distributor for
(NDC-2000-M2) is faulty. repair.

20-11 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

 Symptom
Contact signals are not
output.
If the power supply is
turned off, the track data is The processing unit
cleared without being
stored.
UPS does not function.
Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services
Cause
The power supply for the serial-LAN
interface circuit (CMH-2370) is not
turned on.
(Case where contact signal output
is acquired from the serial-LAN
interface circuit)
The serial-LAN interface circuit
(CMH-2370) is faulty.
(Case where contact signal output
is acquired from the serial-LAN
interface circuit)
The internal wiring is faulty.
The processing unit
(NDC-2000-M2) is faulty.
(NDC-2000-M2) is faulty.
The connection with UPS is faulty.
UPS is not set correctly.
The UPS battery is extremely
depleted.
The internal wiring is faulty.
UPS is faulty.
20-12
Action
Turn on the power supply for the
serial-LAN interface circuit.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Check the connection with UPS.
Set UPS correctly.
Replace the battery.
[Note]
At the battery replacement, make a
request for the work to the
specialized service staff. During the
replacement, turn off the
corresponding power supply
breaker in the ship. Otherwise, an
unexpected accident may occur.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
Make a request to the distributor for
repair.
 1
Symptom Cause Action
The following popup Close the popup window and after
2
window is displayed.
System has detected an
checking that there is no problem
even if the power of this equipment is 3
A communication error occurred. turned off, turn off the power once
error.
Turn the power off and and turn on the power again. 4
on again.
The system repeats When the system repeats restart,
5
restart. DMA error. turn off the power of the equipment
and contact the distributor.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27

20-13 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

20.4 After-Sale Services
20.4.1 About the retaining period of service parts
The retaining period of the performance-critical parts for servicing this product (parts required to
maintain the functionality of the product) is 10 years after the discontinuation of production.

20.4.2 When requesting a repair

If you suspect a failure, please read "20.3 Troubleshooting" thoroughly and check the unit again.
If you still detect abnormality, stop using the product and contact your sales representative, our sales
department, nearest branch office or sales office.

• Repair during the warranty period: If a failure occurs in the course of using the product correctly
according to the explanations and instructions in the Instruction Manual, your sales representative
or our company shall repair the product at no charge. However, repairs of failures caused by
misuse, negligence, or act of God such as natural disasters and fire shall be chargeable.
• If the warranty period has expired: If functionality can be recovered by repair, repair shall be
made by the request of the customer for a fee.
• Please provide the following information:
- Product name, model name, manufacturing date, serial number
- Description of abnormality (as detail as possible) (Please refer to the next page "RPS Failure
Checklist.")
- Business name or organization name, address, phone number

20.4.3 Recommendation of inspection and

maintenance
Although it depends on the usage state, performance may deteriorate by change in parts over time,
Separately from regular care, inspection and maintenance are recommended.
Regarding inspection and maintenance, please contact your sales representative, our sales
department, nearest branch office or sales office.
Please note that there is a charge for inspection and maintenance.

If you have questions regarding after-sale services, please inquire your sales representative,
our sales department, nearest branch office or sales office.

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-14

 1
RPS Failure Checklist
2
[Important] Before ordering a repair, please check and fill in the following items and then contact the
applicable repair office. 3
If there are unknown items, please contact the ship and fill in as accurate as possible.
4
Ship Name: ___________________ Phone: _____________ Fax: __________________

5203
Integrated RPS Model Name: JAN- ____________________ Serial Number: ________________
5
(Please fill in all digits accurately.) 6
(1) Check the following items sequentially and circle either YES or NO for each item. 7
If none is applicable, please write down the specific reason in No. (8) Others.
8
No. Check Item Result 9
(1) The power turns ON. (The light of the operation unit illuminates.) YES NO
(2) The starting screen is displayed. YES NO 10
(3) The task screen is displayed. YES NO
11
(4) The RPS screen is displayed. YES NO
(5) Operation using the trackball or keyboard is possible. YES NO 12
(6) Range changing or movement of the chart can be done smoothly. YES NO 13
(7) The various sensors are displayed normally. YES NO
(8) Others (error messages, etc.)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27

20-15 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

20.4.4 Extending the functions
The functions that are available for this equipment can be extended.
To extend a function, new license information (file) must be obtained and imported to this equipment.
For function extension, please request to our sales department or our branch office, sales office, or
agent near your premises.

20.4.4.1 Importing the license information

Import the license information that was obtained (license file) to this equipment via the USB flash
memory.
Connect the USB flash memory in which the license information is stored.

1 Press the Power button of the operation unit.

The Power button is lit. After a while, a task menu is displayed.

Password input section

2 Click on the password input section.

A password input dialog is displayed.

3 Enter the password, 9380.

The [Import License] dialog is displayed.

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-16

 1
4 Click on the [Browse] button.
2
The [System] dialog is displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
[File Name] combo box 8
9
5 Select the name of the license file (example: JRCMFD.lcn) that is stored in the USB
flash memory from the [File Name] combo box and click on the [OK] button. 10
The [System] dialog is closed.
11
6 Click on the [Import] button.
When import is completed, a confirmation dialog box appears.
12
Close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button. 13
7 Close the [Import License] dialog box by clicking on [x] button and return to the task
14
menu.
In this case, a new license is adopted. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27

20-17 Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services

Section 20 Failures and After-Sale Services 20-18
 1
Section 21 About Disposal 2
3
21.1 About Disposal of This Equipment
When disposing of this equipment, follow the regulations and/or rules of the local regulatory authority
4
which has control over the location of disposal. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27

21-1 Section 21 About Disposal

21.2 Chinese Version RoHS

有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements)

形式名(Type): JAN-5203 名称(Name): Route Planning System

有毒有害物质或元素
(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
部件名称
(Part name)
铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)

主船内装置(Inboard Unit)
・显示装置(Display Unit)
× × × × × ×

主船内装置(Inboard Unit)
・键盘装置(Keyboard Unit)
× × × × × ×

主船内装置(Inboard Unit)
・信号处理装置(Processing Unit)
× ○ × × ○ ○
外部设备(Peripherals)
・选择(Options)
・电线类(Cables) × ○ × × ○ ○
・手册(Documennts)
○： 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11306-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is
below the requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.)
×： 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for
this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

Section 21 About Disposal 21-2

 1
Section 22 Specifications 2
3
22.1 JAN-5203 4
GENERAL SPECIFICATION JAN-5203 5
Display 19- or 26-inch Wide LCD
Bearing Indication Relative motion mode: North UP/Course UP/Head
6
UP/Waypoint UP 7
True motion mode: North UP/Course UP/Waypoint UP
Operation Cursor and keys 8
External media General-purpose USB port × 2, DVD drive
Ambient Condition
9
-15°C to +55°C (Storage: -25°C to +70°C)
- Operating Temperature 10
Ambient Condition
- Relative Humidity
+40°C, 93%
11
Ambient Condition 2 to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1mm ±10%
- Vibration 13.2 to 100 Hz: Acceleration 7m/s2
12
Power Supply Input 100 to 115VAC, 50/60 Hz 1φ
13
220 to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz 1φ
24VDC 14
Power Consumption Display (HP E190i)/when the keyboard operation unit is
connected: 150VA 15
Display (NWZ-207)/when the keyboard operation unit is
16
connected: 185VA
Display (NWZ-208)/when the keyboard operation unit is 17
connected: 220VA
Power Supply Voltage Fluctuation AC input: ±10% 18
DC input: +30%, -10%
19
Control Unit
Processing Unit NDC-2000-M2 20
Operation Unit
Keyboard Operation Unit G84-4400LPBGB-2 21
Display
Display HP E190i (19-inch)
22
NWZ-207/NWZ-214 (19-inch) 22
NWZ-208 (26-inch)
Option Unit
23
Sensor LAN Switch Unit NQA-2443 25
26inch Desktop Frame Rack CWB-1595
26inch Display Unit Mount Kit CWA-246 26
Safe Distance For Standard Compass
Display unit 1.6 m
27
付録

22-1 Section 22 Specifications

22.2 Display Unit
FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION
View
Scale
Range
Motion mode
Bearing display mode
View mode
Navigational tools
Bearing Scale
Heading Line Indication
Range Rings
Variable Range Marker (VRM)
VRM range display
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
EBL bearing display
Trackball Cursor
Parallel Index Line (PI)
Sea chart functions
Chart Display Function
Chart Addition Function
Update
Course planning functions
Course preparation
Section 22 Specifications
1:1,000–1:40,000,000 (19 inch)
1:1,000-1:20,000,000 (26 inch)
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
TM (True Motion) display/(RM (Relative Motion) display
Relative motion mode: North UP/Course UP/Head
UP/Waypoint UP
True motion mode: North UP/Course UP/Head
up/Waypoint UP
Zoom area selection
Fix View
Multi View
Chart drag
Off-center
Chart original scale display
360° in 1° step
Yes
0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 NM
2
0.000 to 999.9NM, 4-digit display
2 (center/independent)
0.000 to 359.9°, 4-digit display
Yes (range, true/relative bearing, TTG, ETA display)
Yes (All/Individual/Track/Equiangular)
S-57 Ed3.0/3.1
S-63
C-Map Ed3.0 Professional/Professional+
C-Map ENC
Jeppesen PRIMAR ECDIS Service
ARCS
AVCS Pre-install
AIO
C-Map Dynamic License
Manual or semi-automatic
Table editing
Graphic editing
22-2
 1
Course editing Waypoint addition, deletion, or editing
Alternative course preparation 2
Course copying
3
Inter-course coupling
Safety check Present 4
Number of course displays Maximum 4 types
Sailing monitoring functions 5
Own ship Monitoring by positioning device
Monitoring by duplexed positioning device
6
Time stamp display 7
Anchor drag monitoring
Own ship course trace back display 8
Ship course monitoring Monitoring of deep line crossing such as safety, etc.
Monitoring for point water depth
9
Monitoring of obstacles, approaching sailing prohibited 10
region (S-57/S-63/C-Map)
Ship course break away monitoring 11
Next WP arrival monitoring
Course deviation monitoring
12
Other ship monitoring Monitoring by TT display (200 targets max.) 13
Monitoring by AIS display (500 targets max.)
User map 14
Number of displayed points 100,000 points (mark, lines)
Export Possible (USB flash memory)
15
Other functions
16
Data display function Conning data block display
Self diagnosis function Present 17
Remote maintenance function Present
Playback Data for playback (3 months max.) 18
Logbook function Sailing journal recording data (3 months max.)
19
Receivable signals (i)
Ship heading THS > HDT (over 40Hz) 20
Course GGA > RMC > RMA > GNS > GLL
Geodetic positioning system DTM
21
Date information ZDA 22
COG/SOG RMC > RMA > VTG
22
Ship speed through water VBW
Turning speed ROT 23
Water depth DPT > DBS > DBK > DBT
25
26
27
付録

22-3 Section 22 Specifications

 Wind direction/wind speed MWV > MWD
Air temperature MTA > MDA
Water temperature MTW > MDA
Atmospheric pressure MMB > MDA
Humidity MHU > MDA
AIS VDM, VDO
TT data TTM, TLL, TTD, TLB
AIS target data TTM, TLL, TTD, TLB
Alert ACN、 HBT
NAVTEX NAVTEX or JRC format
Transmittable signals
Own ship data OSD
Watch Timer Reset EVE*1
TT data TTM, TLL, TTD, TLB
Remote maintenance data JRC format
Alert ALC、 ALF、 ARC、 HBT
Route information ECDIS information notification (PJRC, EIF00/PJRC,
EIS00/WPL)
Autopilot information ECDIS information notification (PJRC, EIF00)
NAVTEX NRM
Visual range
Visual range 1.05m from the center of display
i. The measuring precision of the speed sensor complies with IMO Resolution MSC.96(72).
The measuring precision of the GPS sensor complies with IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).

*1 When the value exceeds the set value, a message is output indicating a non-operation state. The value is set at
installation.

Section 22 Specifications 22-4

 1
22.3 Processing Unit 2
3
GENERAL SPECIFICATION NDC-2000-M2: Processing unit
CPU Intel Core i5-2510E 2.5GHz 4
Main Memory 2GB
Mechanical
5
Dimension Width 340 x Depth 372 x Height 170 (mm) 6
Mass 12kg
FAN Built-in power source fan × 1, CPU fan × 2 7
Environment
Operational Temperature -15°C to +55°C
8
Operational Humidity 40°C RH 93% 9
Vibration Sweep 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz at ± 1 mm, 13.2Hz to 100Hz at 7m/s2 and
for 2h on each resonance, otherwise 2h at 30Hz in all three axes 10
EMC IEC60945-Ed4.0
Interfaces
11
DVI-D 1
12
VGA 1 (Slave output as DVI-D)
IEC61162-1 Not supported 13
IEC61162-2 Not supported
Dry Contact Output 2 (Power Fail and Watch Timer Reset ) 14
Normally Close Power Fail (32V 0.8A MAX)
15
Normally Open Watch Timer Reset (32V 0.8A MAX)
Operation Unit 1 16
USB I/F 2
Power Supply 17
AC Input
Voltage Range
18
Overvoltage Protection Provided 19
Input Current Display (HP E190i)/when the keyboard operation unit is connected:
150VA 20
Display (NWZ-207)/when the keyboard operation unit is
connected: 185VA
21
Display (NWZ-208)/when the keyboard operation unit is 22
connected: 220VA
Overcurrent Protection Provided
22
Battery Incorporated 23
25
26
27
付録

22-5 Section 22 Specifications

22.4 19inch Display
GENERAL SPECIFICATION NWZ-207: Display
Screen Size 19inch
Aspect Ratio 5:4
Full Resolution 1280 × 1024
1280 × 1024, 1280 × 960, 1024 × 768, 800 × 600, 640 ×
Supported format
480, 720 × 400
Dot Pitch 0.294 mm
Viewing Area 376.32 mm × 301.06 mm
Display Colors 16.77 million colors
Contrast Ratio 2000:1
Viewing Angles (H / V) 178°/178°
Back Light LED
Brightness 500cd/m2 Type
Horizon 30 kHz to 80 kHz
Digital Scanning Frequency (H / V)
Vertical 56 Hz to 75 Hz
DVI-D input 1
VGA input 1
VGA output N/A
USB Flash Memory 1
Power 21.6 to 31.2VDC
Overvoltage Protection N/A
DC Reverse Connection Protection Self Return Type
Cables Up to 5m
Glass Bonding Standard
Mechanical
Dimension Width 429 x Depth 76 x Height 382 (mm)
Mass 6.0kg
Fan 1
Glass Tempered Glass + AR Coating
Environment
Operational Temperature -15°C to +55°C
Operational Humidity 40°C RH 93%
Sweep 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz at ± 1 mm, 13.2 Hz to 100 Hz at
Vibration 7m/s2 and for 2h on each resonance, otherwise 2h at 30 Hz
in all three axes
EMS IEC60945-Ed4.0
Ingress Protection Rating Front:IP65 Back:IP22

Section 22 Specifications 22-6

 1
GENERAL SPECIFICATION HP E190i
Screen Size 19 inch 2
Aspect Ratio
Full Resolution
5：4
1280×1024
3
Supported format 1280×1024, 1280×960, 1024×768, 800×600, 640×480, 4
720×400
Dot Pitch 0.2928mm 5
Viewing Area 374.7×299.8mm
Display Colors 16.77 million colors
6
Contrast Ratio 1000:1 7
Viewing Angles (H / V) 178°/178°
Back Light LED 8
Brightness 250cd/m2
Digital Scanning Frequency (H / V) Horizon: 30 kHz to 80 kHz
9
Vertical: 56 Hz to 75 Hz
10
Structure (not including the stand)
Dimension 41.7×4.7×34.7 (Width × Depth × Height) 11
Mass 3 kg
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
23
25
26
27
付録

22-7 Section 22 Specifications

 GENERAL SPECIFICATION NWZ-214 : Display
Screen Size 19inch
Aspect Ratio 5:4
Full Resolution 1280 × 1024
1280 × 1024, 1280 × 960, 1024 × 768, 800 × 600, 640 ×
Supported format
480, 720 × 400
Dot Pitch 0.294 mm
Viewing Area 376.32 mm × 301.06 mm
Display Colors 16.77 million colors
Contrast Ratio 2000:1
Viewing Angles (H / V) 178°/ 178°
Back Light LED
Brightness 1000cd/m2 Type
Horizon 30 kHz to 80 kHz
Digital Scanning Frequency (H / V)
Vertical 56 Hz to 75 Hz
DVI-D input 1
VGA input 1
VGA output N/A
USB I/F N/A
Power 21.6 to 31.2VDC
Overvoltage Protection N/A
DC Reverse Connection Protection Self Return Type
Cables Up to 5m
Glass Bonding Standard
Mechanical
Dimension Width 429 × Depth 76 × Height 382 (mm)
Mass 4.6kg
Fan 1
Glass Tempered Glass + AR Coating
Environment
Operational Temperature -15°C to +55°C
Operational Humidity 40°C RH 93%
Sweep 2Hz to 13.2Hz at ± 1mm, 13.2Hz to 100Hz at
Vibration 7m/s2 and for 2h on each resonance, otherwise 2h at 30
Hz in all three axes
EMC IEC60945-Ed4.0
Ingress Protection Rating Front:IP65 Back:IP22

Section 22 Specifications 22-8

 1
22.5 26inch Display 2
3
GENERAL SPECIFICATION NWZ-208: Display
Screen Size 26inch 4
Aspect Ratio 16:10
Full Resolution 1920 × 1200RB
5
1920 × 1200RB, 1680 × 1050, 1680 × 1050RB, 1600 × 6
Supported format 1200, 1600 × 1200RB, 1280 × 1024, 1024 × 768, 800 × 600,
640 × 480 7
Dot Pitch 0.2865 mm
Viewing Area 550.08 mm × 343.8 mm
8
Display Colors 16.77 million colors 9
Contrast Ratio 1500:1
Viewing Angles (H / V) 176°/176° 10
Back Light LED
Brightness 400cd/m2 Type
11
Digital Scanning Frequency (H / V)
Horizon 30 kHz to 75 kHz
12
Vertical 56 Hz to 75 Hz
DVI-D input 1 13
VGA input 1
VGA output 1 14
USB I/F 1
15
21.6 to 31.2VDC
Power
85 to 265VAC 50/60Hz 16
Overvoltage Protection N/A
DC Reverse Connection Protection Self-Return Type 17
Cables
Glass Bonding
Up to 5 m
Optional
18
Mechanical 19
Dimension Width 624 x Depth 85 x Height 456 (mm)
Mass 16kg 20
Fan
Glass
2
Tempered Glass + AR Coating
21
Environment 22
Operational Temperature -15°C to +55°C
Operational Humidity 40°C RH 93%
22
Sweep 2 Hz to 13.2Hz at ± 1 mm, 13.2 Hz to 100 Hz at 23
Vibration 7m/s2 and for 2h on each resonance, otherwise 2h at 30Hz
in all three axes 25
EMC IEC60945-Ed4.0
Ingress Protection Rating Front: IP65 Back: IP22
26
27
付録

22-9 Section 22 Specifications

Section 22 Specifications 22-10
 １
Appendix A Alert List 2
Please refer to the following instruction manual. 3
Instruction Manual Reference Section 4
JAN-7201/9201 Appendix A
Instruction Manual ＜Reference＞ Alert List 5
JAN-7201S/9201S Appendix A
Instruction Manual ＜Reference＞ Alert List
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
APP A
23
24
25

A-1 Appendix A Alert List

Appendix A Alert List A-2
 1
Appendix B Menu List and Materials 2
Please refer to the following instruction manual. 3
Instruction Manual Reference Section 4
JAN-7201/9201 Appendix B
Instruction Manual ＜Reference＞ Menu List and Materials 5
JAN-7201S/9201S Appendix B
Instruction Manual ＜Reference＞ Menu List and Materials
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
APP B
24
25

27
B-1 Appendix B Menu List and Materials APP C
 Software License Agreement

This Software License Agreement is made and entered between the user who purchased a product of
JAN-5203 and Japan Radio Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as "JRC") with regard to the license to use
the software in the product series.

• You have purchased a device that uses software licensed from Microsoft License in the U.S. and
Trend Micro Incorporated to JRC. The software which was developed by Microsoft and Trend Micro
and installed in the device along with the printed documentation attached to it and its online or
electronic documents (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Software") are protected by
international laws and conventions in relation to the protection of intellectual properties.
The licensed Software has not been sold to you and all rights in and to the Software are reserved.

• If you do not agree to execute this License Agreement, you will not be allowed to use the
device or copy the Software. If you do not agree to the provisions and terms hereof, you are
requested to immediately inform us of your intention to return the device before you start to
use it so that JRC can repay you the amount you have paid for it. By using the Software in
the state as installed in the device or in any other way, you agree to the provisions of this
License Agreement (or confirm your prior agreement).

• Conditions of the license shall be stipulated as follows:

‒ The Software shall only be licensed for the use in the state as installed in the device you have
purchased.
‒ Indemnification: The Software itself is not free from defects. JRC has defined on its own
account how to use the Software installed in JRC’s devices. For this reason, Microsoft
and Trend Micro trust JRC to conduct sufficient tests to determine whether the
Software is suitable for such usage as a prerequisite for the use of the Software.
‒ The Software is provided with no warranties whatsoever: The Software is provided as is
and with all faults. You shall bear all the risks whether you can obtain satisfactory
quality, performance and accuracy and it shall be your responsibility to make efforts to
ensure them including eliminating errors. In addition, there is no warranty in the event
of prevention from using the Software or in the case of infringement of any right arising
from using the Software. Even if you can have any warranty in relation to the device or
the Software, such warranty is not the one provided by Microsoft or Trend Micro, and
therefore such warranty shall not bind either Microsoft or Trend Micro.
‒ Java support: The Software may include support of programs written in the Java language.
The Java technology is not free from defects and is not designed or manufactured for the
purpose of use or resell as online controlling equipment for the use in any dangerous
environment requiring preparation of safety device in case of an emergency such as in
operation of nuclear device, navigation or telecommunication system for aircrafts, air traffic
control, life support machine or weapon systems in which failure of the Java technology may
directly lead to an event which causes death or serious injury or environmental damage.
This statement of disclaimer of liability is the obligation of Microsoft under the contract
between Microsoft and Sun Microsystems.

Appendix B Menu List and Materials B-2

 1
‒ Limitation of Liability: Except to the extent prohibited by law, Microsoft shall not be
liable for any indirect damages, special damages, consequential damages or incidental 2
damages arising from or in relation to the performance or use of the Software. This
limitation of liability shall apply even in the case any remedy for damages may not fulfill
3
its essential purpose. In any event, Microsoft shall not liable for any damages 4
exceeding the amount equal to 250 US$.
‒ Limitation of Liability: Trend Micro shall not be liable for any consequential damages, 5
incidental damages, or loss of profit arising from the use of the software activation
code or instruction manuals. In any event, Trend Micro's total liability shall be limited to
6
a 100% of the amount paid by you for the service rendered during three months 7
immediately before the damage occurred.
‒ Restriction of reverse engineering, decompiling and disassembling: Except in cases explicitly 8
permitted by applicable laws regardless of the restriction hereunder, you shall not reverse
engineer, decompile or disassemble the Software.
9
‒ Export control: You acknowledge that the country of origin of the Software is the United States
10
of America. You agree to comply with export control laws and regulations of the United States
of America as well as both domestic laws of the United States of America and international 11
laws applicable to the Software including regulations issued by the U.S. Government or other
governments in relation to end users, end use and country of destination. 12
For additional information on export of the Software, refer to the website:
13
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/exporting/default.aspx.
14
Font License Agreement 15
16
This product uses Migu font (http://mix-mplus-ipa.sourceforge.jp/migu/) to display characters on the
screen. Migu font data is distributed from the URL stated above. Migu font is distributed in compliance 17
with "IPA Font License Agreement v1.0" (http://ipafont.ipa.go.jp/ipa_font_license_v1.html). This
18
product loaded with the Migu font is also in compliance with "IPA Font License Agreement v1.0." You
may use this product under the agreement to the provisions of "IPA Font License Agreement v1.0." You 19
have the right to change the font used for the display of this product from Migu font to IPA font.
However, there is no need to change the Migu font to IPA font in the specifications of this product. 20
Moreover, this product is designed to provide the display which is optimized for using Migu font. Note
that using IPA font for the display may cause a problem of compatibility of font data with regard to the
21
form of some characters resulting in degradation of the display on the screen. If you desire to change 22
from Migu font to IPA font, consult with our service agent.
23
APP B
24
25

27
B-3 Appendix B Menu List and Materials APP C
 IPA Font License Agreement v1.0

The Licensor provides the licensed Program (as defined in Article 1 below) under the terms of this
License Agreement (“Agreement”). Any use, reproduction or distribution of the l Program, or any
exercise of rights under this Agreement by a Recipient (as defined in Article 1 below) constitutes the
Recipient's acceptance of this Agreement.

Article 1 (Definitions)

In this Agreement, the following terms set forth in each item shall be defined as therein.

1. “Digital Font Program” shall mean a computer program containing, or used to render or display
fonts.
2. “Licensed Program” shall mean a Digital Font Program licensed by the Licensor under this
Agreement.
3. “Derived Program” shall mean a Digital Font Program created as a result of a modification,
addition, deletion, replacement or any other adaptation to or of a part or all of the licensed
Program, and includes a case where a Digital Font Program newly created by retrieving font
information from a part or all of the licensed Program or Embedded Fonts from a Digital Document
File with or without modification of the retrieved font information.
4. “Digital Content” shall mean products provided to end users in the form of digital data, including
video content, motion and/or still pictures, TV programs or other broadcasting content and
products consisting of character text, pictures, photographic images, graphic symbols and/or the
like.
5. “Digital Document File” shall mean a PDF file or other Digital Content created by various software
programs in which a part or all of the licensed Program becomes embedded or contained in the
file for the display of the font (“Embedded Fonts”). Embedded Fonts are used only in the display
of characters in the particular Digital Document File within which they are embedded, and shall be
distinguished from those in any Digital Font Program, which may be used for display of characters
outside that particular Digital Document File.
6. “Computer” shall include a server in this Agreement.
7. “Reproduction and Other Exploitation” shall mean reproduction, transfer, distribution, lease, public
transmission, presentation, exhibition, adaptation and any other exploitation.
8. “Recipient” shall mean anyone who receives the licensed Program under this Agreement,
including one that receives the licensed Program from a Recipient.

Article 2 (Grant of License )

The Licensor grants to the Recipient a license to use the licensed Program in any and all countries in
accordance with each of the provisions set forth in this Agreement. However, any and all rights
underlying in the licensed Program shall be held by the Licensor. In no sense is this Agreement
intended to transfer any right relating to the licensed Program held by the Licensor except as
specifically set forth herein or any right relating to any trademark, trade name, or service mark to the
Recipient.

Appendix B Menu List and Materials B-4

 1
1. The Recipient may install the licensed Program on any number of Computers and use the same in
accordance with the provisions set forth in this Agreement. 2
2. The Recipient may use the licensed Program, with or without modification in printed materials or
in Digital Content as an expression of character texts or the like.
3
3. The Recipient may conduct Reproduction and Other Exploitation of the printed materials and 4
Digital Content created in accordance with the preceding Paragraph, for commercial or
non-commercial purposes and in any form of media including but not limited to broadcasting, 5
communication and various recording media.
4. If any Recipient extracts Embedded Fonts from a Digital Document File to create a Derived
6
Program, such Derived Program shall be subject to the terms of this agreement. 7
5 .If any Recipient performs Reproduction or Other Exploitation of a Digital Document File in which
Embedded Fonts of the licensed Program are used only for rendering the Digital Content within 8
such Digital Document File then such Recipient shall have no further obligations under this
Agreement in relation to such actions.
9
6. The Recipient may reproduce the licensed Program as is without modification and transfer such
10
copies, publicly transmit or otherwise redistribute the licensed Program to a third party for
commercial or non-commercial purposes (“Redistribute”), in accordance with the provisions set 11
forth in Article 3 Paragraph 2.
7. The Recipient may create, use, reproduce and/or Redistribute a Derived Program under the terms 12
stated above for the licensed Program: provided, that the Recipient shall follow the provisions set
13
forth in Article 3 Paragraph 1 when Redistributing the Derived Program.
14
Article 3 (Restriction) 15
The license granted in the preceding Article shall be subject to the following restrictions:
16
17
1. If a Derived Program is Redistributed pursuant to Paragraph 4 and 7 of the preceding Article, the
following conditions must be met : 18
(1) The following must be also Redistributed together with the Derived Program, or be made
available online or by means of mailing mechanisms in exchange for a cost which does not
19
exceed the total costs of postage, storage medium and handling fees: 20
(a) a copy of the Derived Program; and
(b) any additional file created by the font developing program in the course of creating the 21
Derived Program that can be used for further modification of the Derived Program, if
any.
22
(2) It is required to also Redistribute means to enable recipients of the Derived Program to 23
replace the Derived Program with the licensed Program first released under this License (the
"Original Program"). Such means may be to provide a difference file from the Original APP B
Program, or instructions setting out a method to replace the Derived Program with the
24
Original Program.
(3) The Recipient must license the Derived Program under the terms and conditions of this 25
Agreement.
(4) No one may use or include the name of the licensed Program as a program name, font name
or file name of the Derived Program.
27
B-5 Appendix B Menu List and Materials APP C
 (5) Any material to be made available online or by means of mailing a medium to satisfy the
requirements of this paragraph may be provided, verbatim, by any party wishing to do so.
2. If the Recipient Redistributes the licensed Program pursuant to Paragraph 6 of the preceding
Article, the Recipient shall meet all of the following conditions:
(1) The Recipient may not change the name of the licensed Program.
(2) The Recipient may not alter or otherwise modify the licensed Program.
(3) The Recipient must attach a copy of this Agreement to the licensed Program.
3. This licensed Program is provided by the licensor “as is” and any expressed or implied warranty
as to the licensed Program or any derived program, including, but not limited to, warranties of title,
non-infringement, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose, are disclaimed. In no event
shall the licensor be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, extended, exemplary, or
consequential damages (including, but not limited to; procurement of substituted goods or service;
damages arising from system failure; loss or corruption of existing data or program; lost profits),
however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability or tort (including
negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the installation, use, the reproduction or other
exploitation of the licensed Program or any derived program or the exercise of any rights granted
hereunder, even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
4. The Licensor is under no obligation to respond to any technical questions or inquiries, or provide
any other user support in connection with the installation, use or the Reproduction and Other
Exploitation of the licensed Program or Derived Programs thereof.

Article 4 (Termination of Agreement)

1. The term of this Agreement shall begin from the time of receipt of the licensed Program by the
Recipient and shall continue as long as the Recipient retains any such licensed Program in any
way.
2. Notwithstanding the provision set forth in the preceding Paragraph, in the event of the breach of
any of the provisions set forth in this Agreement by the Recipient, this Agreement shall
automatically terminate without any notice. In the case of such termination, the Recipient may not
use or conduct Reproduction and Other Exploitation of the licensed Program or a Derived
Program: provided that such termination shall not affect any rights of any other Recipient receiving
the licensed Program or the Derived Program from such Recipient who breached this Agreement.

Article 5 (Governing Law)

1. IPA may publish revised and/or new versions of this license. In such an event, the Recipient may
select either this Agreement or any subsequent version of the Agreement in using, conducting the
Reproduction and Other Exploitation of, or Redistributing the licensed Program or a Derived
Program. Other matters not specified above shall be subject to the Copyright Law of Japan and
other related laws and regulations of Japan.
2. This Agreement shall be construed under the laws of Japan.

Appendix B Menu List and Materials B-6

 Overview 1
2

JAN-5203
Name and Function of Each Unit

Common Basic Operations 3

Range and Bearing Measurement Methods 4
Target Tracking and AIS 5
Functions of the ECDIS 6
JAN-5203 7

Route Planning System

Route Planning

Route Monitoring 8
Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 9
Automatic Sailing (Unsupported) 10
Operating a Chart 11
Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart
Manually 12
Route Logbook 13
Planning System Setting Up Screen View 14
Setting Up Alerts 15

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Setting Up the Operation Mode 16
Adjusting and Setting Up Equipment (for
Services) 17
Instruction Manual Playing Back Data Recorded During
Navigation [Playback] 18
Maintenance & Inspection 19
Failures and After-Sale Services 20
Not use the asbestos
About Disposal 21
For further information,contact: Specifications 22
Alert List APPA
Menu List and Materials APP B
URL Head office : http://www.jrc.co.jp/eng/
Marine Service Department
1-7-32 Tatsumi, Koto-ku, Tokyo 135-0053, Japan
e-mail : tmsc@jrc.co.jp
One-call : +81-50-3786-9201
ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified

CODE No.7ZPNA4689 NOV. 2021 Edition 1